Home

Tricon Elevator Control User Guide

Contents

1. Car Station Board I nputs Terminals Connectors Name Label AF 1 Al 1 In car inspection switch CINS AF 2 Al 2 Access inspection switch AINS AF 3 Al 3 Fire car switch FCAR AF 4 Al1 4 Fire hold switch FHLD AF 5 Al1 5 Calls reset button RES AF 6 Al 6 Independent switch IND AF 7 Al 7 Door open button DOB AF 8 A1 8 Door close button DCB BO 1 B1 1 Handicap chime enable Attendant hall bypass HEN BO 2 B1 2 Access and In car inspection 2 CI N2 BO 3 B1 3 Attendant up button front door hold ATTU BO 4 B1 4 Attendant down button rear door hold ATTD BO 5 B1 5 Car MG switch CMG BO 6 B1 6 Rear door open button RDOB BO 7 B1 7 Rear door close button RDCB BO 8 B1 8 Stop switch monitor SSM CL 1 C1 1 Car call button for floor 1 CC1 CL 2 C1 2 Car call button for floor 2 CC2 CL 3 C1 3 Car call button for floor 3 CC3 CL 4 C1 4 Car call button for floor 4 CCc4 CL 5 C1 5 Car call button for floor 5 CC5 CL 6 C1 6 Car call button for floor 6 CC6 CL 7 C1 7 Car call button for floor 7 CC7 CL 8 C1 8 Car call button for floor 8 CC8 5 28 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _ MCE Web Table 5 9 Car Station Board CSTA N v6 2 Output Examples A17 1 2000 Main Menus Car Station Board Outputs Terminals Connectors Name Label AF 25 AF26 A3 1 to A3 2 Fire lock bypass FBP AF 17 AF
2. Decel Jerk out 0 Rate of decrease of deceleration to zero ft s3_ 0 8 0 8 0 5 0 when slowing the elevator to leveling speed Accel Rate 1 Acceleration rate 1 ft s l0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Decel Rate 1 Deceleration rate 1 ft s2 J0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Accel Jerk in 1 Rate of increase of acceleration up to ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 ACCEL Rate when increasing elevator speed Accel Jerk out 1 Rate of decrease of acceleration to zero ftys3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 when approaching contract elevator speed Decel Jerk in 1 Rate of increase of deceleration up to ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 Decel Rate when decreasing elevator speed Decel Jerk out 1 Rate of decrease of deceleration to zero ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 when slowing the elevator to leveling speed Accel Rate 2 Acceleration rate 2 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Decel Rate 2 Deceleration rate 2 ft s l0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Accel Jerk in 2 Rate of increase of acceleration up to ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 ACCEL Rate when increasing elevator speed Accel Jerk out 2 Rate of decrease of acceleration to zero ft s3_ 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 when approaching contract elevator speed Decel Jerk in 2 Rate of increase of deceleration up to ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 Decel Rate when decreasing elevator speed Decel Jerk out2 Rate of decrease of deceleration to zero ft s3_ 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 when slowing the elevator to leveling speed Accel Rate 3 Acceleration rate 3 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 D
3. page 3 48 Table 3 5 HPV 900 Drive Parameters a s MCE Field MCE No Parameter Description Unit Range Defaults Set Adjust AO A1 Drive Contract Car Spd Elevator Contract Speed fom l0 3000 0 1 Contract Mtr Spd Motor Speed at contract speed rom 50 3000 1130 Response Speed regulator sensitivity rad 1 0 20 0 10 10 sec Inertia System inertia sec 0 25 50 00 2 0 2 0 Inner Loop Xover Inner speed loop crossover frequency rad 0 1 20 0 2 0 2 0 with Ereg speed regulator sec Gain Reduce Mult Speed regulator response in low gain 10 100 100 100 mode Gain Chng Level Speed level to change to low gain 0 100 0 100 0 mode with internal gain switch Tach Rate Gain Helps with rope resonance issues 0 30 0 0 0 Spd Phase Margin Sets phase margin of speed regulator o 45 90 80 80 with PI speed regulator Ramped Stop Time to ramp from rated torque to sec 0 2 50 0 20 0 20 Time zero with torque ramp down stop function Contact Flt Time Time before contactor fault is declaredjsec 0 10 5 00 0 50 0 80 3 53 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Table 3 5 HPV 900 Drive Parameters Me Brake Pick Time Time before brake pick fault declared sec 0 5 00 0 00 1 0 Brake Hold Time Time before brake hold fault declared sec 0 5 00 0 00 0 20 Overspeed Level Overspe
4. Motor Setup Field Adjustable Parameters are shaded E2 01 Motor Rated FLA Set to motor nameplate full load amps This value A 0 00 Motor i is automatically set during Auto Tuning 1500 0 rated FLA E2 02 Motor Rated Slip Motor rated slip frequency Note Refer to the Hz JO 15 0 kVA attached table to calculate the slip frequency dependent E2 03 No Load Current Motor No Load Current A 0 150 30 50 Motor FLA E2 04 Number of Poles Number of Motor Poles Flux Vector only 2 48 6 PG Option Setup Flux Vector only Field Adjustable Parameters are shaded F1 01 PG Pulse Rev Encoder pulses per revolution Flux Vector only 0 60000 1024 1024 F1 02 PG Fdbk Loss Sel Stopping method at PG line brake detection l 0 3 1 1 Flux Vector 0 Ramp to stop 2 Fast Stop only 1 Cost to stop 3 Alarm only F1 03 PG Overspeed Stopping method at OS detection 0 3 1 1 Sel 0 Ramp to stop 2 Fast Stop Flux Vector only 1 Cost to stop 3 Alarm only F1 04 PG Deviation Sel Stopping method at DEV fault detection 0 3 1 1 Flux Vector only 0 Ramp to stop 2 Fast Stop 1 Cost to stop 3 Alarm only F1 05 IPG Rotation Sel PG rotation 0 CCW 1 CW Flux Vector only l 0 1 0 Oorl F1 06 PG Output Ratio PG Division Rate Flux Vector only 1 132 1 1 F1 07 Flux Vector only Set to drive defaults thru F1 13 Digital Inputs See H1 01 description in F7 Drive Manual H1 01 Terminal S3 Sel
5. DHALL Board Outputs Terminals Connectors Name Label AO 26 A3 1 to A3 2 Fire recall switch ON indicator FONI AO 18 A2 1 to A2 2 Fire OFF switch ON indicator FOFI AO 28 A3 3 to A3 4 AO 20 A2 3 to A2 4 AO 30 A3 5 to A3 6 AO 22 A2 5 to A2 6 AO 32 A3 7 to A3 8 AO 24 A2 7 to A2 8 BL 1 B3 1 to B3 2 BL 2 B2 1 to B2 2 BL 3 B3 3 to B3 4 BL 4 B2 3 to B2 4 BL 5 B3 5 to B3 6 BL 6 B2 5 to B2 6 BL 7 B3 7 to B3 8 BL 8 B2 7 to B2 8 CL 1 C3 1 to C3 2 Hall call ack light 1 HCA1 CL 2 C2 1 to C2 2 Hall call ack light 2 HCA2 CL 3 C3 3 to C3 4 Hall call ack light 3 HCA3 CL 4 C2 3 to C2 4 Hall call ack light 4 HCA4 CL 5 C3 5 to C3 6 Hall call ack light 5 HCA5 CL 6 C2 5 to C2 6 Hall call ack light 6 HCA6 CL 7 C3 7 to C3 8 Hall call ack light 7 HCA7 CL 8 C2 7 to C2 8 Hall call ack light 8 HCA8 5 35 The Hand Held Unit Me Extension Board EXT1 N Table 5 16 Extension Board EXT1 N v6 2 Input Examples A17 1 2000 CarTop Board Inputs Terminals Connectors Name Label AL 1 Al 1 Locks bypass switch LBS AL 2 Al 2 Gate bypass switch GBS AL 3 Al 3 Governor 110 overspeed switch GOV1 AL 4 Al1 4 Fire remote switch ON FRON AL 5 A1 5 Fire remote switch OFF FROF AL 6 A1 6 AL 7 Al 7 Gate bypass monitor GBM AL 8 A1 8 Lock bypass monitor LBM BL 1 B1 1 Access top zone limit ATUL BL 2 B1 2 Access top zone
6. A4 Power Convert Id Reg Diff gain Flux Current regulator differential gain 0 80 1 20 1 00 1 00 Id Reg Prop Gain Flux current regulator proportional 0 20 0 40 0 30 0 30 gain Iq Reg Diff Gain Torque current regulator differential 0 80 1 20 1 00 1 00 gain Iq Reg Prop Gain Torque current regulator proportional 0 20 0 40 0 30 0 30 gain PWM Frequency Carrier frequency kHz 2 5 16 0 10 0 10 0 UV Alarm Level Voltage level for undervoltage alarm 80 99 80 90 UV Fault Level Voltage level for undervoltage fault 50 88 80 80 Extern Reactance External choke reactance 0 10 0 0 Input L L Volts Nominal line line AC input voltage RMS volts 110 480 Drive dep A5 Motor Motor ID Motor Identification 4 PoleDFLT 6 MCE Test Pole DFLT MCE Test Rated Mtr Power Rated motor output power HP 1 0 500 5 0 X Rated Mtr Volts Rated motor terminal RMS voltage volts 190 0 575 0 1460 Rated Excit Freq Rated excitation frequency Hz 5 0 400 0 60 Rated Motor Curr Rated motor current amps 1 00 800 00 6 8 Motor Poles Motor poles 2 32 6 Rated Mtr Speed Rated motor speed at full load RPM 50 0 3000 0 1130 No Load Curr Percent no load current 10 0 60 0 Stator Leakage X Stator leakage reactance 0 20 0 9 0 9 0 Rotor Leakage X Rotor leakage reactance 0 20 0 9 0 9 0 Stator Resist Stator resistance 0 20 0 1 5 1 5 Motor Iron Loss Iron loss at rated frequency 0 15 0
7. Input Function B1 1 Car 1 selected B1 2 Car 2 selected B1 3 Car 3 selected B1 4 Car 4 selected B1 5 Car 5 selected B1 6 Car 6 selected B1 7 Pre transfer This will stop all running cars at the next floor and wait for the removal of this input B1 8 Emergency power operation Car Parameters Description and Operation The car uses two parameters for emergency power parameters 108 and 155 Parameter 108 the fire recall floor is used as the recall floor for fire service and emergency power Parameter 155 emergency power enabled must be set to yes when the dispatcher parameter 20 emer gency power recall time is not set to 0 This will enable emergency power operation on the car and the dispatcher Once parameter 155 is set to yes the car will not operate if it cannot com municate with the dispatcher 6 6 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __ Index _MCE Web Emergency Power Operation Dispatcher Parameters Description and Operation The dispatcher uses three parameters for emergency power e Parameter 20 emergency power recall time out e Parameter 21 emergency power manual operation phase 1 and phase 2 e Parameter 22 emergency power manual phase 2 select Parameter 20 sets the time the dispatcher will wait before aborting a phase 1 recall if a car is being held or cannot run If a car is passed over the dispatcher will try again after returning all of the other cars A car that has
8. 5 75 The Hand Held Unit A ek Table 5 29 Dispatcher Parameter Screen Parameters 26 Hold doors open at first 0 3 0 see Help After parking at this floor the car parking floor column will hold the indicated doors open 0 Do not open doors 1 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 Open both doors This parameter overrides the Open doors once parameter for this floor pars 18 25 27 Hold doors open at sec 0 3 0 see Help After parking at this floor the car ond parking floor column will hold the indicated doors open 0 Do not open doors 1 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 Open both doors This parameter overrides the Open doors once parameter for this floor pars 18 25 28 Hold doors open at third 0 3 0 see Help After parking at this floor the car parking floor column will hold the indicated doors open 0 Do not open doors 1 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 Open both doors This parameter overrides the Open doors once parameter for this floor pars 18 25 29 Hold doors open at fourth 0 3 0 see Help After parking at this floor the car parking floor column will hold the indicated doors open 0 Do not open doors 1 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 Open both doors This parameter overrides the Open doors once parameter for this floor pars 18 25 30 Hold doors open at fifth 0 3 0 see H
9. poet Daa ee For MCE control application custom software provides added control over the sequence of operations Additionally the software provides ride tuning features and speed display in feet minute display and entry To understand and access these features make sure you have a copy of the supplemental instructions for software VSF110 12 This supplement describes features in addition to or alterations of standard drive software Check monitor U 14 to verify that the correct software is loaded on to the drive If the software is not VSF110 12 contact MCE Technical Support Refer to section 3 of the F7 Users Manual for keypad instructions A Caution Elevator control products must be installed by experienced field personnel This manual does not address code requirements The field personnel must know all the rules and regulations pertaining to the safe installation and running of elevators 3 72 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index_ _MCE Web Yaskawa F7 Drive Yaskawa Programmer A Caution Read and observe all warnings listed in the F7 User Manual Program the F7 using the drive keypad For a complete description of keypad use refer to Section 3 of the F7 Users Manual The following parameter description is for information and reference only All necessary parameter settings were made at the factory using the information supplied
10. Log In 6 TB1 21 Logic input 6 STEP REF STEP REF BO B2 Log In 7 TB1 22 Logic input 7 STEP REF STEP REF Bl B3 Log In 8 TB1 23 Logic input 8 STEP REF RUN DoWN B2 Log In 9 TB1 24 Logic input 9 External RUN UP Fault 1 C3 Logic Outputs Log Out 1 tb1 9 Logic Output 1 Ready To SPEED REG Run RLS Log Out 2 tb1 10 Logic Output 2 Run Com NO FUNC mand TION Log Out 3 tb1 11 Logic Output 3 MTR NO FUNC OVER TION LOAD Log Out 4 tb1 12 Logic Output 4 READY TO NO FUNC RUN TION Relay Coil 1 Relay 1 Function Selection FAULT READY TO RUN Relay Coil 2 Relay 2 Function Selection SPEED SPEED REG REG RLS RLS C4 Analog Outputs Analog Out 1 Analog Output 1 TORQUE TORQUE REF REF Analog Out 2 Analog Output 2 SPEED SPEED FEEDBK FEEDBK Utility UO U1 Password Password 000000 000000 U2 Hidden Items Enable or disable hidden parameters Enable ENABLE ENABLE Disable U3 Unit Unit for parameters English ENGLISH ENGLISH Metric U4 Overspeed Allows overspeed test during inspection Yes No No Test No U5 Restore Dflts Reset all parameters to default values U6 Drive Info Drive information Drive Version Boot Boot Version Version and Cube ID Drive Cube ID U7 HEX Monitor Hex Monitor U8 Language Sel Selects Language for operator text English English English deutsch U9 BASICS Selects Open Loop or Closed Loop drive Open Loop Open Loop Operation Operation Closed Loop Co
11. OPEN ERROR Door did not fully open 5 11 The Hand Held Unit Me Table 5 1 States Table Car V 6 26 and HHU Version 6 26 02 06 5 12 Manual 42 02 2T00 outer door zone 14 Locking GL error GL INPUT OFF GL input did not make off during door closing 15 Locking lock error LOCK ERROR Lock did not make during door closing 16 Locking gate GATE ERROR Gate did not make during door closing error 17 Lost gate error LOST GL ERR Gate opened while car was moving 18 Lost locks error LOST LockERR Looks opened while car was moving 19 Lost CL error LOST CL ERR Lost CL input off while car was moving 20 Lost GL input LOST GL ERR Lost GL input off while car was moving while doors were closed 21 Cam drop error CAM DROP ERR The cam did not drop in the time allotted 22 Gate jumped GATE J UMPED The gate contact is made although the doors are opened doors cannot close because it is presumed that the gate con tact is jumpered out 23 Locks jumped LOCKS J UMPED The lock contacts are made although the doors are opened doors cannot close because it is presumed that the lock con tacts are jumpered out 24 Gate and locks G amp L JUMPED The gate and lock contacts are made jumped although the doors are opened doors can not close because it is presumed that the gate and lock contacts are jumpered out
12. 35 Em Power Recall time out time 0 255 sec Determines the length of time the dispatcher will attempt to recall a non responding car dur ing emergency power operation before declaring it out of service 36 Em Power Manual oper ation Phases 1 and 2 yes no 1 0 yes 1 no 0 When set to 1 yes emergency power selection for recall or run ning under emergency power will be by manual switch only 37 38 Em Power Manual Phase 2 select Em Power Maximum number of cars auto Phase 2 yes no 1 0 1 8 yes 1 no 0 each When set to 1 yes emergency power recall will be performed by the dispatcher but car may be selected to run under emergency power by manual switch only Determines the maximum num ber of cars that will be allowed to run simultaneously during emer gency power operation 39 40 41 Parameter 39 Cross cancellation enabled Parameter 41 yes no 1 0 yes 1 no 0 5 77 The Hand Held Unit A ek Table 5 29 Dispatcher Parameter Screen Parameters 42 Code Blue Override yes no 1 0 O yes 1 If set to 1 yes a car in inde independent and atten no 0 pendent or attendant mode will dant close its doors and recall immedi ately to the code blue floor Code blue overrides indepen dent and attendant service 43 Code Blue Override Fire yes no 1 0 J0 yes 1 If set to 1 yes a car in Fire Ser Recall n
13. Car runs down at a controlled speed Turn off main line power and wait 60 seconds Swap motor field connections Fl amp F2 Swap wires TB1 4 B and TB1 5 B 2 While running the car on inspection vary the inspection pot and observe the car to make sure car speed varies 3 Connect the red meter lead to the TB1 68 drive terminal Connect the black meter lead to the TB1 63 drive terminal As the car runs adjust the inspection pot until 0 7 volts appears on the meter If the car is running down the polarity will be negative If the car is running up the polarity will be positive 4 Hand tach the car It should be running at 10 of contract speed If not modify drive 3 parameter 11 Motor RPM to achieve the correct speed Drive Faults Drive faults will be indicated on the display as an F followed by a 2 or 3 digit number For example F 910 indicates a blown fuse There are two 2 error logs within the drive Parameter 800 contains a list of the last 16 faults that occurred This list is constantly updated with the newest error overwriting the oldest The list is stored on NVRAM and is never cleared Errors on this list could be from the first time the drive was powered up It is acontinuous list constantly updated e Parameter 0 also contains a list of the last 16 faults that occurred This list is also con stantly updated with the newest error overwriting the oldest However this list can be
14. Contents __ Index _MCE Web 3 105 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A ek Self Tune The Magnetek DSD 412 digital DC drive has a self tuning feature that dynamically calculates the armature resistance and inductance This includes the choke and filter used in series with the armature It also measures the motor field resistance and inductance The self tune procedure will learn the motor and store the values in parameters 613 614 and 615 The following assumes you have read the drive manual and understand how to use the parameter unit Motor fields must be at full field current during self tune Display parameter 612 must be the same as parameter 50 Check by running on inspection Motor field fault will result if parame ter 612 is less than parameter 50 during self tune Go to parameter 997 Put the write enable switch up the red LED will be on Press the Function Data Key Connect the temporary jumper from L1B the Bottom of the 1st controller fuse to DE33 contact This will lift the M relay Press the enter key to begin the self tune test The M relay will pick and drop until the display says Pass or Fault Put the write enable switch down LED off Press the Function Display key 977 Use the down arrow key to access the 613 parameter use the function data key to view the value stored The value stored in 613 armature resistance should be recorded and then loaded in parameter 4 The value stored in 614
15. Floor Table Special Conditions Empty Floors Ifa floor table entry has all flags off a No entered under each variable that floor becomes an empty floor The car will not stop at this floor It will not change the posi tion indicator or light the lanterns The car position indicator will skip this floor The floor will not exist as far as the car is concerned Setting Openings Rear Doors All existing openings must be set in the floor table The setting of at least one rear opening in the floor table will activate the rear door control soft ware If a rear door opening is set by mistake in a car that does not have rear openings the rear door opening should be cleared and then the car should be reset by switching off power This will disable the rear door control software Setting Hall Calls If the car is a group car with no local hall riser no hall calls need be set in the floor table If the car does have a conspicuous riser simplex riser then the hall calls for that riser should be set If a hall call is not set in the floor table its corresponding input will not be allocated Imaginary floors An imaginary floor is a floor that has no openings and where the car does not stop but that has a position in the position indicator It could be described as a chalk mark in the elevator hatch The slowdown vanes or magnets for this floor must be installed like any other floor but no leveling vane or magnet is needed since the car will not
16. OType Terminal Board L Type Terminal Board F Type Terminal Board The F Type Terminal board provides 8 single wire inputs and 8 two wire V GND outputs The wiring prints for the job will detail how each input and output must be connected Figure 1 12 F Type Terminal Board Connections F TYPE TERMINAL BOARD 8 Inputs A1 1 through A1 8 23 4 5 6 7 8 4 Outputs A2 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 4 Outputs A3 CONNECTION EXAMPLE ONLY 1 21 Tricon General I nformation A ek O Type Terminal Board The O Type Terminal board provides 8 single wire inputs and 8 single wire outputs that share acommon voltage connection The common voltage is determined by a connection to a voltage source on the Relay Board Figure 1 13 O Type Terminal Board Connections O TYPE TERMINAL BOARD 8 Inputs A1 1 through A1 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 To positive voltage on Relay Board 8 Outputs A2 and A3 A2 CONNECTION EXAMPLE ONLY 1 22 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index _MCE Web General Wiring Instructions L Type Terminal Board The L Type Terminal board provides 8 inputs and 8
17. Setup Fault 7 Run logic inputs are not correctly defined Check LOG IN 1 TB1 16 through LOG IN 9 TB1 24 for cor rect setting Setup Fault 8 DIR CONFIRM C1 enabled RUN UP RUN DOWN not assigned as logic inputs SPD COM MAND SRC C1 not set to ANALOG I NPUT Not used Setup Fault 9 Incorrect setting of motor parameters Motor parameters must satisfy the following formulas MOTOR MIN VOLTS lt MOTOR MID VOLTS lt RATED MTR VOLTS MOTOR MIN FREQ lt MOTOR MID FREQ lt RATED EXCIT FREQ Confirm settings Stall Test Fault Motor current exceeds value of STALL TEST LVL parameter for more than the time specified by STALL FAULT TIME Confirm correct setting of STALL TEST LVL A1 and STALL FAULT TIME A1 Check motor machine and brake for pos sible mechanical bind Check correct setting of motor parame ters Check for excessive motor current Undervolt Fault DC Bus voltage low Voltage on the DC Bus has dropped below user entered values for INPUT L L Volts A4 and UV FAULT LEVEL A4 Check braking resistance and connections Verify proper AC input voltage to drive Possible disturbances on the AC line Undervolt Alarm DC Bus voltage low dur ing run DC bus voltage has dropped below user entered values for INPUT L L Volts A4 and UV ALARM LEVEL A4 Check braking resistance and connections Verify proper AC input voltage to drive Possible disturbances on the AC l
18. The Hand Held Unit Me Table 5 1 States Table Car V 6 26 and HHU Version 6 26 02 06 15 Down slowdown Dn sidn none Car is moving down in slowdown with no none direction preference 16 Down slowdown Dn sidn up Car is moving down in slowdown with an up up direction preference 17 Stopping Stopping Car is stopping with no direction preference 18 Up stopping Up stopping Car is stopping with an up direction prefer ence 19 Down stopping Dn stopping Car is stopping with a down direction pref erence 20 Up Run 1 Up Run 1 21 Down Run 1 Down Run 1 22 State 22 State 22 23 State 23 State 23 9 Doors 0 Init 1 Allow doors to Allow open Doors can open if desired open 2 Close doors Close Doors should close the car is ready to leave the floor 3 Lock doors Locked Doors are locked 4 Slowdown Slowdown The car is in slowdown update lanterns 5 Locked error LOCKED ERROR Doors are unlocked when they should be locked 6 State 6 STATE 6 7 State 7 STATE 7 8 State 8 State 8 9 State 9 State 9 10 Door 0 Init 1 No door No door Car has no door on this side 2 Stopped Stopped Door is neither opening nor closing 3 Stopped by Stopped SE Closing stopped by SE activation safety edge 4 DOB opening Opening DOB Door is opening due to door open button activation 5 SE opening Opening SE Door is opening due to safe edge activation 6 EE opening Opening EE Door is op
19. e Momentarily pressing switch S3 displays a counter showing the number of times the fault has occurred e Holding switch S3 for seven seconds clears the fault counter e Momentarily pressing switch S1 resets the Limit board 4 6 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __ Index _MCE Web Limit Board Adjustment Operation Inspection Setup Before High Speed Before the car can be moved on inspection a Learn operation must be performed using the Limit board The Inspection Speed Learn operation allows the Limit board to learn the elevator inspection speed Once learned the Limit board can prevent the car from exceeding 150 of the learned inspection speed when the car is operating in Inspection mode The inspection learn can be completed before the slowdown limits are wired To learn inspection speed 1 Press and hold the S3 and S1 switches Release switch S1 before releasing switch S3 LED D25 will blink rapidly four times per second Diagnostic LEDs D10 and D11 will be on 2 Move the car on inspection in the up direction for five seconds When the car is stopped the D10 LED will go off 3 Move the car on inspection in the down direction for five seconds When the car is stopped the D11 LED will go off D25 will now be on continuously indicating the learn was successful Operation Normal Setup High Speed The Limit board must have all of the proper inputs for direction speed and slowdowns The hoistway limits must be set to
20. HPV 600 Drive Parameter Reference Closed Loop Following is a list of drive parameters with explanations and setting recommendations Refer to the previous section for initial programming Please refer to HPV 600 AC Drive Start Up Closed Loop on page 3 26 Table 3 3 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Closed Loop Parameter Description Unit Range Defaults oe Adjust AO A1 Drive Contract Car Spd Elevator Contract Speed fpm 0 3000 400 Contract Mtr Spd Motor Speed at elevator contract speed rpm 50 3000 1130 t Response Sensitivity of speed regulator rad 1 0 20 0 10 10 sec Inertia System inertia sec 0 25 50 00 2 0 2 0 Inner Loop Xover Inner speed loop crossover frequency rad sec 0 1 20 0 2 0 2 0 with Ereg speed regulator Gain Reduce Mult Percent of response of speed regulator 10 100 100 100 used in low gain Mode Gain Chng Level Speed level to change to low gain mode 0 100 0 100 0 with internal gain switch Tach Rate Gain Helps with effects of rope resonance 0 30 0 0 0 Spd Phase Margin Sets phase margin of speed regulator fe 45 90 80 80 with PI speed regulator Ramped Stop Time Time to ramp from rated torque to zero sec 0 2 50 0 20 0 20 with torque ramp down stop function Contact Flt Time Time before a contactor fault is declared sec 0 10 5 00 10 50 2 0 Brake Pick Time Time before a brake pick f
21. To program O type Terminal boards to directly drive indicators From the Position Indicators menu select the Cartop Hall or Car Station board From the selected board menu select the floor to be programmed 5 58 Manual 42 02 2T00 Main Menus Floors are typically programmed according to the following table Table 5 24 PI Programming Using One Output per Lamp Floor Car top board Hall board Car station board Floor Entry Floor Entry Floor Entry 1 1 9 1 17 1 2 2 10 2 18 2 3 4 11 4 19 4 4 8 12 8 20 8 5 16 13 16 21 16 6 32 14 32 22 32 7 64 15 64 23 64 8 128 16 128 24 128 9 32 0 1 8 17 32 0 1 8 9 16 0 Contents Index _MCE Web 5 59 The Hand Held Unit MeE Light Duty CE Fixture Drivers The light duty CE driver board may be used to drive up to three CE digital position indicators In this configuration the outputs of an O type Terminal board on the Hall board for Simplex cars or on the Car Top board for Group cars are used to control the CE driver board The CE driver board in turn drives a three wire serial bus supporting up to three CE digital position indicators To program O type Terminal boards to directly drive indicators i From the Position Indicators menu select the Hall or Cartop Sta P tion board as appropriate e From the selected board menu select the floor to be pro grammed peewee Position Indicators Car top
22. 8 0 8 0 0 0 zero when slowing the elevator to leveling speed A3 Multistep Ref Speed command 1 Multi Step Speed command 1 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 4 Speed command 2 Multi Step Speed command 2 ft m l 3000 to 3000 0 12 Speed Command 3 Multi Step Speed command 3 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 45 Speed command 4 Multi Step Speed command 4 ft m l 3000 to 3000 0 Speed Command 5 Multi Step Speed command 5 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 Speed command 6 Multi Step Speed command 6 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 Speed Command 7 Multi Step Speed command 7 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 Speed command 8 Multi Step Speed command 8 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 Speed Command 9 Multi Step Speed command 9 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 Speed Command 10 Multi Step Speed command 10 ft m _ 3000 to 3000 0 0 Speed Command 11 Multi Step Speed command 11 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 Speed Command 12 Multi Step Speed command 12 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 Speed Command 13 Multi Step Speed command 13 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 Speed Command 14 Multi Step Speed command 14 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 Speed Command 15 Multi Step Speed command 15 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 A4 Power Convert Id Reg Diff gain Flux Current regulator differential 0 80 1 20 1 00 1 00 gain Id Reg Prop Gain Flux current regulator proportional 0 20 0 40 10 30 0 30 gain lq Reg Diff Gain Torque current regulator differential 0 80 1 20 1 00 1 00 3 12 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index__ _MCE Web Table 3 1 HPV 600
23. To move into the Lantern Parameters screen use 8 or key To return to the previous menu use key To edit a field Keep pressing the key until you reach the desired field Enter the value using the numbers on the keypad e Use the key to accept You will move to the next field If you are on the last field you will move back to the Lantern Parameters screen e Use the key to abort change You will move back to the Lantern Parameters screen To return to the PI Board setup menu use the key Table 5 27 Indicator Parameters Edit Screen Editable Field Description Value Blink ON time This sets the time the lantern will stay ON for the first blink of the down direction If set zero there will be no double ding for the down direction Blink OFF time This sets the time the lantern will stay OFF after the first ding of the down direction double ding Wait time This sets the time the lantern will stay OFF if switching from Up to Down or vice versa 5 65 The Hand Held Unit RA exe BMS Setup Figure 5 10 Car BMS Setup Screen The BMS board provides a modem control interface between the Tricon controller and a remote monitoring system Grayed areas apply only to group dispatcher application Table 5 28 BMS Screen Parameters a HHU Display eee a Units Help 1 Job identification name 8 characters 2 Phone number 1 En
24. 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 ACCEL Rate when increasing eleva tor speed Accel Jerk out 3 Rate of decrease of acceleration to ft s 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 zero when approaching contract ele vator speed Decel Jerk in 3 Rate of increase of deceleration up to ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 Decel Rate when decreasing elevator speed Decel Jerk out 3 Rate of decrease of deceleration to ft s 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 zero when slowing the elevator to lev eling speed A3 Multistep Ref Speed command 1 Multi Step Speed command 1 ft m 0 4 Speed command 2 Multi Step Speed command 2 ft m 0 12 Speed Command 3 Multi Step Speed command 3 ft m 0 45 Speed command 4 Multi Step Speed command 4 ft m 0 Speed Command 5 Multi Step Speed command 5 ft m 0 0 Speed command 6 Multi Step Speed command 6 ft m 0 0 Speed Command 7 Multi Step Speed command 7 ft m 0 0 Speed command 8 Multi Step Speed command 8 ft m 0 Speed Command 9 Multi Step Speed command 9 ft m 0 0 Speed Command Multi Step Speed command 10 ft m 0 0 10 Speed Command Multi Step Speed command 11 ft m 0 0 11 Speed Command Multi Step Speed command 12 ft m 0 0 12 Speed Command Multi Step Speed command 13 ft m 0 0 13 Speed Command Multi Step Speed command 14 ft m 0 0 14 Speed Command Multi Step Speed command 15 ft m 0 0 Magnetek HPV 900 AC Vector Drive Table 3 5 HPV 900 Drive Parameters
25. 25 State 25 STATE 25 12 Drive Control O Init 1 Disabled Disabled Drive is disabled 2 Stopped Stopped Drive is stopped 3 Stopped not yet Stop relevel Drive is stopped but not level at floor leveled 4 Up relevel start Up relevel Drive start for relevel up not used 5 Releveling up RelevelingUp Drive is releveling up 6 Dn relevel start Dn relevel start Drive start for relevel down not used 7 Releveling down RevelingDn Drive is releveling down 8 Up run start Up run start Up run start 9 Up run first Up run 1 Just started waiting to leave door zone 10 Running up Run up Drive is running up 11 Down run start DownRunStart Down run start 12 Down run first Down Run 1 Just started waiting to leave door zone 13 Running down Run down Drive is running down 14 Up slowdown Up sidn start Drive is beginning slowdown in up direction start not used 15 Slowdown up Slowing up Drive is in slowdown in up direction 16 Dn slowdown Dn sldn start Drive is beginning slowdown in down direc start tion not used 17 Slowdown down Slowing down Drive is in slowdown in down direction 18 Up leveling in Up ODZ level Drive is in up leveling within outer door zone not used Contents __Index__ _MCE Web Main Menus Table 5 1 States Table Car V 6 26 and HHU Version 6 26 02 06 19 Up leveling in inner door zone Upl DZlevel Drive is in up leveling within inner door zone 20 Down leveling in outer door zone DownO
26. 6 Again run the car and observe the approach into the floor If the car still has too much slow down distance decrease the DECEL RATE 0 A2 parameter to 0 1 ft s less than the present rate 7 Repeat until the car is coming into the floor with about 3 to 6 inches of approach 3 66 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 900 AC Vector Drive 8 Modify the DECEL J ERK IN 0 A2 and DECEL J ERK OUT 0 A2 parameters to get a smooth approach into the floor with 1 to 2 inches of sustained leveling If there is not enough sustained leveling the car may overshoot intermittently and cause relevel ing 9 Modify the ACCEL J ERK OUT 0 A2 rate to the same value that was entered into the DECEL J ERK IN 0 parameter 10 If the rated speed of the car is greater than 200 feet per minute make a one floor run Observe the approach into the floor on single floor runs If the approach is longer than the multi floor runs increase the SPEED COMMAND 4 A3 parameter until the approach on a one floor run is the same as the multi floor run If the approach is quicker decrease the SPEED COMMAND 4 A3 parameter until the approach on a one floor run is the same as the multi floor run 11 The speed curve parameters have been set up Ride the car and observe the acceleration deceleration and jerk rates If any rate seems too sharp make that value smaller Note that changing values in the deceleration profile will result in a dif
27. Multi Function Input Terminal S3 Function 0 82 9 9 Selection 9 External Base Block N C H1 02 Terminal S4 Sel Multi Function Input Terminal S4 Function 0 82 14 14 Selection14 Fault Reset H1 03 Terminal S5 Sel Multi Function Input Terminal S5 Function 0 82 80 80 Selection80 Multi Step Ref 1F H1 04 Terminal S6 Sel Multi Function Input Terminal S6 Function 0 82 81 81 Selection81 Multi Step Ref 2F H1 05 Terminal S7 Sel Multi Function Input Terminal S7 Function 0 82 82 82 Selection82 Multi Step Ref 3F H1 06 Terminal S8 Sel Multi Function Input Terminal S8 Function 0 82 6 6 Selection6 Jog Ref Inspection speed Digital Outputs H2 01 description in F7 Drive Manual H2 01 Term M1 M2 Sel Terminal M1 M2 Function Selection 0 40 40 40 40 During Run 3 H2 02 Term M3 M4 Sel Terminal M1 M2 Function Selection 0 40 4 4 4 Frequency Detection 1 H2 03 Term M5 M6 Sel Terminal M1 M2 Function Selection 0 40 F F F Not Used 3 82 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _ MCE Web Yaskawa F7 Drive Analog I nputs H3 01 Term A1 Lvl Set Sets the signal level of terminal A1 0 1 0 0 0 O to 10VDC_ 1 10 to 10VDC H3 02 Terminal Al Gain Sets the output level when 10V is input asa 0 0 100 0 100 0 percentage of max output frequency E1 04 1000 0 H3 03 Terminals Al Sets the output leve
28. Startup amp Drive Adjustment Me Table 3 3 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Closed Loop Decel Rate when decreasing elevator speed Flux Wkn Factor Defines the torque limit at higher speeds 60 0 100 0 100 0 100 Ana Out 1 Offset Subtracts an effective voltage to actual 99 9 99 9 0 00 0 00 analog output 1 Ana Out 2 Offset Subtracts an effective voltage to actual 99 9 99 9 0 00 0 00 analog output 2 Ana Out 1 Gain Scaling factor for analog output 1 0 10 0 1 0 1 0 Ana Out 2 Gain Scaling factor for analog output 2 0 10 0 1 0 1 0 Fit Reset Delay Time Before a fault is automatically reset sec 0 120 5 5 Fit Reset Hour Number of faults that is allowed to be faults 0 10 3 3 automatically reset per hour Up to SPD Level The logic output function is true when the 0 110 00 80 00 080 00 motor speed is above the user specified speed defined by this parameter Mains DIP Speed When enabled by Main DIP Speed A1 5 99 9 25 00 25 00 parameter speed reduced by this percent when UV alarm low voltage declared Run Delay Timer Delays drive recognition of RUN signal sec 0 00 0 99 0 00 0 00 AB Zero Spd Lev _ Auto Brake Function N A to Tricon 0 00 2 00 10 00 0 00 AB Off Delay N A to MCE products sec 0 00 9 99 0 00 0 00 Contactor DO Dly N A to MCE products sec 0 00 5 00 10 00 0 00 TRQ Lim Msg Dly Determines amount of time drive
29. actual analog output 1 Ana 2 Out Offset Subtracts an effective voltage to 99 9 99 9 0 00 0 00 actual analog output 2 Ana 1 Out Gain Scaling factor for analog output 1 0 10 0 1 0 1 0 Ana 2 Out Gain Scaling factor for analog output 2 0 10 0 1 0 1 0 Fit Reset Delay Time Before a fault is automatically sec 0 120 5 5 reset Flt Reset Hour Number of faults allowed to be auto faults 0 10 3 3 matically reset per hour Up to SPD Level The logic output function is true when 0 110 00 080 00 080 00 motor speed is above user specified speed defined by this parameter Mains DIP Speed When enabled by Main DIP Speed 5 99 9 25 00 25 00 A1 parameter speed is reduced by this percent when a UV alarm low voltage is declared Run Delay Timer Delays drive recognition of RUN sig sec 0 00 0 99 0 00 0 10 nal AB Zero Spd Lev Auto Brake Function N A to MCE 0 00 2 00 0 00 0 00 products AB Off Delay N A to MCE products sec 0 00 9 99 0 00 0 00 Contactor DO Dly N A to MCE products sec 0 00 5 00 0 00 0 00 3 54 Manual 42 02 2T00 Magnetek HPV 900 AC Vector Drive Table 3 5 HPV 900 Drive Parameters TRQ Lim Msg Dly Determines amount of time drive is in sec 0 50 10 00 0 50 2 00 torque limit before Hit Torque Limit message is displayed SER2 INSP SPD Defines serial mode 2 Inspection ft 0 100
30. group dispatcher If the car is simplex this flag has no effect 5 48 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index _MCE Web Table 5 18 Car Setup Parameters Screen Main Menus 167 Set to yes to reset fire yes no no yes no When set to yes the car will reset its mem low oil etc orized fire state position low oil condition etc After reset the parameter will automat ically reset to no 168 Seismic flags Add the 0 255 O each 1 Enable seismic operation flag numbers of thsoe 2 Do not allow reduced speed run with flags you want to set displacement switch on 4 Allow fire phase 1 reduced speed run when displacement switch on 8 Main fire recall floor is above the coun terweight position 169 Parameter 169 0 255 JO each 170 Parameter 170 0 255 JO each 171 Parameter 171 0 255 JO each 172 Parameter 172 0 255 JO each 173 Parameter 173 0 255 JO each 174 Parameter 174 0 255 JO each 175 Parameter 175 0 255 JO each 176 Parameter 176 0 255 JO each 177 Parameter 177 0 255 JO each 178 Parameter 178 0 255 0 each 179 Parameter 179 0 255 JO each 180 Parameter 180 0 255 JO each 181 Parameter 181 0 255 JO each 182 Parameter 182 0 255 JO each 183 Parameter 183 0 255 JO each 184 Parameter 184 0 255 JO each 185 Parameter 185 0 255 JO each Table 5 19 Fire Parameters Per Code Fire Parameters Per Code Fire parameter settings for various codes
31. light 14 HCA14 CL 7 C3 7 to C3 8 Hall call ack light 15 HCA15 CL 8 C2 7 to C2 8 Hall call ack light 16 HCA16 Main Menus 5 33 The Hand Held Unit Me Dispatcher EP Hall Board Table 5 14 Dispatcher EP Hall Board DHALL N v6 2 Input Examples A17 1 2000 DHALL Board Inputs Terminals Connectors Name Label AO 1 Al 1 Fire recall switch FIRE AO 2 Al 2 Fire smoke detectors bypass switch FBYP AO 3 Al 3 Smoke detectors SMOK AO 4 Al 4 Lobby smoke detector s LSMK AO 5 Al 5 Machine room smoke detectors FMRS AO 6 Al 6 Low hoistway smoke detectors FLHS AO 7 Al 7 Remote fire switch ON position FRON AO 8 A1 8 Remote fire switch OFF position FROF BL 1 B1 1 Emergency Power Select 1 EP1 BL 2 B1 2 Emergency Power Select 2 EP2 BL 3 B1 3 Emergency Power Select 3 EP3 BL 4 B1 4 Emergency Power Select 4 EP4 BL 5 B1 5 Emergency Power Select 5 EP5 BL 6 B1 6 Emergency Power Select 6 EP6 BL 7 B1 7 Emergency Power pre transfer PRE BL 8 B1 8 Emergency Power ON EP CL 1 C1 1 Hall call 1 HC1 CL 2 C1 2 Hall call 2 HC2 CL 3 C1 3 Hall call 3 HC3 CL 4 C1 4 Hall call 4 HC4 CL 5 C1 5 Hall call 5 HC5 CL 6 C1 6 Hall call 6 HC6 CL 7 C1 7 Hall call 7 HC7 CL 8 C1 8 Hall call 8 HC8 5 34 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Main Menus Table 5 15 Dispatcher EP Hall Board DHALL N v6 2 Output Examples A17 1 2000
32. plus high speed up and down magnets One floor magnet slowdown distance is calculated to be the shortest floor height in the building divided by 2 5 High speed magnet slowdown distance is equal to the top speed of the car divided by 50 Speed High Speed Magnet Slowdown Minimum Floor Height 250 FPM 5 0 6 6 275 FPM 5 6 T 300 FPM 6 0 7 6 325 FPM 6 6 gi 350 FPM 7 0 8 6 375 FPM 76 g 400 FPM 8 0 9 6 The slowdown distances are based on the magnets being placed as follows For Up Slowdowns Measurement is from the center of the leveling magnet to the bottom edge of the slowdown magnet For Down Slowdowns Measurement is from the center of the leveling magnet to the top edge of the slowdown magnet All magnets are NORTH POLE Down slowdown High speed slowdown minus 6 Slowdown inches distance minus 6 inches Floor level Slowdown distance minus 6 inches High speed slowdown minus 6 inches Up slowdown 2 12 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web SET 9000 Landing System High Speed Operation Front amp Rear Doors When a car has both front and rear doors two additional magnets are required per floor Front door zone magnet For each floor a front door zone magnet is placed in tape row 1 immediately to the left of the floor level magnet Rear door zone magnet For each floor a rear door zone magnet is placed in tape row 3 i
33. stop at this floor Group Considerations All cars in a group should know a particular floor by its floor name 1to 8 Some cars in a group may not serve all floors in this case floors not served by those cars should be designated as empty floors for them Contents __ Index _MCE Web 5 51 5 The Hand Held Unit A exe Group Assignments View amp Edit Screen Figure 5 4 Car Group Assignments Screen When the screen is selected from the menu the first floor is displayed However the first car floor may not be the cars bottom floor since in a group not all cars may go to the bottom floor Table 5 21 Group Dispatcher Parameters Only Editable Fields Explanation Value Floor Number Floor Number See note above 1 32 Floor Designation Use keypad to enter a name up to five characters The characters can be letters digits or punctuation marks Front HU Car has front door up hall call at this floor Yes No Front HD Car has front door down hall call at this floor Yes No Front CB Car has front door Code Blue at this floor from dispatcher Yes No Rear HU Car has rear door up hall call at this floor Yes No Rear HD Car has rear door down hall call at this floor Yes No Rear CB Car has rear door Code Blue at this floor from dispatcher Yes No To view all the floors use the e 2 or up arrow key to move backwards one 1 floor 8 or down arrow key to move forward one 1 floor T
34. x boards To proceed the green LED on the boards must be blinking If the LED indication is e Solid Red The I 024 CTRL board has not started up properly This may indicate that the I O24 board is bad Solid Amber The 1 024 CTRL board has not finished initializing e Solid Green The I O24 CTRL board has started up properly and is sending data to the MPU board This should take 15 seconds If the light does not start blinking after 15 seconds check the following 4 pin power cables plugged into all 1 024 CTRL boards 5 volt DC power is at all red and black power connections on PW5 board 110 volt power at IP1 and IP2 fuses on relay board Solid Green Solid Amber Board has bad system configuration All other boards in system OK Blinking Green The MPU is functioning and communicating with the I 024 CTRL boards The LED must be blinking to continue with power up Plug the Hand Held into the Hand Held Connector on the Car Network I O24 board Use the Hand Held to check the following All Error Conditions except NETWORK LOSS are resolved in the STATES section of the Hand Held Unit CAR DIAGNOSTICS STATES Error conditions are in capital let ters See Section 5 Hand Held Unit for details on operation of the Hand Held anda description of how to correct errors All errors must be resolved to continue Inspection Controls is displayed in the state machine Inspection of the Hand Held
35. 1 6 MS 4 5 4 9 N Network screen 5 84 Neuron Network 1 24 Normal Learn 2K Limit Gripper 4 15 Normal operation 2K Limit Gripper 4 17 NYCHA Car Group comm 1 26 O O Terminal board 1 4 1 22 O Type Terminal board wiring 1 22 P Parameter Examples Floor Table 5 50 Parameter screen 5 72 Parameter setting mode 2K Limit Gripper 4 10 Parameters 5 38 Pattern Parameters 5 44 PI boards 5 61 Position Indicators 5 57 Power line fluctuation 1 13 Prior to Applying Power 3 2 Proper Grounding 1 14 PW5 1 4 R RB board 1 5 3 3 Reset after limit fault 4 10 Reset Error 5 70 Reset limit board 4 6 Reset limits after 5 consecutive trips 4 10 Reset rope gripper 2K Limit Gripper 4 11 RFI 1 13 Rope Gripper 5 37 5 46 Rope gripper functionality 2K Limit Gripper 4 16 Rope Gripper overspeed in FPM 2K Limit Gripper 4 13 Running the Car From the Hand Held 6 3 S S1 S2 and S3 2K Limit Gripper 4 10 Safety 4 3 4 22 5 24 Sensor head installation 2 5 Setting Hall Calls 5 51 Setting Openings 5 51 Signal Parameters 5 42 SLH board 1 6 Slowdown magnets 2 10 Smoke Detectors 5 30 5 32 5 34 5 78 State machines 5 7 T Traveling Cable 1 24 Tricon controller cabinet 1 6 U UP 4 5 4 9 Up slowdown magnets 2 7 USL 4 5 4 9 V Velocity Encoder Connections 1 17 Velocity Encoder Installation 1 16 Y Yaskawa F7 Drive drive parameters table 3 79 Yaskawa F7 drive 3 72 Index 3
36. 18 A2 1 to A2 2 Stop switch fire bypass 2 SBY2 AF 27 AF 28 A3 3 to A3 4 Stop switch fire bypass SBYP AF 19 AF20 A2 3 to A2 4 Buzzer fire attendant handicap etc BUZ AF 29 AF30 A3 5 to A3 6 Fire light FLT AF 21 AF 22 A2 5 to A2 6 Passing chime PCH AF 31 AF 32 A3 7 to A3 8 Attendant up light AUL AF 23 AF 24 A2 7 to A2 8 Attendant down light ADL BO 26 B3 1 to B3 2 Position indicator 1 PI1 BO 18 B2 1 to B2 2 Position indicator 2 PI2 BO 28 B3 3 to B3 4 Position indicator 3 PI3 BO 20 B2 3 to B2 4 Positionindicator4 P4 BO 30 B3 5 to B3 6 Position indicator 5 PI5 BO 22 B2 5 to B2 6 Position indicator 6 PI6 BO 32 B3 7 to B3 8 Position indicator 7 PI7 BO 24 B2 7 to B2 8 Position indicator 8 PI8 CL 1 C3 1 to C3 2 Car call ack Light floor 1 CCA1 CL 2 C2 1 to C2 2 Car call ack Light floor 2 CCA2 CL 3 C3 3 to C3 4 Car call ack Light floor 3 CCA3 CL 4 C2 3 to C2 4 Car call ack Light floor 4 CCA4 CL 6 C2 5 to C2 6 Car call ack Light floor 6 CCA6 CL 7 C3 7 to C3 8 Car call ack Light floor 7 CCA7 CL 8 C2 7 to C2 8 Car call ack Light floor 8 CCA8 5 29 The Hand Held Unit A exe Hall Board Table 5 10 Hall Board HALL N v6 2 Input Examples A17 1 2000 HALL N Terminals Connectors Name Label AO 1 Al 1 Fire recall switch FIRE AO 2 Al 2 Fire smoke detectors bypass switch FBYP AO 3 Al 3 Smoke detectors SMOK AO 4 Al 4 L
37. 25 Door op Flag 3 yes no no yes no 26 Door op Cam drop tim 0 25 5 JO sec If the cam does not drop in this time an eout 0 no cam error will be generated If the door has no cam this should be set to zero 27 Door op Hold close and 0 25 5 JO sec This parameter extends operation of open amp open after limits opened close relays after limits have been reached It is used on door operators that have no hysteresis on their limits and also to ensure that the doors will make the gate and locks after the close limit has been reached 28 Rdoor Minimum reopen 0 25 5 10 5 sec The door will remain open for at least this time time while in normal operation 29 Rdoor Car call mini 0 25 5 3 sec Time the door will remain fully opened due mum time if EE SE or to a car call at the floor This time cannot be DCB detected reduced by the electric eye or door close button 30 Rdoor Car call max 0 25 5 10 sec Maximum time doors will remain open due time if no EE SE or DOB to a car call only detected 31 Rdoor Hall call mini 0 25 5 5 sec Minimum time the door will remain fully mum time opened when opened due to a hall call This time cannot be reduced by the electric eye or door close button 32 Rdoor Hall and car call 0 25 5 10 lsec Maximum time the doors will stay fully door maximum time opened due to a hall or a combination hall and car call 33 Rdoor Number of door 0 255 5 each If the rear door cannot close
38. 3 Running Voltage Set Acceleration ACC1 to avoid rollback and starting brake bumps Set Deceleration to its maximum value DEC1 full CW Brake Regulator P11 110 VDC Gnd B1 CTRL BRL Garvac Brake Regulator vil AC DE J1 1 Vil4 7 Cc E J1 2 V2 1234 1212 13 VAS J1 4 Acc 2 J1 5 Dec 2 Note5 The contacts e000 90 o shown here may not be the same as your controller Refer to your controller schematics Brake J1 6 Input Com To 208 VAC Power Note 1 The control has four input selections J1 1 J1 4 The inputs select the voltage pots V I1 V 14 The inputs have priority over all other inputs with J1 1 having the highest priority The LED below the pot will show the active pot Acc1 and Dec 1 are active unless J1 5 or J1 6 inputs are on Tricon does not use Acc 2 or Dec 2 Clockwise rotation of the pots will raise the voltage output of the Note 3 The releveling brake uses the V 2 pot If you have difficulty controlling rollback when releveling adjust V 2 to partially release the brake Note 4 V I1 Lifting V I2 Relevelin g control y A A VIM Holding Note 2 Clockwise rotation of Acc1 and Dec1 will quicken the Acc1 Ramp up rate ramp up or ramp down rate of the voltage output Initially start Dec1 Ramp down rate with Acc1 fully clockwise fastest rate After all motor control adjustments have been made a ramped release of the brake may be required to control rol
39. 3 V3 papas NoteS The contact Z J1 5 Dec 2 leo Ihe Col S ero eee J1 6 Input Com shown here may not be the same as your a controller Refer to your controller schematics H l ond To 208 VAC Power Note 1 The control has four input selections J1 1 J1 4 The inputs select the voltage pots V I1 V I4 The inputs have priority over all other inputs with J1 1 having the highest priority The LED below the pot will show the active pot Acc1 and Dec 1 are active unless J1 5 or J1 6 inputs are on Tricon does not use Acc 2 or Dec 2 Clockwise rotation of the pots will raise the voltage output of the control Note 3 The releveling brake uses the V 2 pot If you have difficulty controlling rollback when releveling adjust V 2 to partially release the brake Note 4 V I1 Lifting V I2 Releveling o VIM Holding Note 2 Clockwise rotation of Acc1 and Dec1 will quicken the Acc1 Ramp up rate ramp up or ramp down rate of the voltage output Initially start Dec1 Ramp down rate with Acc1 fully clockwise fastest rate After all motor control adjustments have been made a ramped release of the brake may be required to control roll back This can be seen with a voltmeter on the output of the control F F Moving the car on inspection with all loads and direction starts observe the brake release as well as the start of the car Slowing the Acc rate will release the brake when the loop current is sufficient to hold the car w
40. 30 30 only serial mode 2 min SER2 RS CRP SPD Defines creep speed used in rescue ft 0 100 10 10 mode min SER2 RS CPR Defines maximum time drive will con ft 0 100 180 180 Time tinue to run at rescue creep speed min serial mode 2 SER2 FLT TOL Defines maximum time that may sec 0 0 2 0 0 04 0 4 elapse between valid run time mes sages before a serial fault is declared only serial mode 2 Rollback Gain Ant rollback gain 1 99 1 1 Notch Filter Frq Notch Filter Center Frequency Hz 5 60 20 20 Notch Filt Depth Notch filter maximum attenuation 0 100 0 0 MSPD Delay 1 4 Recognition time delay for defined sec 0 00 10 0 0 00 0 00 multistep speed command A2 S Curves Accel Rate 0 Acceleration rate 0 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 3 50 Decel Rate 0 Deceleration rate 0 ft s J0 7 99 3 00 4 00 Accel Jerk in 0 Rate of increase of acceleration up to ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 5 0 ACCEL Rate when increasing eleva tor speed Accel Jerk out O Rate of decrease of acceleration to ft s 0 8 0 8 0 5 0 zero when approaching contract ele vator speed Decel Jerk in 0 Rate of increase of deceleration up to ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 5 0 Decel Rate when decreasing elevator speed Decel Jerk out 0 Rate of decrease of deceleration to ft s 0 8 0 8 0 5 0 zero when slowing the elevator to lev eling speed Accel Rate 1 Acceleration rate 1 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Decel Rate 1 Deceleration rate 1 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Accel Jerk in 1 Rate of increase of accel
41. 79 Index 1 G GATE 4 10 Gate 5 36 GMON 4 9 GMON1 4 9 GMON2 4 9 GOV 4 10 Governor safety test 4 22 Grounding 1 14 Group Considerations 5 51 Group Dispatcher Connections 1 24 Group Dispatcher Parameters 5 52 H Hall Call Operation 6 4 Hall Calls 5 30 5 31 5 32 5 38 5 40 5 51 Hand Held Unit 1 9 5 2 HDSL 4 5 4 9 HHSW board 1 6 HHU Dispatcher connection 1 10 High power wiring 1 24 Hoistway tape 2 3 HPV 600 Drive Faults 3 17 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Closed Loop 3 27 HPV 600 Parameters Open Loop 3 5 HPV 900 Drive Faults 3 61 HPV600 Drive Programmer 3 5 3 27 HS 4 5 4 9 HUSL 4 5 4 9 l I O 24 Board 1 4 T O 24 LEDs 3 3 I1 024 Board Connector numbering 1 20 Imaginary floors 5 51 Independent Service 5 28 5 78 Door Operation 5 46 Indicator Parameters screen 5 65 Input Mapping 6 6 Inputs amp Outputs 5 6 Inspection Learn 2K Limit Gripper 4 14 Installing hoistway tape 2 3 L L Terminal board 1 4 1 23 L Type Terminal board wiring 1 23 Lantern Parameters screen 5 65 Limit board 1 4 4 3 Limit fault reset 4 10 Limit functionality 2K Limit Gripper 4 16 Limit section overspeed in FPM 2K Limit Gripper 4 13 Limit Switches 2 14 Limit trips not auto resetting 4 10 Limit Gripper board 2K 4 9 Lobby Parameters 5 48 LOCK 4 10 Low voltage signal wiring 1 20 Index 2 Manual 42 02 2T00 M MAC board 1 6 Magnetek manual 3 4 3 26 Modem Car 5 66 Dispatcher 5 82 MOM and MOD boards
42. Convert A4 sub menu 2 Go tothe INPUT L L VOLTS parameter This parameter tells the drive what the input 3 50 Manual 42 02 2T00 line to line voltage is This value is used by the drive to declare a low line voltage fault Set to the nominal AC voltage at the input to the drive Magnetek HPV 900 AC Vector Drive 3 Goto the Adjust AO sub menu Motor A5 The first parameter is MOTOR ID To obtain this value determine the motor speed at the rated excitation frequency without any slip The formula is 120 Rated Frequency No Slip Motor RPM If you cannot determine the motor speed with zero slip take the motor nameplate RPM and use it in the formula Round the number up to the nearest even whole number to determine motor poles If the motor that the drive is connected to has a synchronous no slip speed of 900 or 1200 RPM set this parameter to 6 POLE DFLT If the motor has a synchronous speed of 1800 RPM set this parameter to 4 POLE DFLT 4 RATED MTR PWR Tells the drive rated motor horsepower or kilowatts Set to the value on the motor nameplate 5 RATED MTR VOLTS Tells the drive rated motor volts Set to the value from the nameplate on the motor 6 RATED EXCIT FREQ Tells the drive the frequency at which the motor is excited to obtain motor nameplate rated RPM Typically this is 60 Hz Set to the value from the motor nameplate or the manufacturer data sheet 3 7 MOTOR POLES parameter Tells the drive how many poles the mot
43. DC injection Brake drop time can be decreased by lowering the brake holding voltage and increasing the resistance in parallel with the brake coil This resistor can be found on the job prints It has a diode in series with it and is in parallel with the brake coil 3 92 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index _MCE Web Problems Adjusting Open Loop Volts Hertz Mitsubishi A500 Variable Frequency Drive This mode provides adequate per formance if the motor is sized correctly for the load If you see a large speed difference when lift ing the load as compared to lowering the load at high speed and leveling speed as well as the motor not slowing the load equally in each direction the motor is too small for the job If this is the case avoid the following mistakes Do not lower the final leveling speed too low as this will push the motor closer to a stall condition Increasing final leveling speed will reduce the up down speed difference If the car exhibits poor final leveling the dead zone should be opened so that you can adjust the stop without overshooting the floor To open the dead zone move the LU and LD in the leveling stick closer together Always adjust the car for a proper stop then adjust the leveling switches for a level floor stop e Adding torque boost will help low leveling speed regulation but you may raise the current to a point that will cause the drive to trip on overcurrent or even be damaged Always
44. Door Wait time before 0 255 60 sec Time the doors will sit idle before retrying recycling doors again the last operation 10 Door Freight hold time O 255 O sec When this time is set to a value other than O feature disable zero and the car is not in Attendant mode the attendant Up and Down buttons will behave as Freight door hold front and rear respectively In Attendant mode these inputs will function normally This parameter applies to both front and rear doors 11 Door Pre open front yes no no yes no The front door will start to open when the door in inner door zone car reaches the inner door zone 12 Door Front hall doors yes no no yes no This door is a swing type it has a manually are swing type operated hall door 13 Door Type 0 10 JO each This parameter sets door and door operator type 0 standard manual or automatic 1 Peelle 2 Peelle freight doors with open limit 3 Courion 14 Freight doors auto open yes no no yes no When set to yes registered hall calls will on hall calls cause the door to open if so equipped If the car is used unattended set parameter to no to avoid having the car stopped with doors open due to a hall call registered but no pas senger waiting This parameter only applies to the manual door CPU chip version CARM and is intended to be used with freight doors Applies to both front and rear doors Y freight doors open automatically N door open button must be pressed 1
45. Drive Parameters Open Loop Magnetek HPV 600 Iq Reg Prop Gain Torque current regulator propor 0 20 0 40 0 30 0 30 tional gain PWM Frequency Carrier frequency kHz 2 5 16 0 10 0 10 0 UV Alarm Level Voltage level for undervoltage alarm 80 99 90 90 UV Fault Level Voltage level for undervoltage fault 50 88 80 80 Extern Reactance External choke reactance 0 10 0 0 Input L L Volts Nominal line line AC input Voltage volts 110 480 Drive dep RMS A5 Motor Motor ID Motor Identification 4 PoleDFLT 6 MCE Test Pole DFLT MCE Test Rated Mtr Power Rated motor output power HP 1 0 500 5 0 Rated Mtr Volts Rated motor terminal RMS voltage volts 190 0 575 0 460 Rated Excit Freq Rated excitation frequency Hz 5 0 400 0 60 Rated Motor Curr Rated motor current amps 1 00 800 00 6 8 Motor Poles Motor poles 2 32 6 Rated Mtr Speed Rated motor speed at full load RPM 150 0 3000 0 1130 No Load Curr Percent no load current 10 0 60 0 50 k Stator Leakage X Stator leakage reactance 0 20 0 9 0 9 0 Rotor Leakage X Rotor leakage reactance 0 20 0 9 0 9 0 Stator Resist Stator resistance 0 20 0 1 5 1 5 Motor Iron Loss Iron loss at rated frequency 0 15 0 0 5 0 5 Motor Mech Loss Mechanical loss at rated frequency 0 15 0 1 0 1 0 Ovid Start Level Maximum continuous motor current 10
46. Enter this value into RATED MTR SPEED found under Adjust Motor A5 ive 16 Remove full load from the car and place balanced load in it Run the car from bottom to top and back 17 Observe EST INERTIA found under Display Elevator Data D1 Write down the value for up and down 18 Average the up and down values of EST INERTIA Enter this value into INERTIA found under Adjust Drive A1 19 Remove weights from the car Ride the car up and down adding 100 pounds of weight at atime Observe one floor two floor and multi floor runs to be sure that the car rides well under all load conditions Brake Adjustment The following adjustments have been set from survey data The brake assembly and all pins should be cleaned thoroughly and all spring tensions set properly to hold 125 of car capacity prior to adjusting the brake driver Brake shoes should be checked to insure at least 95 surface contact If spring tensions are changed after this adjustment the brake driver will need to be completely readjusted Brake Adjustments V I pot 1 Lifting Voltage V I pot 2 Reveling Voltage e V I pot 3 Running Voltage e Set Acceleration ACC1 to avoid rollback and starting brake bumps Set Deceleration to its maximum value DEC1 full CW 3 69 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Brake Regulator P11 110 VDC Gnd B1 CTRL BR L J1 1 V I1 y Cy Cir J1 2 V2 123411 212 1 3 V3 papas
47. Jerk In 1 S Curve 1 at the Start of Deceleration f s3 0 01 30 00 5 00 P1 07 Decel Jerk Out 1 S Curve 1 at the End of Deceleration f s3 0 01 30 00 3 00 P1 08 Accel Jerk In 2 S Curve 2 at the Start of Acceleration f s3 0 01 30 00 15 00 15 00 P1 09 Accel Jerk Out 2 S Curve 2 at the End of Acceleration f s3 0 01 30 00 15 00 15 00 P1 10 Decel Jerk In 2 S Curve 2 at the Start of Deceleration f s3 0 01 30 00 2 00 ba P1 11 Decel Jerk Out 2 S Curve 2 at the End of Deceleration f s3 0 01 30 00 3 00 P1 12 lAccel Jerk In 3 S Curve 3 at the Start of Acceleration f s3 0 01 30 00 15 00 15 00 P1 13 Accel Jerk Out 3 S Curve 3 at the End of Acceleration f s3 0 01 30 00 2 5 ba P1 14 Decel Jerk In 3 S Curve 3 at the Start of Deceleration f s3 0 01 30 00 6 0 P1 15 Decel Jerk Out 3 S Curve 3 at the End of Deceleration f s3 0 01 30 00 3 5 3 5 P1 16 Accel Jerk In 4 S Curve 4 at the Start of Acceleration f s3 0 01 30 00 15 00 15 00 P1 17 Accel Jerk Out 4 S Curve 4 at the End of Acceleration f s3 0 01 30 00 2 5 P1 18 Decel Jerk In 4 S Curve 4 at the Start of Deceleration f s3 0 01 30 00 6 0 P1 19 Decel Jerk Out 4 S Curve 4 at the End of Deceleration f s3 0 01 30 00 15 00 15 00 Set values for 200 volts The value at 400V is twice that of 200V Do not initialize the drive in the field if it is not required Setting Al 03 1110 and pressing enter will ini tialize the Dr
48. Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index__ _MCE Web Limit Board Adjustment 2K Limit Gripper Board The 2K Limit Gripper board is used if the controller is A17 1 2000 CSA B44 00 compliant Through an input from a quadrature speed position sensor on the elevator motor and 16 dis crete inputs from hoistway switches and monitoring relays the board monitors car speed direction position and status Refer to the drawings package for connection information The board incorporates both speed limiting and rope gripper control functions The board opens three safety contacts SAF 1A 1B SAF 2A 2B SAF 3A 3B if a limit or a rope gripper fault is detected If the detected fault is a rope gripper fault rope gripper contacts GOUT 1A 1B and GOUT 2A 2B are also opened Board monitoring inputs are e Motor Shaft Speed and Position A speed position monitoring sensor is installed on the elevator motor Please refer to T Limit 2K Motor Speed Position Sensor on page 1 18 The cable connecting the sensor to the limit board incorporates single ended to differen tial signal conversion circuitry for improved immunity to electrical noise USL Up Slow Down Input from the last up slowdown to open before the car reaches the top landing e HUSL Up High Speed Slow Down Input from the first up slowdown to open before the 4 car reaches the top landing e HDSL Down High Speed Slow Down Input from the first down slowdown to open before the c
49. NoteS The contact Z J1 5 Dec 2 leo Ihe Col S ero eee J1 6 Input Com shown here may not be the same as your a controller Refer to your controller schematics H l ond To 208 VAC Power Note 1 The control has four input selections J1 1 J1 4 The inputs select the voltage pots V I1 V I4 The inputs have priority over all other inputs with J1 1 having the highest priority The LED below the pot will show the active pot Acc1 and Dec 1 are active unless J1 5 or J1 6 inputs are on Tricon does not use Acc 2 or Dec 2 Clockwise rotation of the pots will raise the voltage output of the control Note 3 The releveling brake uses the V 2 pot If you have difficulty controlling rollback when releveling adjust V 2 to partially release the brake Note 4 V I1 Lifting V I2 Releveling o VIM Holding Note 2 Clockwise rotation of Acc1 and Dec1 will quicken the Acc1 Ramp up rate ramp up or ramp down rate of the voltage output Initially start Dec1 Ramp down rate with Acc1 fully clockwise fastest rate After all motor control adjustments have been made a ramped release of the brake may be required to control roll back This can be seen with a voltmeter on the output of the control F F Moving the car on inspection with all loads and direction starts observe the brake release as well as the start of the car Slowing the Acc rate will release the brake when the loop current is sufficient to hold the car without rolli
50. STALL FAULT TI ME Confirm setting of STALL TEST LVL A1 Confirm setting of STALL FAULT TIME A1 Check motor machine and brake for mechanical bind Check motor parameter settings Check for excessive motor current Undervolt Fault DC Bus voltage low Voltage on DC Bus dropped below user entered values of parameters INPUT L L Volts A4 and UV FAULT LEVEL A4 Check braking resistance and connections Verify proper AC input voltage to drive Possible disturbances on AC line Undervolt Alarm DC Bus voltage low dur ing run DC bus voltage dropped below user entered values of INPUT L L Volts A4 and UV ALARM LEVEL A4 Check braking resistance and connections Verify proper AC input voltage to drive Possible disturbance on AC line 3 19 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A ek HPV 600 High Speed Adjustment Open Loop The drive should now be running on inspection speed When commanded to run in the up direction the car should run up and when commanded to run down the car should run down Use a hand tach to confirm that the speed displayed on the drive programmer at the parameter DISPLAY DO ELEVATOR DATA D1 SPEED REFERENCE exactly matches the speed at which the car is running While observing the hand tach run the car up and down in the middle section of the hoistway Modify the CONTRACT MTR SPEED parameter under the ADJ UST AO MOTOR A5 menu to exactly achieve the speed displayed at SPEE
51. The values entered at that time are designed to be somewhat aggressive to ensure that the car does not overshoot the floors but rather comes in slow This will prevent the car from running into the pit or the overhead until the final values for the speed curve are entered 1 2 Place a balanced load in the car Disable the doors and place a car call two floors away from the present position of the car one floor away if the car speed is 200 feet per minute or less Keep the elevator away from the terminal floors at this time 3 While the car is running monitor speed with a hand tach The car should be running at contract speed 5 If not adjust CONTRACT MTR SPEED A to obtain the cor rect speed Observe deceleration as the car approaches the floor The car should decelerate rapidly and there should be two noticeable steps of speed prior to stopping at the floor If there are not confirm that the tape reader is properly installed and the slowdown magnets are placed the correct distance from the floor Change DECEL RATE 0 A2 to 3 5 ft s This will yield a slower rate of deceleration and less approach distance to the floor Again run the car and observe approach into the floor If the car still has too much slow down distance decrease DECEL RATE 0 A2 to 0 1 ft s less than the present rate Repeat until the car is coming into the floor with about 3 to 6 inches of approach Modify the DECEL J ERK IN 0 A2 and DECEL J E
52. The safety line opened while the car was moving Floor Timed Out of Service Car became out of service Floor TOC Stop Switch Operated TOC stop switch operated Floor Too Many Consecutive Drive Faults The drive incurred too many consecutive faults Floor Top Final Limit Operated Top final limit operated Floor Up Leveling Timeout Timed out while leveling in the up direction Floor Up Limit Slowdown Slowdown initiated by the limits in the up direction Floor Up Normal Terminal Up normal terminal stopped the car Floor Up Releveling Timeout Timed out while re leveling in the up direction Floor Up Run Timeout Up run timeout Floor Up Slowdown Timeout Up slowdown timeout Floor Up Down Slowdowns at the Same Time No parameter 5 21 The Hand Held Unit A ek Input amp Outputs Inputs and outputs are directly connected to pluggable connectors on circuit boards inside the Tricon control cabinet The I O tables in this section are ANSI A17 1 2000 examples Please refer to the document drawings package accompanying a job for I O tables specific to that job e Controller Board Car Top Board e Car Station Board e Hall Board e Dispatcher Hall Board e Dispatcher EP Hall Board e Extension 1 Board When used as Hall Car Station or Dispatcher Hall boards multiple I O 24 boards may be employed typically but not always stacked one above the other When this is the case the first board has only the base label i
53. a AE OS OS So FE wo he ee he eee 1 1 CECOM ee ene ee erere ee ere ee eee eee eer he eee keer a eta es ee ee ee 1 2 Controller Circuit Boards oni 645 64 44 rount ah aE RRE EEEE EREE EIERE E 1 4 EIES JARE EIET T MEE AE E A E E E A E bested E E OEE heneee cease 1 6 Cartop Circuit Boards 654 ehakeeneduhis seneeewkaeS esa oeSewee bees EEEa 17 oir GGG POE ic cb kccedadidoddatiddedw ksi dadesss ewes ddaedesceed 1 7 igh 8 ee es ee ee nee eee ees ree re he ree ee 1 7 Se sirier rie enka seek ba e keheadn Eer oedeeceeeieows 18 Dispatcher Orouit oh 4 Se ee 6 EENE ab ERE ERS 18 Fand Head Umt AARU ere hala rid iea iiin ana i a esd ialasecs 1 9 HHU Dispatcher Board Connection Optional 0 0 cee cee eee eee 1 10 SONY vk cc dekh eee Se bee bane sola dee shee Re he COR eRe ee ees Ne he eee ee eSs 1 11 fe 5 ies asi a ear arte nets om reenact or ICTS eg mre ere re ee 1 11 Eg pment 6 5 065 09 49 ee i hw hh oo el ies 1 11 Installation Considerations ccc cece e ccc cee cece eee eees 1 12 Mathine Room Preparatioii 5 ou ky ecu k deed ie eed o0 ee 4w 4s Oo KR aoe ESO 112 Pay GE WINI es ce bk os pawn ee TE INRE EREE ER INTERE AE oe hee 113 How Electrical Noise OOCUTS sso secrsorecesssetcerit sat eres eNC EER OK CREENA B How to Avoid Electrical Noise Problems 00 ec cee cece ee ne eens 113 Possible EMI RFI Inert cdacas dsdasadendaeescteaduveweadaadiadeeies 1 14 Proper Grounding Procedures fs 8 655 4 eS ee nae bd bee a A 1 14 W
54. acceleration while keeping the peak current as low as possible 2 Adjust deceleration time parameter 8 for approximately three inches of final leveling with full load in the down direction 3 The drive is shipped with the S curve in the linear mode parameter 29 0 This is nor mally adequate for open loop mode but you can try setting parameter 29 to a 1 S curve operation and decide which you prefer 4 To reduce the accel and decel currents increase acceleration time and deceleration dis tance The deceleration distance should be approximately 1 foot for every 50FPM of rated contract speed This can be made longer if the motor will not slow down the load properly Final Stop Adjustment Open Loop Volts Hertz Final stop is adjusted using DC injection voltage parameter 12 Injection voltage is applied to the motor when the car is level LU and LD on The DC voltage should not be any larger than required to stop the motor To check the holding current being applied to the motor 1 Temporarily increase the DC injection time to 3 seconds and controller drive hold time parameter 77 to 5 seconds 2 Monitor the drive hold current at the stop of the car While adjusting final stop 3 Set holding current as lowas possible There is a point at which no matter how much current is applied to the motor it will not stop the load 4 Adjust the brake to drop as quickly as possible because it may not be possible to stop the motor rotation with
55. are placed along the tape in three distinct rows The center row is used for leveling magnets The left hand row is used for up direction slowdown magnets The right hand row is used for down direction slowdown magnets The sensor head containing the solid state sensors is mounted on the elevator car so that it rides the steel tape as the car moves detecting and using the magnets to control floor approach and leveling Installing the SET 9000 system includes e Hoistway tape installation Interconnect box installation e Sensor head installation e Magnetic strip placement e Landing system cabling Figure 2 1 SET 9000 Landing System Components Guide rail Interconnect box Tape guide 7 __ stu la oO 2 ei ee 2 N Sensor assembly LD S STD 5 Adaptor bracket 7 S Steel tape 2 2 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index_ _MCE Web SET 9000 Landing System Hoistway Tape Installation The SET 9000 system uses 2 inch wide steel tape The tape is hung from a bracket at the top of the hoistway in a single vertical run to a second bracket at the bottom of the hoistway The bot tom bracket has a tensioning spring that is adjusted to maintain tension on the tape preventing undue movement and possible noise from tape vibration Tape installation includes Top bracket and hanger installation Bottom bracket and tensioner installation Before installing stationary tape ens
56. armature inductance should be recorded and then loaded in parameter 6 The value stored in 615 Field LR should be recorded and then loaded in parameter 51 10 On the upper right hand side of the drive you will find a small slide switch This switch is the NVRAM Protect switch S3 Flip this switch to the up position The red LED NV RAM NOT PROTECTED will illuminate 11 Press the ENTER key on the drive The display should now read 994 Flip the NVRAM Protect switch back to the down position The values are saved After the self tune is successful the calculated values are stored in the following parameters 613 Measured Motor Resistance 614 Measured Motor Inductance 615 Measured Field L R time constant These values should then be transferred and stored to the proper locations 613 value transferred to Function 4 Arm Ohms 614 value transferred to Function 5 Arm L 615 value transferred to Function 51 Field L R PUNE D Ne e 3 106 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __ Index _MCE Web Magnetek DSD 412 DC Drive Inspection Start Up 1 Ifthe car does not run up at a controlled speed when pressing the Up button take the actions listed in this chart IF THIS HAPPENS DO THIS Car runs up very fast until drive trips Swap wires TB1 4 B and TB1 5 B Car runs down very fast until drive trips Turn off main line power and wait 60 seconds Swap motor field connections Fl amp F2
57. as the car approaches the top floor If this is the case skip to step 4 3 Ifthe caris high speed Parameter 107 set to Yes and has V2 xx MPU 2 software and two up slowdowns USL and HUSL then after the top landing is reached you must move the car one floor down from the top and then run to the top again At this point the DS17 LED will go off 4 Run the car to the bottom floor If the car has V3 xx MPU 2 software or is low speed Parameter 107 set to No and has only one down slowdown DSL the DS18 LED will turn off as the car approaches the bottom floor If this is true the learn trip is complete and the DS25 LED will light steadily If this is a high speed car with V2 xx MPU 2 soft ware proceed to the next step 5 Iftwo down slowdown limits are present DSL and HDSL move the car up one floor and run to the bottom again After this LED DS25 will light steadily the learn trip is com plete and the board will revert to normal operation When anormal learn is performed it also determines if the slowdowns are properly placed The slowdown should open within 200 milliseconds of the HS or MS relay going off If it does not a learn fault will be displayed on diagnostic LEDs DS17 DS23 Please refer to Fault Operation on page 4 18 A Caution If any car speed or slowdown adjustments are made after the limits are learned the learn trip must be repeated Contents __index_ _ MCE Web ie Release to Normal Operation A
58. buzzer only 2 Door Time after clos O 255 20 sec If the car has a direction and the doors can ing start to begin nudg not close after this time expires the door ing will begin nudging operation 3 Door Minimum reopen 0 25 5 2 sec The door will remain open for at least this time time while in normal operation 4 Door Car call minimum 0 25 5 1 sec Time the door will remain fully open when time if EE SE or DCB opened due to a car call at the floor This detected time cannot be reduced by the electric eye or door close button 5 Door Car call max time 0 25 5 5 sec Maximum time doors will remain open due if no EE SE or DOB to a car call only detected 6 Door Hall call mini 1 25 5 2 sec Time the door will remain fully open when opened due to a hall call This time cannot be reduced by the electric eye or door close button 5 38 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index_ _MCE Web Table 5 18 Car Setup Parameters Screen Main Menus 7 Door Hall and car call O 25 5 6 sec Maximum time the doors will stay fully open door maximum time due to a hall or a combination hall and car call 8 Door Number of door 0 255 3 each If the door cannot open close or lock it will failure cycles before retry the operation as many times as set in retry wait this parameter and then stop If this param eter is set to zero doors will retry indefi nitely 9
59. car 2 View the drive display monitoring the frequency 3 Ifthe encoder is working the frequency will be higher in the down direction as well fluctuating to regulate the car speed 4 Ifthe encoder is rotating backwards you will move at the same frequency in the up and the down direction 5 Ifthe encoder is not working or is misconnected you will have the same condition as rotating backwards 6 To reverse the encoder direction change parameter 359 from a 0 toa 1or froma 1toa0 You can monitor the motor RPM at the drive to insure the encoder is working Closed loop speed control 370 set to a 1 or 2 Only if you have made the drive perform in all of the previous modes are you ready to run in the higher performance modes 1 or 2 If you observe unusual drive operation in this mode refer to the section below Ifa 1ora 2 is selected for parameter 370 the A500 drive will be in closed loop vector mode and must be properly tuned with a constant torque motor selected for the motor type parameter 71 and must be auto tuned with motion parameter 96 101 If auto tuning is not performed prop erly the drive will not operate in the vector mode Remember that the encoder board must not be installed when you perform an auto tune Ifa 1ora 2 is selected for parameter 370 parameter 22 now becomes the torque limit of the motor not the drive This torque limit has a range of 0 300 and should be set to 250 Ifa lora 2 is select
60. car so it about 10 feet above the center of the hoistway Place an Amprobe on one of the leads to the hoist motor armature While observing the display on the Amprobe run the car down on inspection operation through the center of the hoistway Write down the amperage displayed while the car passes by the chalk mark on the cables The value may vary slightly so average the value if necessary Place the car about 10 feet below the center of the hoistway While observing the display on the Amprobe run the car up through the center of the hoistway Write down the amperage displayed while the car passes by the chalk mark on the cables The value may vary slightly so average the value if necessary Ignoring whether the recorded values were positive or negative if the value recorded while the car was running up was greater than the value running down the car is too heavy Remove 100 pounds of weight from the car and repeat steps 8 through 10 until the recorded values are equal but have opposite polarity Ignoring whether the recorded values were positive or negative if the value recorded while the car was running down was greater than the value running up the car is too light Add 100 pounds of weight from the car and repeat steps 7 and 8 until the recorded values are equal but have opposite polarity When the values are equal but have opposite polarity the car is balanced Check how much weight is in the car It should be between 40 and 50 o
61. configuration with correct field rotation or follow the motor manufacturer recommendations Locate the test sheets shipped with the controller These sheets list the drive parameters calcu lated for your installation Drive Parameters Before attempting to run the drive confirm that the parameters are set correctly Verify that the parameters in the drive match those on the Test sheets For information on using the program ming unit please refer to the Magnetek HPV 900 manual The following parameters are the HPV900 key parameters and parameters which have been changed from the drive default settings Refer to the HPV 900 manual for a full parameter description Using the HPV900 Drive Programmer The drive programmer is used to program the drive and display drive data There are three menu levels in the drive They are the Menu level the Sub menu level and the Entry level There are five keys on the front of the program mer These keys perform different functions depending upon the active menu level When the programmer is at the Main Menu level the left and right arrows move the program mer between the Main Menu selections The up and down keys move the programmer into the various Sub Menus at each Main Menu selection Pressing the Enter key will move the pro grammer into the Sub Menu currently displayed on the programmer When the programmer is at the Sub Menu level the up and down arrows display various param eters in the Sub Men
62. current 3 18 Manual 42 02 2T00 Verify car balanced correctly Verify proper motor and drive siz ing Check for bad motor or motor connection Check for bad main contactor contacts Check for mechanical bind in car or machine Contents __Index_ _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 600 Table 3 2 HPV 600 Drive Faults Open Loop Overspeed Fault Motor speed exceeded user entered parame ters Check parameters OVERSPEED LEVEL A1 and OVERSPEED TIME A1 If OK check tracking of motor to desired speed and tune regulator for better performance Overtemp Fault Heatsink temperature is too high Drive heatsink temperature exceeded 1052C 2212F Check fans on drive make sure airflow is adequate Overvolt Fault DC Bus voltage is too high DC bus voltage exceeded 850 volts on a 460 volt drive or 425 volts on a 230 volt drive Check braking resistance connected and sized properly Check for high AC line Confirm input volt age to drive If these check OK possible bad braking GBT Drive unit needs to be replaced PCU Data Fault PCU parameters not cor rect Check all drive parameters Cycle power to drive If fault recurs go to the Utility menu and select Restore Defaults f fault persists replace Control board Note The Restore Defaults selection will require all drive parameter to be set to their correct values Phase Fault Open motor phase Check motor motor connections motor w
63. ek Operating Examples Operating examples include e Limit Functionality e Rope Gripper Functionality e Normal Operation Fault Operation Limit Functionality The limit rope gripper board will open the safety circuit output stopping the car if any of the following conditions are detected The car runs at 150 of the learned inspection speed inspection learn must have been completed Used for inspection operation before the limit board speed feedback has been scaled at high speed Please refer to Inspection Learn on page 4 14 The car runs at a speed above the limit overspeed parameter value The car exceeds 75 of the learned inspection speed or 62 FPM in the opposite of the intended direction of travel Normal learn must have been completed e Direction slowdown inputs operate without any tachometer encoder feedback Tachome ter loss will be detected e Car is moved on inspection or with the doors open at a speed greater than 125 FPM A limit rope gripper board relay malfunction is detected Rope Gripper Functionality The rope gripper provides overspeed and unintended movement protection Rope gripper parameters are adjusted as described in this section Please refer to Parameter Entry on page 4 13 The rope gripper will open the safety circuit and rope gripper contacts if any of the following conditions are detected Car runs at a speed above the rope gripper overspeed parameter value This
64. fan and heatsink Replace drive if fault cannot be corrected with above measures Charge Fault Comm Fault Invalid Checksum DC Bus has not charged The programmer Possible noise or bad programmer connector Check connector received four consecu tive invalid messages DC Bus did not reach desired stabilized voltage level within 2 seconds Check incoming AC power If OK replace drive on Control board and programmer Replace Control board or programmer if fault cannot be corrected Comm Fault No Drive Handshake The programmer lost communications with the drive Control board Possible noise or bad programmer connector Check connector on Control board and programmer Replace Control board or programmer if fault cannot be corrected Contactor Fault Contactor state does not match commanded state Drive has turned on command to close main contactor and Con tactor Confirm signal is not present for amount of time specified by Contact Fit Time parameter Cube Data Fault The drive parameters are invalid Check drive parameters Cycle drive power If fault recurs go to Utility menu select Restore Defaults If fault persists replace Control board Note Restore Defaults selection will require all drive parameter be set to their correct values 3 17 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Me Table 3 2 HPV 600 Drive Faults Open Loop Cube ID Fault Drive identification
65. feedback is reversed the car will run at very low speed with high current Output current can be observed on Monitor U1 03 Running the car in the down direc tion monitor the Output Freq U1 02 and the Encoder Speed feedback U1 90 The two signals should be negative if the encoder polarity is correct To reverse encoder direction reverse A and A signals from the encoder to the drive If this does not resolve the problems check these possible causes 1 PPR setting in drive is incorrect Check Parameter F1 01 2 Encoder has been damaged 3 Improper encoder wire routing shielding or connection 4 Motor Data in drive is incorrect See Motor Tuning Section e Run the car again and confirm that the car runs correctly in both directions Using the keypad access the U1 90 Monitor parameter Encoder Speed Run the car in the down direction The speed reference should be negative Monitor parameter Speed Feedback Run the car in the down direction The speed feedback should be negative If not reverse the A and A signals from the encoder to the drive Scaling Adjustments Using the keypad access the U1 02 Output Freq on open loop or U1 05 Motor Speed on closed loop Hold a hand tach against the governor rope and run the car in either direction while monitoring the displayed speed and the tach If the displayed speed is slower than the observed speed on the hand tach access parameter O1 03 and Rais
66. if analog pre torque com Not latched Not Not latched mand is latched Latched latched Ptorq Latch Clck Determines source of pre torque External TB 1 External External TB latch control if used Serial tb1 Fault Reset Src Fault reset source External TB 1 External External TB Serial tb1 Automatic Overspd Test Src Determines external logic source to External TB 1 External External TB trigger overspeed test Serial tb1 Brake Pick Src If drive controls mechanical brake l Internal Internal Internal determines source of brake pick Serial command Brake Pick CNFM Determines if a logic input is used None None None for brake pick confirm External TB 1 Brake Hold Src If drive controls mechanical brake Internal Internal Internal determines source of brake hold Serial command Ramped Stop Sel Chooses between normal stop and None None None torque ramp down stop Ramp on stop Ramp Down En Src Determines source that signals External TB 1 External External TB torque ramp down stop if used Run logic tb1 Serial Brk Pick Flt Brake pick fault enable Enable Disable Disable Disable Brk Hold Flt Ena Brake hold fault enable Enable Disable Disable Disable Ext Torq Cmd Src When Speed Reg Type External None None None Reg sets source of torque command Serial Dir Confirm Confirms proper analog signal polar Enabled Disabled Disabled ity when set to Enable and a logic Disabled input is programmed to Run Up and Run Down S Curve Abort Ad
67. if car has rear O0 no O no openings 11 Car 2 has rear doors 1 yes 0 1 yes Set to 1 yes if car has rear O no O no openings 12 Car 3 has rear doors 1l yes 0 1l yes Set to 1 yes if car has rear O no O no openings 13 Car 4 has rear doors 1l yes 0 1l yes Set to 1 yes if car has rear O no O no openings 14 Car 5 has rear doors 1l yes 0 1l yes Set to 1 yes if car has rear O no O no openings 15 Car 6 has rear doors 1l yes 0 1l yes Set to 1 yes if car has rear O no O no openings 16 Car 1 number of floors 2 32 2 floor Enter the number of floors ser viced by this car 17 Car 2 number of floors 2 32 2 floor Enter the number of floors ser viced by this car 18 Car 3 number of floors 2 32 2 floor Enter the number of floors ser viced by this car 19 Car 4 number of floors 2 32 2 floor Enter the number of floors ser viced by this car 20 Car 5 number of floors 2 32 2 floor Enter the number of floors ser viced by this car 5 82 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __ Index _MCE Web Table 5 31 BMS Screen Parameters Main Menus 21 Car 6 number of floors 2 32 2 floor Enter the number of floors ser viced by this car 22 Car 1 lobby floor number 1 32 1 floor Enter the lobby floor for this car 23 Car 2 lobby floor number 1 32 1 floor Enter the lobby floor for this car 24 Car 3 lobby floor number 1 32 1 floor Enter the lobby floor for this car 25 Car 4 lobby floor number 1 32 1 flo
68. in the field survey No changes should be made until the system is powered up and verified later in this proce dure Lale Digital I nputs We 3 Yaskawa F7 Drive output is controlled via programmable digital inputs preset and checked at the factory for your application Ifyou believe any of these to be in error call MCE technical assistance U E RUN STOP Table 3 7 Yaskawa F7 Drive I nputs Terminal Function Parameter Setting s3 Base Block used for emergency stops H1 01 9 S4 Fault Reset H1 02 14 S5 Digital Speed Input 1 H1 03 80 S6 Digital Speed Input 2 H1 04 81 S7 Digital Speed Input 3 H1 05 82 S8 Jog Reference H1 05 6 Directional control of the elevator is controlled via input to terminals S1 and S2 forward and reverse respectively These are set during the 2 wire initialization process in parameter A1 03 programmed at the factory prior to shipment _Contents __ Index _MCE Web 3 73 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A ek Digital Outputs In addition to digital inputs the Yaskawa F7 Drive has 3 isolated programmable digital outputs and one form C fault contact These have been wired and programmed at the factory Table 3 8 Yaskawa F7 Drive Digital Outputs Terminals Function Parameter Setting MA MC Fault Contact N O N A N A MB MC Fault Contact N C N A N A M1 M2 During Run 3 ready to run output H2 01 40 M3 M4 Not used by
69. indicators or to set up one O type Terminal board to drive a light duty CE fix ture board that in turn controls the indicators Each system is factory configured according to particular job requirements before shipment Typically you will not need to program position indicator outputs but will only need to connect them as shown in the prints for the particular job Figure 5 7 Terminal Board Locations on CTOP CSTA or HALL Boards Cartop Board Car Station Board Hall Board e Please refer to PI Driven Directly from O type Terminals on page 5 58 if you are driving PI indicators directly from O type Terminal boards e Please refer to Light Duty CE Fixture Drivers on page 5 60 if you are driving a light duty CE driver board from an O type Terminal board Contents __ Index _MCE Web 5 57 The Hand Held Unit Mek PI Driven Directly from O type Terminals The O type Terminal boards may be used to drive PI displays directly Each O type Terminal board has eight outputs When used to drive indicators directly each output is typically used to light a position in a strip or multi light display The illustration below shows a typical output progression for up to 24 indicators Figure 5 8 PI Driven Directly from O Terminal Boards CTOP HALL and CSTA Cartop Board Hall Board Car Station Board O Terminal O Terminal O Terminal elelololololelo r elelolololelolo JUCEZAZ
70. is in horse power multiply HP 0 746 in Kw T1 03 Rated Voltage Enter 90 of line voltage Line Voltage x 0 90 i e 230VAC x 0 90 207VAC or 208 VAC x 0 90 187VAC T1 04 Motor Rated Cur Full load amperage rating of the motor rent T1 05 Motor Rated Fre Generally 60Hz quency T1 06 Number of Poles Check the list of motor speeds in the section on scaling Find the number of poles for your motor speed T1 07 Rated Motor Speed Speed of the motor in RPM at Rated Frequency This will be the synchro nous speed minus the slip percentage T1 08 Encoder PPR Encoder pulses per revolution Once the above data is entered a message on the keypad should appear saying to press the run key to start auto tune The drive will send current to the motor the process will take up to 1 minute The keypad display will advise if the tune was successful The drive will automatically load the data to the proper parameters 3 88 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Yaskawa F7 Drive Brake Adjustment The following adjustments are from survey data Brake assembly and pins should be cleaned thoroughly and spring tension set properly to hold 125 of car capacity prior to adjusting brake driver Brake shoes should be checked to insure at least 95 surface contact If spring tensions are changed after adjustment the brake driver will need to be completely readjusted V I pot 1 Lifting Voltage V I pot 2 Reveling Voltage V I pot
71. is too light Add 100 pounds of weight from the car and repeat steps 7 and 8 until the recorded values are equal but have opposite polarity When the values are equal but have opposite polarity the car is balanced Check how much weight is in the car It should be between 40 and 50 of rated capacity If not the counter weighting needs to be adjusted If the car is too heavy weight needs to be added to the counter weight to get the car balanced between 40 and 50 of rated capacity If the car is too light weight needs to be removed from the counterweight to get it balanced between 40 and 50 of rated capacity Do not proceed with the adjustment process until the car is properly balanced High Speed Adjustment and Gain Adjustment The drive has slip compensation to allow it to compensate for motor slip at high speed as well as leveling speed The drive will regulate high speed if you set high speed parameter 4 to less than 60 HZ Setting parameter 4 to 55HZ will give the drive some headroom to regulate the speed of the car at high speed Running the car with full load the drive should regulate the high speed and final leveling speed quite closely after you have adjusted the gain as described below If you need more than 60HZ at high speed raise parameters 1 and 3 they are the limits for the drive 1 The drive normally requires S curve parameter 29 to be set to a 1 as the control may be bumpy with sharp changes to the pattern profile 2 P
72. it will retry as failure cycles before many times as set in this parameter after retry wait which it will stop for the time set in the retry wait time parameter and start the cycle again If this parameter is set to zero the doors will keep trying indefinitely 34 Rdoor Wait time before 0 255 60 sec Time the rear doors will sit idle before retry recycling doors again ing the last operation 35 Parameter 35 0 255 JO each 36 Rdoor Preopen rear yes no no yes no When this flag is set the doors will start to door in the inner door open when the slowing car reaches the inner zone door zone 37 Rdoor Rear door hall yes no no yes no The rear door is of the swing type it has manually operated hall doors 5 40 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index _MCE Web Table 5 18 Car Setup Parameters Screen Main Menus 38 RDoor Door 0 10 JO each This parameter sets door and door operator 1 Peelle type 0 standard manual or automatic 1 Peelle 2 Peelle freight doors with open limit 3 Courion 39 Parameter 39 0 255 JO each 40 Rdoor nudging mode 0 5 0 enum 0 No nudging 0 disabled 1 Buzzer only 1 5 see manual 2 Buzz EE bypass 3 Buzz EE bypass SE stops door 4 Buzz EE bypass low pressure close 5 Buzz EE bypass low pressure close SE stops This variable sets one of the five modes of operation Off keep closing stop doors but
73. key to move backwards one 1 floor e 8 or down arrow key to move forward one 1 floor 5 55 The Hand Held Unit A ek To edit the selected floor Press the key when the cursor is on the desired floor Keep pressing the key until you reach the desired field e Use the left and right arrow keys to move in multi character fields Move to the desired entry field a i a i ia Enter the desired characters a mt E S a O 3 character display Display will right justify and truncate if more characters are entered than can be displayed 2 character display Enter the value using the numeric keypad or the Yes No keys to scroll through other character selections e Press the key to accept You will move to the next field If you are on the last field you will move back to a view screen e Press the key to abort change You will move back to a view screen 5 56 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index i _MCE Web Main Menus Position I ndicators View amp Edit Screens CTOP CSTA or HALL Board O type Terminal boards mounted in specific locations on Cartop Car station or Hall I O 24 boards may be used to drive position indicators directly or to control a light duty CE fixture driver board If your PI needs are limited this may provide an economical display solution The Position Indicators menu allows you to set up from one to three of the O type Terminal boards to directly drive
74. m _ 3000 to 3000 0 0 10 Speed Command Multi Step Speed command 11 ft m _ 3000 to 3000 0 0 11 Speed Command Multi Step Speed command 12 ft m _ 3000 to 3000 0 0 12 Speed Command Multi Step Speed command 13 ft m _ 3000 to 3000 0 0 13 Speed Command _ Multi Step Speed command 14 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 14 Speed Command Multi Step Speed command 15 ft m _ 3000 to 3000 0 0 15 A4 Power Convert Id Reg Diff gain Flux Current regulator differential gain 0 80 1 20 1 00 1 00 Id Reg Prop Gain Flux current regulator proportional gain 0 20 0 40 0 30 0 30 Iq Reg Diff Gain Torque current regulator differential gain l 0 80 1 20 1 00 1 00 Iq Reg Prop Gain Torque current regulator proportional gain 0 20 0 40 0 30 0 30 PWM Frequency Carrier frequency kHz 2 5 16 0 10 0 10 0 UV Alarm Level Voltage level for undervoltage alarm 80 99 90 90 UV Fault Level Voltage level for undervoltage fault 50 88 80 80 Extern Reactance External choke reactance 0 10 0 0 Input L L Volts Nominal line line AC input Voltage RMS volts 110 480 Drive dep A5 Motor Motor ID Motor Identification 4 PoleDFLT 6 MCE Test Pole DFLT MCE Test Rated Mtr Power Rated motor output power HP 1 0 500 5 0 Rated Mtr Volts Rated motor terminal RMS voltage volts 190 0 575 0 460 Rated Excit Freq Rated excitation frequency Hz 5 0 400 0 60 bs Rated Motor Curr Rated motor current amps 1 00 800 00 6 8 x Motor Poles Motor poles
75. matically reset per hour Up to SPD Level The logic output function is true 0 110 00 80 00 080 00 when motor speed is above user specified speed defined by this parameter Mains DIP Speed When enabled by Main DIP Speed 5 99 9 25 00 25 00 Al parameter speed is reduced by this percent when a UV alarm low voltage is declared Run Delay Timer Delays drive recognition of RUN sig sec 10 00 0 99 0 00 0 00 nal AB Zero Spd Lev Auto Brake Function N A to MCE 0 00 2 00 0 00 0 00 products AB Off Delay N A to MCE products sec 0 00 9 99 0 00 0 00 3 10 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index__ _MCE Web Table 3 1 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Open Loop Magnetek HPV 600 Contactor DO Dly N A to MCE products sec 0 00 5 00 0 00 0 00 TRQ Lim Msg Dly Amount of time drive is in torque sec 0 50 10 00 0 50 0 5 limit before Hit Torque Limit mes sage is displayed SER2 INSP SPD Defines serial mode 2 Inspection ft 0 100 30 30 only serial mode 2 min SER2 RS CRP SPD Defines creep speed used in rescue ft 0 100 10 10 mode min SER2 RS CPR Time Defines maximum time drive will ft 0 100 180 180 continue to run at rescue creep min speed only serial mode 2 SER2 FLT TOL Defines maximum time that may sec 0 0 2 0 0 04 0 04 elapse between valid run time mes sages before a Serial fault is declared only serial mode 2 Rollback G
76. may not set the governor at the overspeed setting If not you must stop the car before the car gets to the terminal landing at a speed greater than contract speed 5 Re scale the car speed on inspection before moving the car 6 Remove any tiedown that may have been placed on the safety 4 22 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Final Test Problems Overspeeding 1025 Regulator The following are some of the prob lems that may prevent you from getting up to the governor tripping speed The contract speed pot will only increase the car speed until the raw tach voltage is 150VDC If the over speed is not achieved before this tach voltage you will not be able to increase the speed If this is the case you can insert a 100 K OHM resistor in series with one wire off the raw tach After doing this scale the car speed on inspection before moving the car at high speed The regulator has a limited voltage output The output voltage GF1 GF2 is 1 4 times the AC from the transformer secondary You may have to increase the transformer tap to a higher voltage Normal Terminal Stopping NTS Test This procedure will test operation of the Normal Terminal Stopping NTS system 1 Remove the car from service 2 Turn the Door Disconnect switch OFF at the controller This allows the car to answer car calls without responding to hall calls All newly registered car calls will be answered with normal operation 3 Add one floo
77. moved on inspection or with doors open at a speed greater than 125 FPM Release to Normal Operation A axe Input Definitions Limit board connections and features are shown below and described on the following pages Figure 4 2 Limit Board Diagram To Motor Encoder if used Common To RB Board ACTIVE INPUTS FAULTS USL LD1 OWO USL OD Lenio HUSL LED2 HUSA gn ep a1 HDSL LED3 HDSL o ted 12 Analog Tachometer IN if used DSL LEDa OO DSL OM eD 13 O Tach Common DZBP pe Ca UP B LED 14 SEE TABLE Tach Input ip D6 ODN OO Lenis FOR LED 10 DN LD7 MS O Lep 16 jc Analog Speed Reference IN LEDs O HS MS O LED17 INSPECTION MODE O Speed Ref In LED9 O DZBP HS Speed Ref In ON Normal i Secmafiash Tipped Ne Analog Speed Reference OUT 1 8 Second Flash LEARN MODE Speed Ref Out Numbers FPM x 100 Speed Ref Out A 1000 B 1100 C 1200 Reset D 1300 E 1400 F 1500 Adds 50 FPM to Contract Speed Enables LEARN MODE in right most position LED 27 TiO To RB Board A s2 Flashing Board Failure IP1 Board Power IP2 110 VAC AUX SAFETY INPUT COMMON To RB Board a GND To Safety Circuit on relays section 4 4 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Limit Board Adjustment USL Up slow down This input is the last up slowdown to open p
78. no yes no The car has a local hall call riser hall call riser 138 Normal Car is part of a yes no no yes no If this flag is set the car belongs to a group group 139 Normal Out of service 0 255 90 sec If the car has calls away but cannot move timeout time from the floor it will be taken out of service when this time expires If the time is set to zero the car will never go out of service 140 Normal Between floors 0 255 15 sec Time to wait before starting to move while delay to start stopped between floors 141 Parking Parking floor 0 32 JO floor Parking floor determination 0 no parking 0 no parking 142 Parking Delay before O 255 60 sec Time to wait before moving an idle car to a moving car to parking parking floor floor 143 Parking Open door 0 3 0 each When the car stops due to the last call it once cycles the selected door s one time 0 no 1 front 2 rear 3 both 144 Parking Hold door open 0 3 0 each When parked leave the selected door s 0 no open 1 front 2 rear 3 both 145 Normal Reverse direc yes no no If no calls away and hall call in the opposite tion without closing direction reverse direction without closing doors doors 146 Normal Car calls are yes no no yes no Calls behind the car are dropped when the dropped on direction car reaches the last call in the current direc reversals tion This is an anti nuisance feature 147 Normal Anti nuisance 0 32 0 each Anti nuisance count setti
79. on the car will be selected to recall When finished with the recall operation the car will be immediately selected for phase 2 operation If the first car is deselected and a different car selected the first will be recalled When the first car finishes the second will recall and go back into service This process must be repeated for every car if all cars are to be recalled In this mode of operation a car that has its selection switch OFF will never be selected for either recall and or normal operation _Contents __ Index _MCE Web 6 7 Operations A exe Code Blue Operation The Code Blue feature provides a method of entering a high priority call at a floor This feature allows one of a specified group of cars to be called to a floor for priority service Determining which cars are eligible to respond is programmed at the job site using a hand held unit and may range from one car to all cars This operation is also known as Hospital Emergency Phase I and or Cardiac Arrest Recall Procedure Upon activation of a Code Blue call input the dispatcher will send the closest car available for recall to the floor where the call was made The dispatcher will select cars in the following order e Cars on normal group operation e Cars on Simplex operation e Cars on Independent Attendant if enabled e Cars on Fire Recall Phase I if enabled Once selected a car will flash the Code Blue Indicator cancel all car and hall calls and proce
80. on the elevator e Check the operation of the hoistway terminal slowdown switches Ensure the switches open at the same distance from the terminal floor as the position system magnets slow down e Check the door locks and all other hoistway and car switches for proper operation Buffer tests require the car to over travel the terminal landing Check the following items while operating the car at inspection speed prior to high speed testing e Check the over travel distance before striking the buffers e Check that when the car and counterweight buffers are fully compressed the following items have clearance and will not be damaged e Positioning system will not bottom on the tape support hitch or hit structural mem bers e Check the hoist rope and compensation ropes or chains to insure they are of a proper length to overtravel without causing damage e Check all rope guards car and counterweight to ensure they are tight and will prevent the cables from jumping off the sheave e Ensure that the car and the counterweight have proper overhead clearance when the buffers are fully compressed _Contents __ Index _MCE Web 4 19 Release to Normal Operation A ek Contract Speed Buffer Test Car Before performing test ensure you read and complete Limit adjustments carefully and have checked hoistway over travel clearances A Danger If the car has a counterweight safety ensure that the safety will not apply by tying down the saf
81. operation B2 input on the CSTA board car station must be on The parameters and floor tables are set as they would on a standard job with exception of the parameters described below The field terminal board used on the CSTA I O board for car calls must be the O type This type of field terminal board does not connect the input to the output for the call acknowledge light Parameter Settings The following parameters must be set as listed 133 Yes Inspection flag Prevents car calls from latching e 139 0 Prevents the car from going out of service if delayed 141 O Parking floor 142 0 Parking delay time Contents __ Index _MCE Web 6 3 Operations A ek Operation When the car switch is moved to the up direction the top floor car call input will be activated This will start the car in motion Moving the handle to the center position top floor car call input off will allow the car to slow down and level to the next available floor When the car switch is moved to the down direction the bottom floor car call input will be acti vated This will start the car in motion Moving the handle to the center position bottom floor car call input off will allow the car to slow down and level to the next available floor A one floor run requires the call input to be off within two seconds of the start of the car When you are running the car on door disconnect from the hand held the car switc
82. percentage of parameter 11 10 200 130 90 Speed Motor Speed at which speed regulator begins to strengthen motor field during deceleration 57 Field Weaken Sets speed as percentage of parameter 11 10 200 130 70 Speed Motor Speed at which speed regulator begins to weaken motor field during acceler ation 58 Field Strengthen Sets rate at which motor field reaches rated SEC 01 10 2 2 Rate field 59 Field Weaken Sets rate at which motor field reaches SEC 01 10 2 2 Rate weaken value 63 UP DN Bit Pick Sets threshold at which drive will turn ona 01 1 01 01 bit for detection of motor rotation 80 Overspeed Test Used to activate an overspeed multiplier ON OFF OFF OFF parameter 81 81 Overspeed Multi Speed reference multiplied by this value when 1 1 5 1 0 1 0 plier parameter 80 Overspeed Test activated 82 Reference Mult Multiplies speed command 0 9 2 0 1 0 1 0 83 Motor O L Time Shapes motor overload time out curve Sec 0 500 90 90 Out 84 Motor Overload Sets motor overload trip level 0 2 1 1 Level 85 Current Decay Sets decay time of armature current at a Sec 001 2 5 0 2 0 2 Table 3 18 DSD 412 Drive Parameters Magnetek DSD 412 DC Drive 86 LPR Decay time Allows relay LPR to remain picked until arma Sec 001 2 5 0 3 0 3 ture current decays 87 Pretorque Mult Multiplies pretorque command 0 9 2 0 1 0 1 0 95 Analog o
83. position ind ae A Car top ind Floor 1 Light duty CE driver P board inputs driven by Hall or Car Top board Hall pos ind Floor 3 O type Terminal board outputs Car station ind Floor 2 Floors are typically programmed according to the following table Table 5 25 PI Programming Using CE Light Duty Driver Car top or Hall board Floor Entry Other Characters Entry Other Characters Entry 1 32 1 32 Blank 0 XX 46 B 33 LL 47 B1 34 L1 48 B2 35 L2 49 B3 36 G 50 L 37 GR 51 PH 38 R 52 M 39 SB 53 P1 40 GF 54 P2 41 P3 55 C 42 1R 56 MZ 43 G1 57 X 44 G2 58 EX 45 G3 59 5 60 Manual 42 02 2T00 Main Menus PI Board Setup View amp Edit This menu allows you to program PI boards PI boards allow flexible programmable enabling of up to 24 outputs three groups of 8 outputs each on a per floor basis Typically one group of outputs is used to drive hall mounted position indicators while the two remaining groups are used to drive directional arrows and hall lanterns or gongs PI boards are I O 24 boards with special position indicator software and up to three O type Ter minal boards Terminal boards may be programmed so that each activates a single output per floor output per floor lamp or so that each activates a combination of its outputs per floor digital indicators If required multiple PI boards can be used on the car network Each PI board st
84. shipment from its factory to be free from defects in workmanship and materials Any defect appearing more than 15 months from the date of shipment from the factory shall be deemed to be due to ordinary wear and tear Manufacturer however assumes no risk or liability for results of the use of the products purchased from it including but without limiting the generality of the forgoing 1 The use in combination with any electrical or electronic components circuits systems assemblies or any other material or equipment 2 Unsuitability of this product for use in any circuit assembly or environment Purchasers rights under this warranty shall consist solely of requiring the manufacturer to repair or in manufacturer s sole discretion replace free of charge F O B factory any defective items received at said factory within the said 15 months and determined by manufacturer to be defective The giving of or failure to give any advice or recommendation by manufacturer shall not constitute any warranty by or impose any liability upon the manufacturer This warranty constitutes the sole and exclusive remedy of the purchaser and the exclusive liability of the manufacturer AND IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED IMPLIED OR STATUTORY AS TO MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR PURPOSE SOLD DESCRIPTION QUALITY PRODUCTIVENESS OR ANY OTHER MATTER In no event will the manufacturer be liable for special or consequential damages or for delay in perfor
85. the analog input does not match the polarity of the Up Dwn input Not used Drv Overload The drive has exceeded the overload curve Check motor connections main contactor contacts and motor windings Make sure the brake is lifting Verify encoder is prop erly connected and feedback matches motor speed Extrn Fault 1 External Fault 1 input is activated Not used Extrn Fault 2 External Fault 2 input is Not used activated Extrn Fault 3 External Fault 3 input is Not used activated Extrn Fault 4 External Fault 4 input is Not used activated Fan Alarm The heatsink cooling fan Check fan and connections Clean heatsink is not operating Fuse Fault The DC Bus fuse on the Check fuse If OK check motor connections Check motor for drive is open continuity from windings to ground If OK replace drive Ground Fault The sum of all phase currents has exceeded 50 of the rated amper age of the drive Disconnect motor from drive Cycle power to drive If problem clears possible bad motor or wiring If problem does not clear possible bad system ground or bad drive Hit Torque Limit The measured current is equal or greater than the torque limit setting Verify car is balanced correctly Verify motor and drive sizing Can be delayed by increasing the value of the TRQ LIM MSG DLY A1 parameter Mtr id Fault Mtr Data Fault Invalid motor parame ters Check
86. the selected 0 no door s 1 front 2 rear 3 both 161 Service set mode 0 3 0 each Set car to one of the following services O none normal op 0 Normal operation 1 IND 1 Independent 2 DD 2 Door disconnect 3 FR 3 Fire recall 162 Enable redundant yes no no yes no When set to yes the inputs for car top and inspection check in car inspection are duplicated 163 Disable lockouts on yes no no yes no When set car call locks will be disabled all independent and atten calls will be active when the car is in inde dant pendent or attendant mode 164 Hydro Relevel only if yes no no yes no When this flag is set and a car has the doors out of door zone closed it will initiate a relevel only if it drifts beyond the door zone This is designed to reduce the number of relevels the car will make when at rest for a long period 165 Normal Non directional yes no no yes no Setting to yes makes hall calls non direc hall calls tional The car will stop for either up or down hall call on arriving at the floor from either direction and will cancel both once it stops When this parameter is set to Yes there is no need to define both an up and a down button per floor because both up and down buttons will operate identically To save inputs only one button per floor may be set in the floor table 166 Fire service from local yes no no yes no When set to yes the car will read the fire hall board inputs from its own hall board instead of the
87. to Disable Disable Disable removal of Drive Enable logic input Enable MLT SPD to DLY1 Assigns multi step speed command to None None None recognition delay timer 1 mspd1 mspd15 MLT SPD to DLY2 Assigns multi step speed command to None None None recognition delay timer 2 mspd1 mspd15 MLT SPD to DLY3 Assigns multi step speed command to None None None recognition delay timer 3 mspd1 mspd15 MLT SPD to DLY4 Assigns multi step speed command to None None None recognition delay timer 4 mspd1 mspd15 3 59 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Table 3 5 HPV 900 Drive Parameters C2 Logic Inputs Log In 1 TB1 1 Terminal 1 Selection DRIVE DRIVE ENABLE ENABLE Log In 2 TB1 2 Terminal 2 Selection RUN UP RUN Log In 3 TB1 3 Terminal 3 Selection RUN DOWN FAULT RESET Log In 4 TB1 4 Terminal 4 Selection FAULT STEP REF BO RESET Log In 5 TB1 5 Terminal 5 Selection STEP REF STEP REF B1 BO Log In 6 TB1 6 Terminal 6 Selection STEP REF STEP REF B2 B1 Log In 7 TB1 7 Terminal 7 Selection STEP REF STEP REF B3 B2 Log In 8 TB1 8 Terminal 8 Selection STEP REF UP DN B3 Log In 9 TB1 9 Terminal 9 Selection S CURVE CONTACT SEL 0 CFI RM c3 Logic Outputs Log Out 1 tb1 14 Terminal 14 Selection SPEED DEV RUN COM LOW MANDED Log Out 2 tb1 15 Terminal 15 Selection RUN CO
88. to A2 2 Car lantern down CLD AF 27 AF 28 A3 3toA3 4 Updirectionarrow UDA AF 19 AF20 A2 3 to A2 4 Down direction arrow DDA AF 29 AF30 A3 5 to A3 6 Access inspection gate bypass rear AGBR AF 21 AF 22 A2 5 to A2 6 Rear door car lantern up RCLU AF 31 AF 32 A3 7 to A3 8 Rear door car lantern down RCLD AF 23 AF 24 A2 7 to A2 8 Access inspection gate bypass front AGBP BF 25 BF 26 B3 1 to B3 2 Door open DO BF 17 BF 18 B2 1 to B2 2 Rear door open RDO BF27 BF 28 B3 3 to B3 4 Door close DC BF 19 BF 20 B2 3toB2 4 Rear door cose RDC BF 29 BF 30 B3 5 to B3 6 Door nudging NUDG BF 21 BF 22 B2 5 to B2 6 Rear door nudging RNUD BF 31 BF 32 B3 7 to B3 8 Door cam CAM BF 23 BF 24 B2 7 to B2 8 Code blue Hosp emerg ind CBCI CO 26 C3 1 to C3 2 Position indicator 1 PI1 CO 18 C2 1 to C2 2 Position indicator 2 PI2 CO 28 C3 3 to C3 4 Position indicator 3 PI3 CO 20 C2 3 to C2 4 Position indicator 4 PI4 C0 30 C3 5toC3 6 Position indicator5 PB CO 22 C2 5 to C2 6 Position indicator 6 PI6 CO 32 C3 7 to C3 8 Position indicator 7 PI7 CO 24 C2 7 to C2 8 Position indicator 8 PI8 Contents Index _MCE Web ay The Hand Held Unit A axe Car Station Board The car station board can be located either in the controller cabinet or in the car All its inputs and outputs are connected to equipment generally located in the car station Table 5 8 Car Station Board CSTA N v6 2 Input Examples A17 1 2000
89. to READY TO RUN The HPV600 drive is now correctly configured for closed loop operation Running the Car 1 Attempt to run the car up using the inspection up down buttons Hold the up button until the car starts to move If the motor moves in the down direction stop the car Using the programmer access the Configure CO menu Go to User Switches Cland change parameter Motor Rotation from Forward to Reverse 2 Again run the motor Confirm that the motor turns in the correct direction to move the car up or down 3 Using the programmer access Display DL Monitor Speed Reference Run the carin the down direction The speed reference displayed on the drive should be negative Using the inspection up button on the Relay board run the car in the up direction The speed reference should be positive 4 Inthe Display D1 menu monitor Speed Feedback Run the car in the down direc tion The speed feedback should be negative If not reverse the A and A signals from the encoder to the drive 5 While using the inspection up down buttons to run the car use a hand tach to check car speed It should be moving at approximately the same speed as that displayed on the drive If not access Adjust AO User Switches AL Adjust Contract Motor Spd until the car is running at exactly the same speed as displayed by Speed Feedback 6 The caris now started and running on inspection 3 30 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 600
90. to Yes The brake will not pick if this parameter is set and there is no hardware installed 90 Brake Flag 1 yes no no yes no 91 Brake Parameter 1 0 255 fO each 92 Field Speed at which 0 2000 1000 fom Speed at which the field weakens the field weakens 93 Field Time before drop 0 25 5 2 5 sec Time to apply full field before dropping to ping from full to run run field strength field 94 Field Time field is held 0 25 5 2 5 sec Time the field is held high after the car high after the car stops stops 95 Field Time to reach full 0 25 5 O sec Time to reach full motor field motor field 96 Field Relays proving 0 25 5 1 sec The controller will check if the relays have delay dropped after this time after the car stopped 0 disabled completely The RSEQ input should turn ON before this time has elapsed 97 MG Time Wye stays ON 0 25 5 3 5 sec Time the start Wye contactor will stay ON before run contractor before the run contactor turns ON turns ON 98 MG Time MG stays ON 0 255 6 min Time the MG keeps running even if the car after car stops on auto has no direction A time of zero will keep the matic MG running indefinitely 99 MG Time MG stays ON 0 25 5 6 min Time the MG will keep running even if the after car stops on car has no direction A time of zero will keep inspection the MG running indefinitely 100 MG MG pump delay O 255 2 sec Time the MG or pump will keep running time after stop hy
91. up button ATUS BL 3 B1 3 Access top zone down button ATDS BL 4 B1 4 Access bottom zone limit ABUL BL 5 B1 5 Access bottom zone up button ABUS BL 6 B1 6 Access bottom zone down button ABDS BL 7 B1 7 Access top monitor ATM BL 8 B1 8 Access bottom monitor ABM CL 1 C1 1 Displacement switch CWS CL 2 C1 2 Seismic switch SAS CL 3 C1 3 Seismic reset switch SRE CL 4 C1 4 Counterweight position switch POS CL 5 C1 5 CL 6 C1 6 CL 7 C1 7 CL 8 C1 8 Peelle door open contact X15 16 5 36 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __ Index _MCE Web Table 5 17 Extension Board EXT1 N Output Examples A17 1 2000 Main Menus CarTop Board Outputs Terminals Connectors Name Label AF 25 AF26 A3 1 to A3 2 Door locks bypass enable DLB AF 17 AF 18 A2 1 to A2 2 Car gate bypass enable GBY AF 27 AF 28 A3 3 to A3 4 Rope gripper reset 1 RGR1 AF 19 AF20 A2 3 to A2 4 Rope gripper reset 2 RGR2 AF 29 AF30 A3 5 to A3 6 AF 21 AF 22 A2 5 to A2 6 Fire lobby recall indicator FRI AF 31 AF 32 A3 7 to A3 8 Fire OFF indicator FOI AF 23 AF 24 A2 7 to A2 8 Seismic indicator SAL BF 25 BF 26 B3 1 to B3 2 BF 17 BF 18 B2 1 to B2 2 BF27 BF 28 B3 3 to B3 4 BF 19 BF 20 B2 3 to B2 4 Peelle X11 Fire 1 FPL BF 29 BF 30 B3 5 to B3 6 Peelle X12 Designated landing FDL BF 21 BF 22 B2 5 to B2 6 Peelle X13 Fire 2 FP2 BF 31 BF 32 B3 7 to B3 8 Peelle X14 Fire hold FHD BF 23 BF 24 B2 7 to B2 8
92. weight needs to be added to the counterweight to get the car balanced between 40 and 50 of rated capac ity If the car is too light weight needs to be removed from the counterweight to get it balanced between 40 and 50 of rated capacity Do not proceed with the adjust ment process until the car is properly balanced Contents Index _MCE Web 3 41 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A ek Motor Parameter Adjustments In order to perform correctly the drive needs to be programmed for correct motor values and volts hertz ratio so the motor will not stall with a load or at slow speed The following procedure establishes volts hertz ratio 1 2 3 Place full load into the car Run the car up and down on inspection speed Using a hand tach monitor the speed of the car If the car is moving at less than the inspection speed programmed at SPEED COMMAND 3 A3 increase CONTRACT MTR SPD AD If the car is moving faster than the inspection speed programmed at SPEED COMMAND 3 A3 decrease CONTRACT MTR SPD A1 Repeat until the car is moving at exactly the speed programmed at SPEED COM MAND 3 A3 Speed Curve Setting and Adjustment The Magnetek HPV 600 drive has an internal speed curve algorithm that controls acceleration deceleration and jerk rates There are four independently selectable speed curves This system uses only the first Preliminary setting of speed curve parameters was done in the drive programming section
93. 0 150 110 110 Ovid Time Out Time that defines motor overload sec 5 0 120 0 60 0 60 0 curve Flux Sat Break Flux saturation curve slope change 0 100 75 75 point Flux Sat Slope 1 Flux saturation curve slope for low 0 200 0 0 0 fluxes Flux Sat Slope 2 Flux saturation curve slope for high 0 200 0 50 50 fluxes Configure CO C1 User Switches Spd Command Src Speed Command Source Analog input Multi step Multi step Multi step Serial Run Command Src Run Command Source External TB 1 External External TB Serial TB1 Serial extern Hi Lo Gain Src High low gain change switch source External TB 1 nternal Internal Serial Internal Speed Reg Type Chooses speed regulator Elev spd reg Elevspd_ Elev spd reg Pi speed reg reg Motor Rotation Allows user to reverse direction of Forward Forward Forward or motor rotation Reverse Reverse Spd Ref Release Determines when speed reference Reg release Reg Reg release release is asserted Brake picked release 3 13 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Table 3 1 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Open Loop Me Cont Confirm Src Determines if an external logic input None None External TB is used for contactor confirmation External TB 1 Pre Torque Source Determines if a pre torque command None None None is used and if used determines the Analog input source of the pre torque command Serial Pre Torque Latch Chooses
94. 0 5 0 5 Motor Mech Loss Mechanical loss at rated frequency 0 15 0 1 0 1 0 Ovld Start Level Maximum continuous motor current 100 150 110 110 Ovid Time Out Time that defines motor overload sec 5 0 120 0 60 0 60 0 curve Flux Sat Break Flux saturation curve slope change 0 100 75 75 point Flux Sat Slope 1 Flux saturation curve slope for low 0 200 0 0 0 fluxes Flux Sat Slope 2 Flux saturation curve slope for high 0 200 0 50 50 fluxes Configure CO C1 User Switches Spd Command Src Speed Command Source Analog input Multi step Multi step Multi step Serial Run Command Src Run Command Source External TB External External TB Serial TB1 Serial extern Hi Lo Gain Src High low gain change switch source External TB 1 Internal Internal Serial Internal 3 57 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Table 3 5 HPV 900 Drive Parameters Me Speed Reg Type Chooses speed regulator Elev spd reg Elev sod Elev spd Pi speed reg reg reg Motor Rotation Allows user to reverse direction of Forward Forward Forward or motor rotation Reverse Reverse Spd Ref Release Determines when speed reference Reg release Reg Reg release release is asserted Brake picked release Cont Confirm Src Determines if an external logic input is None None External TB used for contactor confirmation External TB Pre Torque Source Determines if a pre torque command None
95. 00 300 00 20 00 20 00 C5 04 ASR Time 2 ASR Integral Time 2 Flux Vector only sec 0 0 10 000 0 500 0 500 Carrier Frequency C6 03 Carrier Freq Max Carrier frequency Upper Limit J kHz 2 0 15 0 KVA J80 dependent Preset Reference Field Adjustable Parameters are shaded The upper limit is the max FPM value set by 01 03 Set this parameter before setting D1 01 thru D1 17 D1 01 Reference 1 Preset Reference 1 Notused FPM 0 0 00 00 D1 02 High High Speed must be gt D1 07 FPM 0 0 50 0 D1 03 High Level High Level must be gt D1 05 and lt D1 07 FPM 0 0 30 0 13 0 D1 04 Reference 4 Preset Reference 4 Not used FPM 0 0 0 0 0 0 D1 05 Level Level Speed must be lt D1 03 FPM 0 0 15 0 12 5 D1 06 Reference 6 Preset Reference 6 Not used FPM 0 0 0 0 0 0 D1 07 Combination High Inspection Speed FPM 0 0 42 0 45 0 must be gt D1 03 and lt D1 02 D1 08 Reference 8 Preset Reference 8 Not used FPM 0 0 0 0 0 0 D1 17 j og reference J og Reference Medium Speed FPM 0 0 42 0 Reference Limits D2 01 Ref Upper Limit Frequency Reference Upper Limit 0 0 110 0 100 0 100 0 D2 02 Ref Lower Limit Frequency Reference Lower Limit 0 0 110 0 0 0 0 0 3 80 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index_ _ MCE Web Yaskawa F7 Drive Jump Frequencies not used set at drive defaults VOLTAGE FREQUENCY V F Pattern Field Adjustable Par
96. 110 overspeed governor switch in the safety circuit string May be selected as the source of the rope gripper overspeed fault This input automatically resets when the detected condition clears GATE Monitors the gate switch to determine if the car door is open One of the inputs used to determine unintended movement conditions for the rope gripper e LOCK Monitors the door locks to determine if the hall door is open One of the inputs used to determine unintended movement conditions for the rope gripper DZ Monitors the cars remaining in the door zone One of the inputs used to determine unintended movement conditions for the rope gripper Switches S1 S2 and S3 e S1 Used with S2 to set parameters or during normal operation displays or resets trip counter e Press momentarily to display the limit and rope gripper trip count on LEDs DS17 through DS242 Fault Parameter Learn LEDs in the board illustration following Sum of lighted LEDs Count W ps17 n Q psi8 gt ps9 oOo N N nn vA O OAOA A A A O a AK Ad Ad AS 8 16 32 64 O N Q N N N 09 128 Press and hold S1 for 5 seconds to clear the trip counter If a fault code had been dis played it will also be cleared e S2 Resets the safety for a limit fault enters parameter setting mode Used with S1 to change parameter values Use S3 to exit parameter setting mode Parameter I ndic
97. 2 32 6 Rated Mtr Speed Rated motor speed at full load RPM 50 0 3000 0 1130 2 No Load Curr Percent no load current 10 0 60 0 50 Stator Leakage X Stator leakage reactance 0 20 0 9 0 9 0 Rotor Leakage X Rotor leakage reactance 0 20 0 9 0 9 0 Stator Resist Stator resistance 0 20 0 1 5 1 5 Motor Iron Loss Iron loss at rated frequency 0 15 0 0 5 0 5 Motor Mech Loss Mechanical loss at rated frequency 0 15 0 1 0 1 0 Ovid Start Level Maximum continuous motor current 100 150 110 110 Ovid Time Out Time that defines motor overload curve sec 5 0 120 0 60 0 60 0 Flux Sat Break Flux saturation curve slope change point 0 100 75 75 Flux Sat Slope 1 Flux saturation curve slope for low fluxes 0 200 0 0 0 Flux Sat Slope 2 Flux saturation curve slope for high fluxes 0 200 0 50 50 3 34 Manual 42 02 2T00 Table 3 3 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Closed Loop Magnetek HPV 600 Configure CO C1 User Switches programmed to Run Up and Run Down Spd Command Src Speed Command Source Analog input Multi step Multi step Multi step Serial Run Command Src Run Command Source External TB 1 External External TB Serial TB1 Serial extern Hi Lo Gain Src High low gain change switch source External TB 1 Internal Internal Serial Internal Speed Reg Type Chooses speed regulator Elev spd reg Elev sod Elev spd Pi speed reg reg reg Mot
98. 2 xx Overspeed in DZ down MPU 2 V3 xx 7 Direction Failure 8 Inspection Failure Up 9 Inspection Failure Down 10 Stall Failure Up 11 Stall Failure Down 12 No Demand Failure Up 13 No Demand Failure Down 14 Bypass Locks Failure 15 Limit Relay Contact Failure 16 Gripper Unintended Movement 17 Gripper Governor Overspeed 18 Gripper Limit Overspeed 19 Gripper Relay Contact Failure DZ up is the door zone of the top landing DZ down is the door zone of the bottom landing e Press S1 momentarily to display a count of the total number of faults that have occurred since the last time faults were cleared e Press S1 for 7 seconds to reset the fault counter Reset Limit Section Safety e Press S2 momentarily Rope Gripper Reset e Press S3 momentarily 4 18 Manual 42 02 2700 Contents Index _MCE Web Final Test Final Test Final testing must be successfully completed before the car may be released for passenger oper ation Buffer Tests Buffer tests allow the car and the counterweight to overtravel the terminals and strike the buff ers at contract speed Preparation A Danger Only qualified elevator personal skilled in final adjustments and safety testing should per form the following test The buffer tests require critical circuits to be bypassed Ensure peo ple do not ride on cars while performing tests The car can be stopped at any time Before performing the test complete all adjustments
99. 4 Top Floor Test Procedure 06S ha Sr ehWEW RRS S owe ee aw Se ChaN de OR OEE ES 4 24 Boats Floor Test Pie oo hs ho he Wh EK AEH E FARO Ew EELE SOKO 4 25 Section 5 The Hand Held Unit Pi TIS SOCIO 6b 5 ie 5 KK HOA KARE AER SH ERHERESRESRAOED AEH RDE REO RSEO 5 1 fo a ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 5 2 CONN CUI 6 id nnds ada Renae ae be eee ave oe ee ee bes 5 2 CUO sridterreian ti ranen aE aAa DEENEN ia 5 3 Moving ation the Current Menu 4 0 oe bode 4a od chad e EES 5 3 Moving Between PS 5h on sd bobo ae eA heeds eebeniseteearsanes 5 3 PN SADMAN S91 Ge NH ADEE EEE EA N 5 3 Making an Entry in a Function Screen sc ccac dsc ek e4 skGeebe ceed eer roenn 5 4 Return to Last Ment secs ce saunas Bad deemed eee GR ame EE ee E E ee 5 4 NRE PER ERA P EEE T E A A EAE E ESA N bes E E A EAE A A 5 4 Navigating SUSO ieee iridir eetan bd Oy EEE ea EE EEE EE 55 Main Mem s isreirrsriekisrd tkana CREASE GREP KE ChE S65 e454 05 eee RS eS 5 6 Car DIM acccadacsbddenaedeakaediedeed seaehsstiedesdeawedsisiesessees 5 6 States Submenu dd eh a hee os ke oo 03 bee 40 eben eek 5 7 at PAS oy gkko 5 eG bee GARR SR ed CARAS Reha eee eee eee 5 19 a et N SE r E A A E N OE E A E 5 22 Eol aea a E A ETE EE I a E E ETE DELEON UR OE 5 24 Car op Bodd sacduddaidarearewnanr add dardakhedk Qasnauwasndsn died O A 5 26 CAP SANG BOBO iii one bas E ORDER ERE RRE REESE DRUR BIDE 5 28 a ee wh tees ve ew ain wae eee en on heen was E EEEE A ETENE 5 30 Dispatcher Hall Beat 5 icc
100. 4 14 _Contents __ Index _MCE Web 4 11 Release to Normal Operation A ek Figure 4 4 2K Limit Gripper Board Refer to Rope Gripper Drawing for Connections Relay Board TL 3 25 Cc gle ODVOOO9 O 3 Be 6 ge ttm LANE ore ANN ZO S FEEEOO gt 2 2 gt gt 0000885 0000 7 E GouT 1 GOUT 2 K6 K5 K4 K2 K3 K1 SAF 3B Relay Board E GouT 3 SAF 3A Drive GOUT 4 SAF 2B Relay Board E LOUT 1 SAF 2A CG LOUT 2 SAF 1B H Lours SAF 1A Relay Board E LOUT 4 D x N D LIMMON 2 hin to a a a elays page Z S S S LIMMON 1 for connection 0 w O a I a TAC HV GND iT woth B TZ W B oAss Lor AanZ0O00 Es A gt fOoaaa 21 ceee FERRER BSS n NDNNnNnNnNANAHNHND VN W om aagdaaAdanaaAaAA sl lez GND on lt i CAN a G5 N CAN n N S ee ae ge baha zoo oE N N Mile cep S2 2464056225550090 oar 1 HHEBOBRRRAARAAAAABDA Input Indicators From Relay Board 4 12 Manual 42 02 2T00 _Contents_ _ Index _MCE Web Limit Board Adjustment Parameter Entry In parameter entry mode you can change settings for Parameter 1 Car speed in FPM Determines the speed which the board will use as high speed during the Normal Learn operation Please refer to Normal Learn on page 4 15 e Parameter 2 Limit section overspeed in FPM Sets the speed at which the board will open the safety circuit bringing the car to an emergency stop e Parameter 3 Rop
101. 5 9 Ifthe EST NO LOAD CURR value is 2 larger than the NO LOAD CURR then increase FLUX SAT SLOPE 2 by 10 If the EST NO LOAD CURR and NO LOAD CURR values are within 2 continue 10 Repeat until EST NO LOAD CURR and NO LOAD CURR are within 2 Place a full load in the car Run the car at contract speed from top to bottom and back Observe EST RATED RPM found under Display Power Data D2 Enter this value into RATED MTR SPEED found under Adjust Motor A5 14 Remove the full load from the car and place balanced load in it Run the car from bottom to top and back 15 Observe EST INERTIA found under Display Elevator Data D1 Write down the value for up and down 16 Average the up and down values of EST INERTIA Enter this value into INERTIA found under Adjust Drive A1 17 Remove weights from the car Ride the car up and down adding 100 pounds of weight at a time Observe one floor two floor and multi floor runs to be sure that the car rides well under all load conditions OH B Contents Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 600 Brake Adjustment The following adjustments have been set from survey data The brake assembly and all pins should be cleaned thoroughly and all spring tensions set properly to hold 125 of car capacity prior to adjusting the brake driver Brake shoes should be checked to insure at least 95 surface contact If spring tensions are changed after this adjustment the brake driver will ne
102. 5 reserved 0 255 fO each 16 reserved 0 255 fO each 17 Front Door op Door 0 25 5 14 sec If the door cannot open in this time it will open failure timeout reclose and try again until the retry count is reached 18 Front Door op Door 0 25 5 14 sec If the doors do not fully close within this close failure timeout time they will reopen and try again 19 Front Door op Door lock 0 25 5 3 sec If the doors close but cannot lock in this failure timeout time they will reopen 20 Door op Flag 1 yes no no yes no 21 Front Door op Open yes no no yes no The door open output will be kept always output stays On when ON while the door is opening or opened door opened WARNING Some door operators could be damaged if this flag is set 5 39 The Hand Held Unit Table 5 18 Car Setup Parameters Screen Me doors are swing type 22 Door op Door close out yes no no yes no Set this flag for door operators that do not put turns OFF when door run with power Example Moline closed 23 Door op Door has no yes no no yes no Set this flag if the door operator does not Close Limit Switch have a close limit The controller uses the door gate contact to detect a closed door 24 Door op Test jumped yes no no yes no When this flag is set the computer will ver gate and locks while ify that the gate and locks are open when closing the close limit is made
103. 60 hertz and adjust car speed using parameter O1 03 Sample setup of 01 03 Sample information Rated RPM 1100 and Contract Speed 150FPM Find the synchronous speed of the motor in the following table using the next higher RPM from the rated RPM for your motors synchronous speed Synchronous no slip RPM Number of Poles 900 8 1200 6 1800 4 Since scaling is based on maximum motor speed it is necessary to determine the speed of the car at that speed This can be mathematically calculated using the following formula Using the table above we find that the next higher RPM from our example of 1100RPM is 1200RPM which would indicate that the motor is a 6 pole design Using 1200 as our synchronous speed we find the setting of 01 03 with the following formula 1 Synchronous RPM x Contract Speed Car Speed at Synchronous RPM Rated RPM 2 1200RPM x 150FPM Car Speed at Synchronous RPM 1100RPM 3 163 6 FPM Car Speed at Synchronous RPM 4 11636 01 03 Setting 3 76 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index_ _MCE Web Yaskawa F7 Drive Speed Set Up Now that scaling is set you can set the preset speeds of the elevator If you attempt to adjust the preset speeds before adjusting the scaling you will be limited to the maximum default speed of 1OOFPM There are four speeds that can be set Table 3 13 Yaskawa F7 Speed Set Up Parameter Name Rule Range Default Set
104. 8 0 8 0 0 0 zero when slowing the elevator to leveling speed Accel Rate 2 Acceleration rate 2 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 3 11 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Table 3 1 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Open Loop Me gain Decel Rate 2 Deceleration rate 2 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Accel Jerk in 2 Rate of increase of acceleration up ft s3_ 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 to ACCEL Rate when increasing ele vator speed Accel Jerk out 2 Rate of decrease of acceleration to ftjs3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 zero when approaching contract ele vator speed Decel Jerk in 2 Rate of increase of deceleration up ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 to Decel Rate when decreasing ele vator speed Decel Jerk out 2 Rate of decrease of deceleration to ftjs3_ 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 zero when slowing the elevator to leveling speed Accel Rate 3 Acceleration rate 3 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Decel Rate 3 Deceleration rate 3 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Accel Jerk in 3 Rate of increase of acceleration up ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 to ACCEL Rate when increasing ele vator speed Accel Jerk out 3 Rate of decrease of acceleration to ftjs3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 zero when approaching contract ele vator speed Decel Jerk in 3 Rate of increase of deceleration up ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 to Decel Rate when decreasing ele vator speed Decel Jerk out 3 Rate of decrease of deceleration to ftjs3_ 0
105. 96 Problems Auto Tuning In MFVC Mode 00 c ccc ccc cee eee enn e ete nees 3 97 Monitoring Peak Current cc5 cto ntaadgedrad See Sae EN MAN EEO EN EM RRS O ORO ONES 3 97 Mitsubishi A500 Closed Loop Speed Control 00 c cece eee eee eens 3 98 Closed Loop Speed Control 370 Set to a O Overview 0 ccc ccc cee eens 3 98 Closed loop speed control 370 settOa1Or2 22 ccc ccc cece een tenes 3 98 Gain Parameters Adjustment n nuse ccc ccc ccc een cen tenn ene eeenees 3 99 Sree AO MeNS 3 62a eed bead da GahoetwediGies bos denseneeeeseeieaiar 3 99 Unusual Operation in Mode lor 2 20 0 ccc ccc cence nee e nent eens 3 99 Clearing the Drive Parameters to Factory Default 0 0 cece cee cece eens 3 99 IAS E E E A yes ween owe ee Ld eRe apes eee eee ae 3 100 Prake Fa es Co 0 RG oe ee A eS 3 101 Magnetek DSD 412 DC Drive 2 0 ccc cc ccc eee ee eee eee eeeees 3 104 Pict A eve ce eure ioe e eee d 4xGGi eee hens ee ebee seen ces 3 104 Drive PYG cc oe eka ee Sead bb eee hho Keene de eudde areae 3 104 Ec oe EE E E EE S AE EEN nd EEE EE E T 3 106 Inspection Start UP cia sect chew ia So ehecsdtaridbostaiisaseeseus deus isanens 3 107 Dive FS whee leeceay edo srar Een e E oooh decd oe eres 3 107 High Speed Adjust Magnetek DSD 412 0 ccc cece ene teen nee 3 108 at NAG AEE E E N T EE E EE E eeeendsusedkess 3 108 Dive Porai S aa a ner re ee TAS EEE E AE 3 109 S Durve Patem Adjustments 654 444 d0084 ridit od E ESIS h
106. BL 1 B3 1 to B3 2 Hall call ack light 1 HCA1 BL 2 B2 1 to B2 2 Hall call ack light 2 HCA2 BL 3 B3 3 to B3 4 Hall call ack light 3 HCA3 BL 4 B2 3 to B2 4 Hall call ack light 4 HCA4 BL 5 B3 5 to B3 6 Hall call ack light 5 HCA5 BL 6 B2 5 to B2 6 Hall call ack light 6 HCA6 BL 7 B3 7 to B3 8 Hall call ack light 7 HCA7 BL 8 B2 7 to B2 8 Hall call ack light 8 HCA8 CL 1 C3 1 to C3 2 Hall call ack light 9 HCA9 CL 2 C2 1 to C2 2 Hall call ack light 10 HCA10 CL 3 C3 3 to C3 4 Hall call ack light 11 HCA11 CL 4 C2 3 to C2 4 Hall call ack light 12 HCA12 CL 5 C3 5 to C3 6 Hall call ack light 13 HCA13 CL 6 C2 5 to C2 6 Hall call ack light 14 HCA14 CL 7 C3 7 to C3 8 Hall call ack light 15 HCA15 CL 8 C2 7 to C2 8 Hall call ack light 16 HCA16 5 31 The Hand Held Unit Dispatcher Hall Board Me Table 5 12 Dispatcher Hall Board DHALL N v6 2 Input Examples DHALL Board I nputs Terminals Connectors Name Label AO 1 Al 1 Fire recall switch FIRE AO 2 Al 2 Fire smoke detectors bypass switch FBYP AO 3 Al 3 Smoke detectors SMOK AO 4 Al1 4 Lobby smoke detector s LSMK AO 5 A1 5 Machine room smoke detectors FMRS AO 6 A1 6 Low hoistway smoke detectors FLHS AO 7 Al 7 Remote fire switch ON position FRON AO 8 Al1 8 Remote fire switch OFF position FROF BL 1 B1 1 Hall Call 1 HC1 BL 2 B1 2 Hall Call 2 HC2 BL 3 B1 3 Hall Call 3 HC3 BL 4 B1 4 Hall Call 4 HC4
107. BL 5 B1 5 Hall Call 5 HC5 BL 6 B1 6 Hall Call 6 HC6 BL 7 B1 7 Hall Call 7 HC7 BL 8 B1 8 Hall Call 8 HC8 CL 1 Cl1 1 Hall call 9 HC9 CL 2 C1 2 Hall call 10 HC10 CL 3 C1 3 Hall call 11 HC11 CL 4 C1 4 Hall call 12 HC12 CL 5 C1 5 Hall call 13 HC13 CL 6 C1 6 Hall call 14 HC14 CL 7 Cl1 7 Hall call 15 HC15 CL 8 C1 8 Hall call 16 HC16 5 32 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __ Index _MCE Web Table 5 13 Dispatcher Hall Board DHALL N v6 2 Output Examples DHALL Board Outputs Terminals Connectors Name Label AO 26 A3 1 to A3 2 Fire recall switch ON indicator FONI AO 18 A2 1 to A2 2 Fire OFF switch ON indicator FOFI AO 28 A3 3 to A3 4 AO 20 A2 3 to A2 4 AO 30 A3 5 to A3 6 AO 22 A2 5 to A2 6 AO 32 A3 7 to A3 8 AO 24 A2 7 to A2 8 BL 1 B3 1 to B3 2 Hall call ack light 1 HCA1 BL 2 B2 1 to B2 2 Hall call ack light 2 HCA2 BL 3 B3 3 to B3 4 Hall call ack light 3 HCA3 BL 4 B2 3 to B2 4 Hall call ack light 4 HCA4 BL 5 B3 5 to B3 6 Hall call ack light 5 HCA5 BL 6 B2 5 to B2 6 Hall call ack light 6 HCA6 BL 7 B3 7 to B3 8 Hall call ack light 7 HCA7 BL 8 B2 7 to B2 8 Hall call ack light 8 HCA8 CL 1 C3 1 to C3 2 Hall call ack light 9 HCA9 CL 2 C2 1 to C2 2 Hall call ack light 10 HCA10 CL 3 C3 3 to C3 4 Hall call ack light 11 HCA11 CL 4 C2 3 to C2 4 Hall call ack light 12 HCA12 CL 5 C3 5 to C3 6 Hall call ack light 13 HCA13 CL 6 C2 5 to C2 6 Hall call ack
108. CONVEY E E A AT E E E E EEEE EET 3 4 Drive PP os keds ew hd S 4S rinas ok i Eia o r duka Vi seu hiLeces 3 4 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Open LOOp 00 cece ccc e eee eee eeees 3 5 Using the HPV600 Drive ProgramMer cece cece eee eee e ene ne nennees 3 5 Pol eee SN eeir pteris OESA NS SESSA CHEGa RS Oe NO4 CURE EERES OTE EES 3 6 PC eT A TA ereere re eee he ee ew ee te ee oe be ea Soe 3 6 Or evah els 20 0S ee ree ee iE o ee ee ee ee eee eee 3 8 PN SM os hdd ade eed piirien bss Rhodes deeb ouindsiasenewn 3 9 Drive Parameter Reference Open LOOP cc cee cee cece c eee e ene eens 3 9 HPV 600 Drive Faults Open Loop ook ions ncece ecw eG hbawn a eens sas errero 3 17 HPV 600 High Speed Adjustment Open Loop 0 c ccc eee cece ee eens 3 20 it I hh enn 8 bho T 090589 0404 2 eee neta 3 20 Motor Parameter Adjustments 0 00 cee cee eee ccc eee e eee e eee neeeees 3 21 Speed Curve Setting and Adjustment n sasua stead due esedebereeere ees we 3 22 E A hak E Sedo hat ewe ene T EE 3 23 ee EE ii Manual 42 02 2T00 E1 3 3 06 index _MCE Web HPV 600 AC Drive Start Up Closed Loop 0 ce ccc cece ee cee nee eeees 3 26 nee wa rah ec anpe ey Kobus redre haaa a aaa 3 26 HPV 600 Drive Programming Closed LOOp 0ccecce ccc e cece eee eaes 3 26 Drive Parameters Closed Loop lt cncccccdesceedoes sd eenneseeddeudouweneons 3 27 Using the HPV600 Drive Programmer 0 0 cee c
109. Car 1 number of floors Enter the number of floors ser viced by this car Car 1 lobby floor number Enter the lobby floor for this car Modem initialization string 1 Enter the initialization string for the modem used for the primary dial out line See modem docu mentation 29 Modem initialization string 2 Enter the initialization string for the modem used for the second ary dial out line See modem documentation 5 67 ow The Hand Held Unit RA exe Car Lockout Setup Figure 5 11 Car Lockouts Screen To select the desired floor e 2 or up arrow key to move up one floor 8 or down arrow key to move down one floor To edit a floor Press the key When you are on the desired floor you will see a blinking cursor e Keep pressing the key until you reach the desired field e Enter the value using the Yes No keys Usethe key to accept You will move to the next field If you are on the last field you will move back to the Car Lockouts screen e Use the key to abort change You will move back to the Car Lockouts screen To return to the Car Setup menu use the key 5 68 Manual 42 02 2T00 Main Menus Clock The controller contains a realtime clock that may be set from this screen e To move into the Clock Setup view screen use 8 or key To return to the previous menu use key To move between the Clock Setup view and
110. Contents Index _MCE Web Floor Table 5 2 Car Errors Display Table v6 26 Main Menus Overspeed The car overspeed the governor 110 speed switch Floor opened Pit Stop Switch Operated Pit stop switch operated Floor Plank Switch Operated Plank switch operated Floor Position Reset Position was reset Floor Primary Lock Lost The swing doors primary locks opened while the car Floor was moving or while the car was halted Primary Rear Lock Lost The swing doors rear primary locks opened while the Floor car was moving or while the car was halted Rear Close Limit Opened While Rear close limit opened while running Floor Running Relays Drop Error Relays failed to operate properly they did not drop Floor Relays Pick Error Relays failed to operate pick Floor Relevel Oscillation The car tried too many times to relevel at a floor from Floor both directions Reset A hardware reset has occurred Indicates that the car No parameter controller has been powered up Rope Gripper Tripped The rope gripper was tripped due to uncontrolled move Floor ment of the car Safety Edge Obstruction Safety edge input remains on 30 seconds after the car Floor went on nudging Safety Edge Rear Obstruction Safety edge rear input remains on 30 seconds after the Floor car went on nudging Safety Line Open The safety line opened Floor Safety Line Open in Flight
111. Controller Default Zero Speed H2 02 1 M5 M6 Not used by Controller Default Fref Out Agree H2 03 2 Analog Outputs The Yaskawa F7 Drive has 2 analog outputs that can be programmed to monitor a variety of drive functions These are not used by the Tricon controller and may be used for other monitor ing purposes See F7 Users Manual Index A 29 for a list of other output selections Table 3 9 Yaskawa F7 Drive Analog Outputs Terminals Default Function Parameter Setting FM AC Output Speed in FPM 0 10VDC or 10VDC H4 01 2 AM AC Output Current 0 10VDC or 10VDC H4 02 3 3 74 Manual 42 02 2T00 Yaskawa F7 Drive Scaling Car Speed to Motor This procedure has been completed at the factory In order to program car speed settings and drive readouts car speed is scaled to motor speed using parameters O1 03 and E1 04 adjusts range setting for all preset speeds This scaling was completed at the factory using survey information Verify that this information matches the specifications of the elevator Parameter 01 03 Display Scaling Display scaling has been fixed at Feet Per Minute and may not be changed to use other units The following is an explanation of the scaling process DO NOT make changes at this time The first digit defines the number of decimal places The next four define the speed in feet minute at maximum motor speed speed of motor elevator at 60Hz Default Set
112. D REFERENCE Car Balancing In order for the drive to perform properly the car must be properly balanced Geared cars are typically balanced with 40 50 of the cars rated capacity To confirm this L 2 aon FW 10 11 3 20 Manual 42 02 2T00 From the car top run the car on inspection to the center of the hoistway Stop the car so the crosshead on the counterweight is exactly adjacent to the crosshead on the car Place a chalk mark on the cables in the machine room and mark the hoist motor so that when the car is run from the machine room you will be able to tell when the car passes through the center of the hoistway Move the car to a convenient floor Place 40 of the cars rated capacity in the car On inspection run the car so it is about 10 feet above the center of the hoistway Place an Amprobe on one of the leads to the hoist motor While observing the display on the Amprobe run the car down on inspection operation through the center of the hoistway Write down the amperage displayed while the car passes by the chalk mark on the cables The value may vary slightly so average the value if necessary Place the car about 10 feet below the center of the hoistway While observing the display on the Amprobe run the car up through the center of the hoistway Write down the amperage displayed while the car passes by the chalk mark on the cables The value may vary slightly so average the value if necessary Ignoring whet
113. DZ level Drive is in down leveling within outer door zone not used 21 Down leveling in inner door zone 22 Up slowdown caused by speed limit 23 Up good limit slowdown Downl DZlevel UpLimit sldn UpGoodLimSld Drive is in down leveling within inner door zone Slowdown in up direction due to limit slow down while car position is correct Drive slowed down in up direction due to simultaneous position and limit slowdown inputs 24 Down slowdown caused by speed DnLimit Sldn Slow down in down direction due to limit slowdown while car position is correct limit 25 Down good limit DnGoodLimSld Drive slowed down in down direction due to slowdown simultaneous position and limit slowdown inputs 26 Stopping Stopping Drive is stopping 27 Up limit slow UP LIMIT ERR Up limit slowdown while car position is down error incorrect 28 Down limit slow DN LIMIT ERR Slowdown in down direction due to limit down error slowdown while car position is incorrect 13 Drive 0 Init 1 Disabled Disabled Drive is disabled 2 Sleep Sleep Drive is stopped and waiting 3 MG start MG start Start the MG 4 State 4 State 4 5 Stopped Stopped Drive is stopped 6 Field build Field build Build up increase motor field prior to run ning drive 7 Ready Ready to Run Fields are built up and drive is ready to run 8 Stopping up Stopping up Drive is stopping in up direction 9 Stopping down Stopping Dn Drive is sto
114. Default for V F L4 01 Spd Agree Level Speed Agreement Detection Level Hz 0 0 400 0 0 60 0 L4 01 E1 04 Flux Vector only L4 02 Spd Agree Width Speed Agreement Detection Width FV only Hz 0 0 20 0 2 0 5 0 8 0 Fault Restart L5 01 Num of Restarts Number of automatic restart attempts 0 10 1 1 L5 02 Restart Sel Automatic restart operation selection 0 1 1 1 0 No Fault Relay 1 Fault Relay Active Torque Detection L6 01 Torq Det 1 Sel Torque Detection Selection 1 0 8 0 0 0 Disabled 1 OL3 at Speed Agree Alarm 2 OL3 at Run Alarm 3 OL3 at Speed Agree Fault 4 OL3 at Run Fault 5 UL3 at Speed Agree Alarm 6 UL3 at Run Alarm 7 UL3 at Speed Agree Fault 8 UI3 at Run Fault L6 02 Torq Det 1 Lvl Torque Detection Level 1 0 300 150 150 L6 03 Torg Det 1 Time Torque Detection Time 1 sec 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 1 Torque Limits Flux Vector only L7 01 Torque Limits Set to Factory Defaults 0 300 200 200 thru Flux Vector only L7 04 Hardware Protection L8 01 DB Resistor Prot Protection Selection for Internal DB Resistor 0 1 0 0 0 Not Provided 1 Provided L8 05 Ph Loss In Sel Input Phase Loss Protection 0 1 1 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled L8 07 Ph Loss Out Sel Output Phase Loss Protection 0 1 1 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Ya skawa F7 Drive Monitor Select 01 01 User Moni
115. Ds DS17 through DS22 2 Press S2 repeatedly to move to the desired parameter See indications table above 3 Press S1 repeatedly to change the displayed value DS17 DS22 see examples Speed in FPM Sum of lighted LEDs Value of parameter Flags enabled gt 2 2 AAN gt 22 AANI DHaH AY D D ANH aaagaa a aaagaa a 20 40 80 160 320 ta 20 320 340 4 Press S3 to exit parameter mode oO On Function enabled When the limit board is in parameter mode the limit section is disabled and the safety circuit is opened Parameter mode times out after 5 minutes if no buttons are pressed After time out return to normal operation is indicated by LED DS25 which will stop blinking and light steadily Inspection Learn Before the car can be moved on Inspection you must perform an inspection learn operation so the limit board can learn and limit inspection speed to 150 of the learn inspection speed value The Inspection Learn may be completed before the slowdown limits are wired 1 Press and hold switch S3 for 5 seconds The board will enter learn mode LED DS25 will blink rapidly 8 times per second Diagnostic LEDs DS17 18 and 22 will light steadily 2 Move the car on Inspection in the up direction for 5 seconds When the car is stopped LED DS17 will go off and the Insp Mode LED DS24 will light 3 Move the car on inspection in the down direction for 5 seconds When the car is stopped the DS18 22 and 24 LEDs
116. EN ewes eae bA ia 3 109 ee Gin E A E E E EEE E E E E E A E E 3 109 Acceleration Deceleration Pots ssnnunnnesererere se norerrrreen 3 110 sehim L A a o N A E E EA E E ONE Gerkeeeeion 3 110 Dead Zone Pattern Ramp n nn anennunn nsr r rre in eneieedseeueabanns 3 110 Pinal Se Ar Aduse ss ds 0 bh OFA AE 649 04 E EA 3 110 iv Manual 42 02 2T00 E1 3 3 06 Section 4 Release to Normal Operation In this Section 6 94 6494 KOD KO 4 KOKO KOH TESTES REE NE SEDO ROR ERE RRS ROR 4 1 Limit Board Adjustment os lt 4co4 6466 44600540004 048800009 R008 e Rae E oR RS 4 2 Lra Board Sondo sited bo ee 4 oh dees IE EA EERE 4 3 a A Ere nc A E E E A E E S EO EEE TEE E EEE 4 4 Diagiosic and Mode LEDS sevis 06 404 t tanin PETINI 4d 4S RENE 4 5 Operation Inspection Setup Before High Speed 0 ccc cece cece ee eeee 4 7 Operation Normal Setup High Speed 4 oas6 64 ese si 45d0 0s seve eeeeereeneedes 4 7 Aan IT oc a 6s wink 88 RES ETA RGS ENE EREN G5 AAAS RS ESSER EES 4 8 2K Limy Gripper Doai ee eec eked eed cteeeernesees ERRE EERE EEEE E ER E ESAS E 4 9 Parameter EDY rs iar itGraniw cw Reha bieeaws aes DRES ITRE R ER REEE 4 13 Eotoning Poroa S osier niran EAI ENAREN 4 14 Inspection Leam cessc t ean tated bids dows Esd kkE U ia PRES TURR kE EREA 4 14 aie a AE a E Sees EI E E N E E A NEEE 4 15 Operatng BMG secc resnrrs todhair AANA A rRNR RIAVERE AURELA 4 16 La Pa PSA eera EEEE EEE TEE EE E EE ERI DERE 4 16 Rope Gripper Functionality s
117. Firs 5 Drive failure DRIVE FAIL Drive failure 6 Car out of service OUT OF SERV The car cannot respond to calls 7 Low oil LOW OIL The car tried to run up and it could not Applies only to hydraulic elevators 8 State 8 STATE 8 9 Overload OVERL RESC The overload popped or in hydros the res rescuvator cuvator is feeding the car power 10 LU sensor failure LU FAILURE The LU sensor is stuck on 11 LD sensor failure LD FAILURE The LD sensor is stuck on 12 DZ sensor failure DZ FAILURE The DZ sensor is stuck on 8 Direction 0 Init 1 No direction No direction Car has no direction preference 2 No direction CC CC Pref Car has closed doors and no direction pref preference erence 3 Up direction Up Car has an up direction preference 4 Up Direction go Up go Car is committed to start in up direction 5 Up start Up start Car is starting up 6 Up run Running up Car is running up 7 Up slowdown up Up sldn up Car is moving up in slowdown for an up call 8 Up slowdown Up sidn none Car is moving up in slowdown with no direc none tion preference 9 Up slowdown Up sidn dn Car is moving up in slowdown with a down down direction preference 10 Down direction Down Car has a down direction preference 11 Down direction Down go Car is committed to travel down go 12 Down start Down start Car is starting in down direction 13 Down run Running down Car is moving down 14 Down slowdown _ Dn sldn down Car is moving down in slowdown with a down direction preference
118. L OSC 8 State 8 STATE 8 5 18 Manual 42 02 2T00 Car Errors Main Menus This screen shows the last 50 errors that occurred on the controller The first error listed Error number 1 is the last error that occurred on the controller As a new error occurs the oldest error drops off the list if there are over 50 errors Following is a list of possible errors Note that errors may occur in any order Order is dictated by error and time Errors that occur only on NYCHA controllers are marked with an asterisk Table 5 2 Car Errors Display Table v6 26 ERROR NAME HELP PARAMETER Between Floors Car stopped in between floors Floor Bottom Final Limit Operated Bottom final limit operated Floor Brake Drop Error Brake proving contact did not close when controller Floor dropped the brake Brake Lift Error Brake proving contact did not open when controller lifted Floor the brake Cannot Close Door Door operator cannot fully close the door Floor Cannot Close Rear Door Cannot close rear door Floor Cannot Drop Cam The cam did not drop at the indicated floor Floor Cannot Lock Gate The door operator cannot lock the door because the gate Floor contact does not close Cannot Lock GL The door operator cannot lock the door because the GL input is Floor off Cannot Lock Lock The door operator cannot lock the door because the lock con Floor t
119. LL card DHALL2 card DHALLS card To move between the sub menus use Aor left arrow key to move left e 6 or right arrow key to move right To move into the desired Input amp Output sub menu I O boards view screens use e 8 or key To return to the previous menu use key This screen allows realtime observation of all I O 24 board inputs and outputs If the screen below the desired I O board is blank the board is not available or is not communicating If the board is operating properly all 24 inputs and 24 outputs will be displayed at once inputs on the left side and outputs on the right When an input is turned ON voltage at the pin it will show asa 1 An output turned ON voltage at the pin will show as an 0 Toretum to the Input amp Output menu use the key You will need to do this to view other I O boards 5 80 Manual 42 02 2T00 Main Menus Clock Figure 5 19 Dispatcher Clock Set Screen The dispatcher contains a realtime clock that may be set from this screen To move into the Clock Setup view screen use 8 or key To return to the previous menu use key To move between the Clock Setup view and edit screen use key To return to the previous menu use key To edit e To reach the desired field 6 or right arrow key to move right one field 4 or left arrow key 5 to move left one field e When you reach the desired field 2 or up arrow to increase one incremen
120. M SPEED REG MAND RLS Log Out 3 tb1 16 Terminal 16 Selection MTR OVER NO FUNC LOAD TION Log Out 4 tb1 17 Terminal 17 Selection ENCODER NO FUNC FAULT TION Relay Coil 1 Relay 1 Function Selection FAULT READY TO RUN Relay Coil 2 Relay 2 Function Selection SPEED REG SPEED REG RLS RLS C4 Analog Outputs Ana Out 1 tb1 33 Terminal 33 Selection SPEED CMD TORQUE REF Ana Out 2 tb1 35 Terminal 35 Selection SPEED SPEED FEEDBK FEEDBK Utility UO U1 Password Password 000000 000000 Hidden Items Enable or disable hidden parameters ENABLE ENABLE U2 Enable Disable Unit Unit for parameters ENGLISH ENGLISH U3 English Metric u4 Overspeed Test Allow overspeed test during inspection No No Yes No u5 Restore Dflts Reset all parameters to defaults Drive Info Drive information Drive Version U6 Boot Version Cube ID Drive Type u7 HEX Monitor Hex Monitor 3 60 Manual 42 02 2T00 Magnetek HPV 900 AC Vector Drive Figure 3 1 HPV 900 Parameter Menu Trees Drive Faults If a fault occurs in the drive the Fault LED on the front panel will light To access drive faults using the hand held programmer go to the FAULTS FO menu This menu has two sub menus ACTIVE FAULTS F1and FAULT HISTORY F2 Use the arrow keys to access the desired menu If the drive is faulted ACTIVE FAULTS will display the present fault FAULT HIS TORY will display faults that occurred previously The following is a list of detect
121. MLT SPD to DLY1 Assigns multi step speed command None None None to recognition delay timer 1 mspd1 mspd15 MLT SPD to DLY2 Assigns multi step speed command None None None to recognition delay timer 2 mspd1 mspd15 MLT SPD to DLY3 Assigns multi step speed command None None None to recognition delay timer 3 mspd1 mspd15 MLT SPD to DLY4 Assigns multi step speed command None None None to recognition delay timer 4 mspd1 mspd15 C2 Logic I nputs Log In 1 TB1 16 Logic input 1 DRIVE DRIVE ENABLE ENABLE Log In 2 TB1 17 Logic input 2 RUN CONTACT CONFIRM Log In 3 TB1 18 Logic input 3 FAULT FAULT RESET RESET Log In 4 TB1 19 Logic input 4 UP DN STEP REF BO Log In 5 TB1 20 Logic input 5 S Curve STEP REF B1 Sel 0 Log In 6 TB1 21 Logic input 6 STEP REF STEP REF B2 BO Log In 7 TB1 22 Logic input 7 STEP REF STEP REF B3 Bl Log In 8 TB1 23 Logic input 8 STEP REF RUN DoWN B2 Log In 9 TB1 24 Logic input 9 External RUN UP Fault 1 Contents __ Index _MCE Web 3 15 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Table 3 1 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Open Loop Me C3 Logic Outputs Log Out 1 tb1 9 Logic Output 1 Ready To SPEED REG Run RLS Log Out 2 tb1 10 Logic Output 2 Run Com NO FUNCTION mand Log Out 3 tb1 11 Logic Output 3 MTR NO FUNCTION OVER LOAD Log Out 4 tb1 12 Logic Output 4 READ
122. Mee Motion Control Engineering Inc 11380 White Rock Road Rancho Cordova CA 95742 voice 916 463 9200 fax 916 463 9201 www mceinc com Tricon Controller Installation amp Adjustment Magnetek HPV 600 Drive Magnetek HPV 900 Drive Yaskawa F7 Drive Mitsubishi A500 Drive Magnetek DSD 412 DC Drive V2 6 Software Manual 42 02 2T00 Rev E1 February 2006 Copyright 2006 Motion Control Engineering All Rights Reserved This document may not be reproduced electronically or mechanically in whole or in part without written permission from Motion Control Engineering Trademarks All trademarks or registered product names appearing in this document are the exclusive property of the respective owners Warning and Disclaimer Although every effort has been made to make this document as complete and accurate as possible Motion Control Engineering and the document authors publishers distributors and representatives have neither liability nor responsibility for any loss or damage arising from information contained in this document or from informational errors or omissions Information contained in this document shall not be deemed to constitute a commitment to provide service equipment or software by Motion Control Engineering or the document authors publishers distributors or representatives Limited Warranty Motion Control Engineering manufacturer warrants its products for a period of 15 months from the date of
123. None None is used and if used determines source Analog input of pre torque command Serial Pre Torque Latch Chooses if analog pre torque com Not latched Not Not latched mand is latched Latched latched Pretorque Latch Determines source of pre torque latch External TB External External TB Clock control if used Serial TB Fault Reset Src Fault reset source External TB External External TB Serial TB Automatic Overspd Test Src Determines external logic source to External TB External External TB trigger overspeed test Serial TB Brake Pick Src If drive controls mechanical brake Internal Internal Internal determines source of brake pick com Serial mand Brake Pick Cnfrm Determines if a logic input is used for None None None brake pick confirm External TB Brake Hold Src If drive controls mechanical brake Internal Internal Internal determines source of brake hold com Serial mand Ramped Stop Sel Chooses between normal stop and None None None torque ramp down stop Ramp on stop Ramp Down En Src Determines source that signals torque External TB External External TB ramp down stop if used Run logic TB Serial Brk Pick Flt Ena Brake pick fault enable Enable Disable Disable Disable Brk Hold Flt Ena Brake hold fault enable Enable Disable Disable Disable Ext Torq Cmd Src When Speed Reg Type External None None None Reg sets source of torque command Serial Dir Confirm Confirms proper analog signal polarity Enable
124. O type Terminal Board 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 If the value associated with an output is entered ONLY that output will be active If any other value from 1 to 255 is entered outputs that together add up to that value will be active For example an entry of 27 would enable outputs 16 8 2 and 1 Ifa hall lantern gong is indicated at a location an output is assigned to it by software Next available output not used by position indicator or directional arrow The three 3 groups of eight 8 outputs of the position indicators can be programmed to 5 any output combination at any floor If you are enabling only a single position indicator output in each group output per lamp floor and you have more than eight floors you may program a second group to drive position indicators for the next eight floors If this is the case set one position indica tor group for floors 1 to 8 and the other position indicator group for floors 9 to 16 To select the desired floor e 2 or up arrow key to move up one floor 8 or down arrow key to move down one floor To edit a floor Press the key when you are on the desired floor You will see a blinking cursor e Keep pressing the key until you reach the desired field Enter the value using the numbers on the keypad or the Yes No keys e Press the key to accept You will move to the next field If you are on the last field you will move back to the Floor Setup screen e Pres
125. PS PW5 EXT 1 board Hall board RB Relay board Limit board or 2K Limit Rope Gripper board Brake control AC Drive Motor contactor 1 3 Tricon General I nformation A eE Controller Circuit Boards The circuit board types used in a controller may be different from job to job Typically the fol lowing board types are used 5V 6A Power Supply Provides 5 volt DC power for digital integrated circuits throughout the controller e CPU The Central Processing Unit fitted with the appropriate software performs control data processing The same board fitted with different software is used in group dispatch applications PW5 Major system components communicate through a high speed serial link The PW5 board provides a point of connection for eight communicating components One of the connection points is always used by the system CPU the other seven are available for other system connections I O 24 Board Depending upon the software installed in them I O 24 boards may be used as Car Controller boards Hall I O boards or Dispatch boards In all cases the functional ity of the I O 24 board can be expanded by plugging in from one to three expansion boards Left to right viewed from the front the three expansion board locations are A B and C When used as a Car Controller the I O 24 board may have an Access board plugged into its C position When used as a Hall board up to three Terminal boards may b
126. Peelle X18 Fire car OFF OFF CO 26 C3 1 to C3 2 Peelle D03 D05 inspection INS CO 18 C2 1 to C2 2 Peelle D06 D08 auto close disable ACH CO 28 C3 3 to C3 4 Peelle D06 D07 auto close ACO CO 20 C2 3 to C2 4 Peelle DO1 D012 hall PB cutout FHB CO 30 C3 5 to C3 6 Peelle D060 D070 inspection rear C line RINS CO 22 C2 5 to C2 6 Peelle DO60 D050 Auto close Disable rear C line RACH CO 32 C3 7 to C3 8 Peelle DO60 D080 Auto close rear C line RACO CO 24 C2 7 to C2 8 Peelle DO10 D022 hall PB cutout rear C line RFHB 5 37 The Hand Held Unit Car Setup Menu The Car Setup menu includes e Parameters Floor Table e Group Assignments e Car Soft Lockouts Position Indicator e PI Board Setup CE Indicator Setup e BMS Setup e Car Lockouts Setup e Clock e Reset Errors Parameters The following table provides a list of editable parameters the value range across which they may be set the factory default value and a supporting description Table 5 18 Car Setup Parameters Screen Me mum time bares Hand Held Display bse Rae Units Help 1 Door Nudging mode 0 5 0 enum 0 No nudging 0 disabled 1 Buzzer only 1 5 see manual 2 Buzz EE bypass 3 Buzz EE bypass SE stops door 4 Buzz EE bypass low pressure close 5 Buzz EE bypass low pressure close SE stops This variable sets one of five modes of oper ation Off keep closing stop doors but not reopen or reopen
127. Press enter to save 12 Access parameter 52 Enter the full field voltage in volts Press enter to save 13 Access parameter 53 Enter the standing field current in amps This value is typically half of the full field value from parameter 50 Press enter to save 14 Access parameter 56 If the motor uses field weakening enter a value of 90 If field weakening is not used enter a value of 130 Press enter to save 15 Access parameter 57 If the motor uses field weakening enter a value of 70 If field weakening is not used enter a value of 130 Press enter to save 16 Access parameter 82 Enter a value of 1 0 Press enter to save 17 Access parameter 87 Enter a value of 1 0 Press enter to save 18 Access parameter 97 Enter a value of 1 0 Press enter to save 19 Access parameter 98 Enter a value of 1 0 Press enter to save 20 The programmed values must now be saved to the drive non volatile RAM Access parameter 994 Press the DATA FCTN key The display will read rESt Press the up arrow The display will change to SAVE 21 On the upper right hand side of the drive you will find a small slide switch This switch is the NVRAM Protect switch S3 Flip this switch to the up position The red LED NV RAM NOT PROTECTED will illuminate 22 Press the ENTER key on the drive The display should now read 994 23 Flip the NVRAM Protect switch back to the down position The values are now saved
128. RK OUT 0 A2 parameters for a smooth approach to the floor with 1 to 2 inches of sustained leveling If there is not enough sustained leveling the car may overshoot intermittently and relevel 3 42 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 600 9 Modify the ACCEL J ERK OUT 0 A2 rate to the same value that was entered into the DECEL J ERK IN 0 A2 parameter 10 If the rated speed of the car is greater than 200 feet per minute make a one floor run Observe the approach into the floor If the approach is longer than the multi floor runs increase the SPEED COMMAND 4 A3 parameter until the approach on a one floor run is the same as the multi floor run If the approach is quicker decrease the SPEED COMMAND 4 A3 parameter until the approach on a one floor run is the same as the multi floor run 11 The speed curve parameters have been set up Ride the car and observe acceleration deceleration and jerk rates If any rate seems too sharp make that value smaller Note that changing values in the deceleration profile will result in a different approach into the floor You may need to modify other deceleration parameters to get the desired ride 12 Observe floor stops Make multi floor runs and one floor runs into a floor at the center of the hoistway If the car is stopping short of the floor too high in the down and too low in the up increase the SPEED COMMAND 1 A3 parameter This will result in faster level
129. Technical Support before proceeding Confirm that the three leads from the controller to the motor are connected If there are more than three motor leads make sure the motor is wired in a wye configuration with correct field rotation or follow the motor manufacturer recommendations e Locate the test sheets shipped with the controller These sheets list the drive parameters calculated for your installation HPV 600 Drive Parameters Open Loop The following procedures describe adjusting the HPV 600 drive with optional open loop soft ware This software allows the drive to operate without an encoder If the drive you are working on has an encoder please refer to the closed loop instructions for this drive Please refer to HPV 600 AC Drive Start Up Closed Loop on page 3 26 Before attempting to run the drive confirm that parameters are correctly set Verify that the parameters in the drive match those on the Test sheets For detailed information on using the drive programming unit please refer to the Magnetek HPV 600 manual Using the HPV600 Drive Programmer The HPV 600 programmer is used to pro gram the drive and to display drive data The programmer has three menu levels e Menu level e Sub menu level e Entry level There are five keys on the front of the programmer These keys perform different functions depending on which menu level is active At the Main Menu level the left and right arrows move the programmer be
130. Tricon emergency power provides for the following types of emergency power operations The desired operation requires setting car and dispatcher parameters and operation of the car select inputs to the dispatcher In the description that follows emergency power operation is described as Phase I and Phase 2 operation Phase is recalling the cars to the recall floor Phase 2 is operating the car from the car station while on emergency power Operation Modes e 1 Automatic sequential phase 1 recall with automatic phase 2 car selection e 2 Automatic sequential phase 1 recall with manual phase 2 car selection e 3 Manual phase I recall with manual phase 2 car selection All the operations above allow the car selection switches to override automatic operation and select the car manually for phase 1 recall or phase 2 operation The dispatcher provides pre transfer operation when changing to and from normal power When the pre transfer input is activated all running cars will stop at the next available floor and wait for transfer of emergency power to normal power This input should be active at least fifteen seconds before the emergency power is transferred to normal power All power transfers should allow a complete power down of the equipment before the new power source is switched on All cars and the dispatcher should have power provided at the same time Software Required The controller provides emergency power when used with a dispatcher and ver
131. Unit CAR DIAGNOSTICS STATES INSPECTION This will allow you to operate the car via the car controller inspection buttons on the car control board when necessary Please refer to Overview on page 5 2 Contents __Index__ _MCE Web 3 3 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A ek Magnetek HPV 600 This section describes e Start Up Procedures Open Loop e High Speed Adjustment Open Loop e Start Up Procedures Closed Loop e High Speed Adjustment Closed Loop e Adaptive Tuning Brake Adjustment HPV 600 AC Drive Start Up Open Loop To obtain optimal ride quality and performance the drive must be tuned to the motor Tuning requires you to be familiar with the drive and AC motors If you are unfamiliar with drives of this type please contact MCE Engineering for assistance Refer to the Magnetek HPV 600 Elevator Drive Technical Manual for detailed explanation of drive features The HPV 600 drive is fully digital with configurable inputs outputs and modes of operation This section describes configuring the HPV 600 for the Tricon controller Due to the complexity of drive systems it is not possible to cover all potential problems or possibilities If you encounter difficulties please contact MCE Technical Support Use the Magnetek manual as a reference Follow the start up and adjusting procedures from this manual not the procedures from the Magnetek manual Before the controller and drive were shipped the entire system was t
132. Y TO NO FUNCTION RUN Relay Coil 1 Relay 1 Function Selection FAULT READY TO RUN Relay Coil 2 Relay 2 Function Selection SPEED SPEED REG REG RLS RLS C4 Analog Outputs Analog Out 1 Analog Output 1 TORQUE TORQUE REF REF Analog Out 2 Analog Output 2 SPEED SPEED FEEDBK FEEDBK Utility UO U1 Password Password 000000 000000 U2 Hidden I tems Enable or disable hidden parameters ENABLE ENABLE Enable Disable U3 Unit Unit for parameters ENGLISH ENGLISH English Metric U4 Overspeed Test Allows overspeed test during inspec No No tion Yes No U5 Restore Dflts Reset all parameters to default val ues U6 Drive I nfo Drive information Drive Version BootVersion Boot Version and Cube ID Drive CubelD U7 HEX Monitor Hex Monitor z U8 Language Sel Selects Language for operator text English English English deutsch U9 BASI CS Operation Selects Open Loop or Closed Loop Open Loop Open Loop drive Operation Closed Loop 3 16 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index__ _MCE Web A Danger Magnetek HPV 600 Do not change drive parameters while elevator is running Incorrect values can cause erratic elevator operation HPV 600 Drive Faults Open Loop If a drive fault occurs the Fault LED on the front panel will light To access drive faults using the hand held programmer go to the FAULTS FO menu This menu has two sub menus ACTIVE FAULTS F1and FAULT HISTORY F2 Use the arrow keys to ac
133. _Contents __ Index _MCE Web 3 47 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A ek Magnetek HPV 900 AC Vector Drive This section describes HPV 900 Startup e HPV 900 High Speed Adjustment HPV 900 Adaptive Tuning e Brake Adjustment HPV 900 Startup The Magnetek HPV 900 is an AC Vector drive In order to obtain optimal ride quality and per formance the drive must be tuned to the motor The tuning process requires that you be famil iar with the drive and AC motors If you have never worked on this drive or another AC Vector drive please contact Motion Control Engineering for assistance Refer to the Magnetek HPV 900 Vector Elevator Drive Technical Manual for detailed explana tion of drive features The HPV 900 is fully digital with configurable inputs outputs and modes of operation This procedure describes configuring the HPV 900 for the Tricon controller Due to the complexity of drive systems it is not possible to cover all potential problems or possibili ties If you encounter any difficulties please contact Engineering Use the Magnetek manual as a reference but follow the start up and adjusting procedures described here Before the controller and drive were shipped the entire system was tested at the factory All drive parameters were preset based on information provided in the controller order form The drive should run on inspection operation with very little effort If not verify that the informa tion given to MCE w
134. _Index_ _MCE Web General Wiring Instructions Mounting the Speed Sensor When mounting the speed sensor do not over tighten the mounting nuts Position the face of the sensor so there is 1 16 to 1 8 1 6 3 18mm clearance between the face of the sensor and the magnet assembly The speed sensor must be electrically isolated from the motor body The sensor is provided with the proper mounting hardware Figure 1 9 Speed Sensor Mounting side view Sensor housing N Magne Assy The slot in the housing allows the sensor to magnet distance to be adjusted Figure 1 10 Speed Sensor Mounting top view If the motor bolt is 1 2 inch a spacer large locknut washer is used in the mounting hole to keep the mounting bracket centered spacer included Various size spacers are provided so you can center the sensor over HT the magnet _Contents __ Index _MCE Web 1 19 Tricon General I nformation A ek Low Voltage Signal Wiring Low voltage signal wiring includes all the 24 volt inputs These include car calls door limits electric eyes etc The inputs on the I O boards only need to see 12 volts or more to turn on If the signal wires are run along side the 240 VDC door operator wiring a 12 volt spike is very likely to occur Keep low level signal wiring at least 4 inches from high power wiring to avoid false signal firing If this is not possible and the low level wiring must cross the high p
135. a given speed can be precisely calculated using the following formula Desired Speed x 10 Reference Voltage Contract Speed FPM Speed Pot Adjustable of full speed Voltage output SP1 0 15 0 1 5VDC SP2 0 25 0 2 5VDC SP3 SP5 0 100 0 10 0VDC HI Fixed 10 0VDC Contents __ Index _MCE Web 3 109 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A ek The system control uses the following speeds Speed Function Normal Setting SP1 Leveling 4 8FPM 25VDC SP2 Approach Inspection 20 30FPM LOVDC SP4 One floor run or contract speed 200FPM or less 5 0 or 10VDC HI Multi floor run contract speed gt 200FPM 10VDC Acceleration Deceleration Pots The speed board has two acceleration rates and three deceleration rates available Tricon uses accel 1 and decel1 The range for the accel1 and decel1is 10 seconds with the potentiometer fully counterclockwise slow accel and slow decel to one second with the potentiometer fully clock wise fast accel and fast decel S Curve Knee Pots The S shape of the output is controlled by Knee pots P1 P4 When the pots are turned full counter clockwise the curve will be very smooth When the pots are turned full clockwise the curve will be very sharp These adjustments will have more effect when acceleration or deceler ation rates are slow and will have less effect when the rates are fast Pot Function P1 Accel start P2 Accel end P3 Decel start P4 Decel end Dead Zone Pattern Ramp The R54 po
136. ach It should be running at contract speed 5 If not adjust CONTRACT MTR SPEED A1 to obtain the cor rect speed Observe deceleration as the car approaches the floor The car should decelerate rapidly and there should be two noticeable steps of speed prior to stopping at the floor If there are not confirm that the tape reader is properly installed and the slowdown magnets are placed the correct distance from the floor Change DECEL RATE 0 A2 to 3 5 ft 2 This will yield a slower rate of deceleration and less approach distance to the floor Again run the car and observe the approach into the floor If the car still has too much slow down distance decrease DECEL RATE 0 A2 to 0 1 ft s less than the present rate Repeat until the car is coming into the floor with about 3 to 6 inches of approach Modify DECEL J ERK IN 0 and DECEL J ERK OUT 0 to get a smooth approach into the floor with 1 to 2 inches of sustained leveling If there is not enough sustained level ing the car may overshoot intermittently and cause releveling Modify the ACCEL J ERK OUT 0 rate to the same value entered into the DECEL JERK IN 0 parameter If the rated speed of the car is greater than 200 feet per minute make a one floor run Observe the approach into the floor on single floor runs If the approach is longer than the multi floor runs increase the SPEED COMMAND 4 A3 parameter until the approach on a one floor run is the same as the multi floor run If the
137. acts do not close Cannot Lock Rear Gate The door operator cannot lock the rear door because the Floor gate contact does not close Cannot Lock Rear GL The door operator cannot lock the rear door because the GL Floor input is off Cannot Lock Rear Lock The door operator cannot lock the rear door because the lock Floor contacts do not close Cannot Open Door The car was unable to open the front door Floor Cannot Open or Close Door Door cannot open or close Floor Cannot Open Rear Door Cannot open the rear door Floor Car Call Ack Indicators Fuse Car call ack indicators fuse is open Floor Car Call Buttons Fuse Car call buttons fuse is open Floor Car Set to Fire Ph 1 Car was set to fire phase 1 Floor Car Set to Fire Ph 2 Car was set to fire phase 2 Floor Car Set to Independent Service Car was set to independent service Floor Car Set to Inspection Car was set to inspection Floor Car Stop Switch Is Open The car stop switch is open Floor Close Limit Opened While Running Close limit opened while running Floor Comp Sheave Switch Operated Comp Sheave switch operated Floor Controller Stop Switch Is Open Controller stop switch is open Floor Door Overload Tripped Door Overload Tripped Floor Down Leveling Timeout Timed out while leveling in the down direction Floor Down Limit Slowdown Slowdown initiated by the limits in the down direction Floor Down Normal Terminal Down normal terminal stopped the car Floor Down Releveling Timeout Ti
138. ad Selection Alarm Alarm FLT Imme Flt Immediate diate Fault at Stop Auto Stop Auto Stop Function enable Disable Disable Disable Enable Serial Mode Serial Protocol selection None Mode 1 None Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 2 test SER2 FLT Mode Defines reaction to a serial communication immediate Immediate immediate fault while in Serial Mode 2 Only serial Run mode 2 remove rescue DRV Fast Disable Addresses how fast drive responds to Disable Disable Disable removal of Drive Enable logic input Enable MLT SPD to DLY1 Assigns multi step speed command to rec None None None ognition delay timer 1 mspd1 mspd15 MLT SPD to DLY2 Assigns multi step speed command to rec None None None ognition delay timer 2 mspd1 mspd15 MLT SPD to DLY3 Assigns multi step speed command to rec None None None ognition delay timer 3 mspd1 mspd15 MLT SPD to DLY4 Assigns multi step speed command to rec None None None ognition delay timer 4 mspd1 mspd15 C2 Logic Inputs Log In 1 TB1 16 Logic input 1 DRIVE DRIVE ENABLE ENABLE Log In 2 TB1 17 Logic input 2 RUN CONTACT CONFIRM Log In 3 TB1 18 Logic input 3 z FAULT FAULT RESET RESET Log In 4 TB1 19 Logic input 4 UP DN STEP REF BO Log In 5 TB1 20 Logic input 5 S Curve STEP REF Sel 0 B1 Contents __Index__ _MCE Web Table 3 3 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Closed Loop Magnetek HPV 600
139. ain Anti rollback gain 1 99 1 1 Notch Filter Frq Notch Filter Center Frequency Hz 5 60 20 20 Notch Filt Depth Notch filter maximum attenuation 0 100 0 0 MSPD Delay 1 4 Determines recognition time delay sec 0 00 10 0 10 00 0 00 for a defined multistep speed com mand A2 S Curves Accel Rate 0 Acceleration rate 0 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 3 50 Decel Rate 0 Deceleration rate 0 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 4 00 Accel Jerk in 0 Rate of increase of acceleration up ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 5 0 to ACCEL Rate when increasing ele vator speed Accel Jerk out 0 Rate of decrease of acceleration to ftjs3 0 8 0 8 0 5 0 zero when approaching contract ele vator speed Decel Jerk in O Rate of increase of deceleration up ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 5 0 to Decel Rate when decreasing ele vator speed Decel Jerk out 0 Rate of decrease of deceleration to ftjs3_ 0 8 0 8 0 5 0 zero when slowing the elevator to leveling speed Accel Rate 1 Acceleration rate 1 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Decel Rate 1 Deceleration rate 1 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Accel Jerk in 1 Rate of increase of acceleration up ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 to ACCEL Rate when increasing ele vator speed Accel Jerk out 1 Rate of decrease of acceleration to ftjs3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 zero when approaching contract ele vator speed Decel Jerk in 1 Rate of increase of deceleration up ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 to Decel Rate when decreasing ele vator speed Decel Jerk out 1 Rate of decrease of deceleration to ftjs3_ 0
140. all drive parameters Cycle power to the drive If fault recurs go to the Utility menu and select Restore Defaults If fault persists replace Control board Note The Restore Defaults selection will require all drive parameters to be set to their correct values Mtr Overload Motor has exceeded the motor overload curve Verify correct balancing of car Check for dragging brake or mechanical bind in machine or hoistway Verify correct setting of OVLD START LEVEL A1 and OVLD TIME OUT A1 parameters Check for bad motor Overcurr Fault Overspeed Fault Overtemp Fault Phase current exceeded 250 of rated current Motor speed exceeded user entered parame ters The heatsink tempera ture is too high Contents __index _MCE Web Verify car is balanced correctly Verify proper motor and drive sizing Check for possible bad motor or motor connection Check for bad main contactor contacts Check for mechanical bind in car or machine Check parameters OVERSPEED LEVEL A1 and OVERSPEED TI ME A1 If OK check tracking of motor to desired speed and tune regulator for better performance Drive heatsink temperature has exceeded 1059C 2212F Check fans on drive make sure airflow is adequate 3 39 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Me Table 3 4 HPV 600 Drive Faults Closed Loop Overvolt Fault The DC Bus voltage is too high Voltage on the DC Bus exceeded 850 volts on a 460 volt drive
141. ameters Magnetek DSD 412 DC Drive P Parameter Description Unit Range Default ace 1 Current Limit Sets drive current limit as a percentage of 0 300 250 275 rated armature amps parameter 3 2 User Self Tune Selects self tune variables measured values ON OFF OFF OFF 3 Rated Arm Amp _ Motor rated current Amp 10 1250 50 4 Armature Ohms Total armature circuit resistance not includ Ohm 0 001 0 1 0 450 ing brush drop 5 0 6 Armature Induc Value of motor armature circuit inductance MHNY 0 001 1 0 0 01 0043 tance 7 Rated Arm V Rated motor name plate armature voltage Volts 150 550 240 Note 1 fe 8 Reg Crossover Sets current regulator bandwidth Response RAD 100 500 500 will increase as this number increases At 1000 higher values motor current will fluctuate At lower value motor will become sluggish 9 Nominal AC Volt Nominal AC voltage applied to SCR drive V 150 525 230 age Note 1 measured at drive terminals L1 L2 amp L3 fe 10 Encoder Pulses Encoder pulses per revolution from encoder PPR 600 4096 Rev Note 4 nameplate 19 999 J j__ 11 Motor RPM Motor nameplate RPM In general motor RPM 50 2000 1150 T nameplate value but may require higher or lower value to run car at correct speed For a direct coupled encoder on a geared applica J fii tion also sets encoder shaft RPM 12 Overspeed Sets UP DN ov
142. ameters are shaded E1 01 Input Voltage Input Voltage Setting 180 460 230 460 E1 02 Motor Selection Motor selection 0 Fan Coded 1 Blower Coded 0 1 0 0 E1 03 V F Selection V F Pattern Selection N A to Flux Vector 50Hz 60Hz Saturation 50Hz Saturation 72Hz 60 Hz Base 50Hz Variable Torque 1 50Hz Variable Torque 2 60Hz Variable Torque 1 60Hz Variable Torque 2 50Hz High Starting Torque 1 50Hz High Starting Torque 2 60Hz High Starting Torque 1 60Hz High Starting Torque 2 90Hz 60 Hz Base 120Hz 60 Hz Base 180Hz 60 Hz Base Custom V F FF Custom w o limit 7TMOADEPODNDUBWNEO 0 F F F E1 04 Max Frequency Maximum Output Frequency Hz 40 0 80 0 60 0 E1 05 Max Voltage Maximum Output Voltage Motor Voltage 0 0 460 0 230 460 E1 06 Base Frequency Maximum voltage output frequency Hz 0 0 72 0 60 0 E1 07 Mid Frequency A Mid Output Frequency A N A to Flux Vector Hz 0 0 72 0 3 0 E1 08 Mid Voltage A Mid Output Voltage N A to Flux Vector 0 0 255 0 16 1 32 2 E1 09 Min Frequency Minimum Output Frequency N A to Flux Vector Hz 0 0 72 0 0 5 E1 10 Min Voltage Minimum Output Voltage N A to Flux Vector of x ul x x O 0 0 255 0 10 0 20 0 3 81 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A exe
143. ant Operation e Emergency Power Operation e Code Blue Operation 6 1 Operations ek Inspection Operation Inspection priorities are Top of car e Access e Controller In inspection a car will move at slow speed by manual operation of up and down buttons The car will stop as soon as the buttons are released A Danger Changing settings of parameters 76 and 85 will allow the drive to remain energized after the buttons have been released Make sure 76 and 85 are set to 0 zero when the car is released to normal service Controller Inspection In this mode the car is operated by pushing the control ler UP or DOWN inspection buttons A car running in either direction will automatically stop when it reaches the normal terminal switch in that direction Pressing and holding both UP and DOWN buttons at the same time will open the doors if the car is stopped at a door zone Car Top Inspection In this mode the car is operated by pushing the cartop UP or DOWN and SAFETY buttons Doors will open if both UP and DOWN buttons are pressed for more than two seconds while the car is in a door zone Access I nspection To initiate access the car must be on in car inspection In access mode the car moves when a top bottom access switch is moved to the up down direction If the top access limit is open the car will not move down with the top access switch If the bottom access limit is open the car will not move up with the botto
144. approach is quicker decrease the SPEED COMMAND 4 A3 parameter until the approach on a one floor run is the same as the multi floor run The speed curve parameters have been set Ride the car and observe acceleration decel eration and jerk rates If any rate seems too sharp make that value smaller Note that changing values in the deceleration profile will result in a different approach into the floor You may need to modify other deceleration parameters to get the desired ride 3 22 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 600 12 Observe floor stops Make multi floor runs and one floor runs into a floor at the center of the hoistway If the car is stopping short of the floor too high in the down and too low in the up increase the SPEED COMMAND 1A3 parameter This will result in faster leveling speed and cause the car to travel farther before stopping 13 If the car is stopping past the floor too high in the up and too lowin the down decrease the SPEED COMMAND 1A3 parameter This will result in slower leveling speed and cause the car to travel a shorter distance before stopping If you are unable to achieve consistent floor stops by modifying leveling speed the brake may not be adjusted properly Confirm that all brake voltages are set correctly and that the resis tance around the brake coil is connected properly The resistance can be changed to control brake set rate Less resistance causes a slower dro
145. ar reaches the bottom landing DSL Down Slow Down Input from the last down slowdown to open before the car reaches the bottom landing The terminal hoistway slowdown switches must be set to open at the same time the normal selector slowdown magnet comes on The high speed slowdowns HUSL and HDSL are used for contract speeds greater than 200 FPM DZBP Door Zone Bypass Input indicates that the door locks are being bypassed When this input is on car speed should not exceed 125 FPM after the high speed learn trip has been performed UP Indicates that the car is to move in the up direction DN Indicates that the car is to move in the down direction MS Indicates that the car is to move at medium speed one floor run speed if HS is used or contract speed if the car contract speed is equal to or less than 200 FPM HS Indicates that the car is to move at high speed multi floor run speed GMON2 Not currently used e GMON1 Monitors the rope gripper relay If the input drops off while the rope gripper out put is on or if the input turns on when the board is not detecting a fault condition the rope gripper will trip and a gripper relay contact failure fault will be annunciated e GMON There is no external connection to this input It is used internally to monitor the gripper relays during the gripper relay sequence test Contents Index _MCE Web 4 9 Release to Normal Operation Me e GOV Monitors the
146. arameter 89 defines the gain of the vector control which acts like any typical closed loop gain control To change parameter 89 disable write protect by setting parameter 77 to 801 Parameter 89 is factory set to 100 Increasing the gain will increase the speed control precision and decreasing it will make the car more stable To find the optimal gain for the installation do the following 3 Put full load in the car 4 Observe car speeds and slowdown times in the up and down directions If they are sig nificantly different additional gain will reduce the difference If the car oscillates or overshoots significantly the gain is set too high 5 Ifno gain setting seems to improve the car up and down symmetry verify counterweight balance Also verify the slowdown distances Remember that the TRICON controller ini tiates slowdown when it ENTERS the slowdown magnet 3 96 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Mitsubishi A500 Variable Frequency Drive 6 Adjust the PWM frequency parameter 72 to a value as low as possible without generat ing too much audible noise The value will change from job to job Values as low as 4500 Hz are attainable Reducing the PWM frequency also reduces the heat generated in the drive and radio frequency interference 7 Run the car with no load and verify that it still runs smoothly and evenly in up and down directions Problems Auto Tuning In MFVC Mode If the auto tune fails verify all pa
147. are listed below Rear door at recall floor or local code addendum may change these settings Parameter NYC A17 1 1996 A17 1 2000 112 No Yes Yes 113 Yes Yes Yes 116 No No No 117 No Dis param 46 Yes Dis param 46 Yes Dis param 46 118 Yes Yes Yes 119 No No No 120 Flag 8 Dis param 51 Flag 0 Dis param 51 Flag 1 5 49 The Hand Held Unit MA ee Floor Table The floor table setup screen describes the building to the car controller As delivered it can han dle 32 front and 32 rear floors front and or rear doors etc The floor table describes to the soft ware how the building is distributed Figure 5 3 Floor Table Screen When the screen is selected from the menu the first floor is displayed However the first car floor may not be the cars bottom floor since in a group not all cars may go to the bottom floor Table 5 20 Parameter Examples Floor Table Editable Fields Explanation Value Floor Number Floor Number See note above 1 32 Floor Designation Use keypad to enter a name up to five characters The characters can be letters digits or punctuation marks Imaginary stop The car will count this floor but it has no opening here Yes No Used mainly for blind hatches and to synchronize position indicators Front CC Front Car Calls For local amp group fyes No Front U Front Up Hall Call Local hall calls per floor simple
148. as 1000 volts Use extreme caution Do not touch any components resistors circuit boards power devices or electrical connections without ensuring that high voltage is not present Environmental Considerations e Keep the machine room clean e Controllers are generally in NEMA 1 enclosures e Do not install the controller in a dusty area e Do not install the controller in a carpeted area Keep room temperature between 32 and 104 degrees F 0 to 40 degrees C e Prevent condensation on the equipment e Do not install the controller in a hazardous location or where excessive amounts of vapors or chemical fumes may be present e Make certain that power line fluctuations are within plus or minus 10 of proper value Air Conditioned Equipment Cabinets If your control or group enclosure is equipped with an air conditioning unit it is very important to observe the following precautions Failure to do so can result in moisture damage to electri cal components e Maintain the integrity of the cabinet by using sealed knockouts and sealing any holes made during installation e Donotrun the air conditioning while the cabinet doors are open e Ifyou tum the air conditioner off while it is running wait at least five minutes before restarting it Otherwise the compressor may be damaged e Observe the recommended thermostat setting 75 degrees and follow recommended maintenance schedules e Make certain that the air conditioning drain tube remai
149. as correct If not contact Engineering for assistance System Overview The control system uses the internal speed algorithm of the Magnetek HPV 900 drive Adjust ments to the accel rate jerk rates and decel rates are made through the drive Drive Programming The drive has been modified to meet MCE specifications If replacement of the drive is ever required please contact MCE Technical Support MCE will not accept any drive for repair under warranty without a Return Material Authorization RMA number issued by Technical Sup port Removing boards from the drive without authorization may void the manufacturer war ranty 3 48 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 900 AC Vector Drive Once the controller has been powered up the drive must be programmed to operate correctly with the equipment on the job site MCE has pre programmed the drive based on the informa tion provided in the electrical survey but it is important to confirm ALL parameters before attempting to run the car The drive may fault on initial power up due to incorrectly set parameters This is normal and may be ignored at this time Verify that the voltage on the motor nameplate matches the voltage input to the drive If not contact MCE Technical Support before proceeding Confirm that the three leads from the controller to the motor are connected If there are more than three motor leads make sure that the motor is wired in a wye
150. ate 5 6 Code Blue Code Blue Code Blue cardiac arrest hospital service from priority hall riser 7 Hospital emer Hosp Emerg Operation of car by staff under hospital gency emergency rules 8 Control board CTRL BRD COMM Cannot communicate with CTRL board comm loss LOSS 9 Car top board CAR TOP COMM Cannot communicate with CAR TOP board comm loss 10 Car station board CSTA COMM LOSS Lost contact with the car station board comm loss 5 7 The Hand Held Unit Me Table 5 1 States Table Car V 6 26 and HHU Version 6 26 02 06 11 Car MG switch Car MG sw The car MG switch has been operated The car will not restart and the doors will open if in the door zone 12 Lobby MG switch Lobby MG sw The MG switch at the lobby has been oper ated The car will not restart and will close the doors 13 Canada board CAN COMM LOSS Lost contact with EXT 1 board comm loss 14 Hall board comm HALL COMM LOSS Lost contact with HALL board Error 15 Gate bypass Gate Bypass Sw Gate bypass switch activated switch 16 Locks bypass Locks Bypass Sw Locks bypass switch activated switch 17 Gate locks G Locks Bypass Gate locks bypassed bypass 18 Weight overload Weight Overload Weight Overload 19 Weight bypass Weight Bypass Weight Bypass 20 Stop switch mon STOP SW MON Car stopped due to stop switch monitor itor error 4 Fire 1 0 Init 1 No
151. ation Parameter DS25 DS24 DS23 Blinking Off Off 1 Car speed in FPM Blinking Off On 2 Limit section overspeed in FPM Blinking On Off 3 Rope gripper overspeed in FPM Blinking On On 4 Flags DS17 On rope gripper enabled DS18 On rope gripper overspeed trip from overspeed parameter enabled DS19 On rope gripper overspeed from governor input enabled e Press S2 momentarily and release to reset the safety for a limit fault If five consecutive limit trips have occurred during a short interval limit trips will stop automatically reset ting In this event pressing S2 momentarily also resets the limit trip counter and re enables limit section automatic resets 4 10 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index_ _MCE Web Limit Board Adjustment e Press and hold S2 for 5 seconds to enter parameter mode DS25 will blink rapidly 16 times per second Parameter 1 car speed FPM value will be displayed on LEDs DS17 through DS22 Sum of lighted LEDs Value of parameter o DOD Or N NN AN nnnn nN NH A QA A QA A A 10 20 40 80 160 320 Co l 20 320 340 e Press S1 to change the displayed parameter e Press S2 to move to the next parameter e Press S3 to exit parameter mode e S3 Resets rope gripper Enters Exits Learn mode If board is in Parameter mode exits Parameter mode In Learn mode DS25 will blink 8 times per second and DS17 18 and 22 will be on steadily Please refer to Inspection Learn on page
152. ation is shown below If you are view ing this on line pdf file click on a menu to jump to its description Figure 5 1 Hand Held Unit Menus and Submenus Guide The Hand Held Unit A ek Main Menus There are four main menus e Car Diagnostics e Car Setup e Dispatcher Setup e Network Car Diagnostics Under the Car Diagnostics menu are e States Programmers think of sections of code written to handle a particular set of tasks like door operation as state machines The operations performed by the Tricon are divided across many of these state machines There are state machines for the front door operator the rear door operator the motor field etc All state machines communicate with each other and cooperate to provide all elevator services The current operating mode of the controller can be deduced by observing the current state of the machine e Car Errors The Car Errors screen displays the last fifty errors that have occurred on the controller Error 1is the most recent Error 50 is the oldest Inputs amp Outputs There are multiple submenus beneath the Inputs amp Outputs screen Each submenu displays realtime status for every input and or output in its category Please refer to Hand Held Unit Menus and Submenus Guide on page 5 5 5 6 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index__ _MCE Web States Submenu Screen The current operating mode of the controller can be deduced by observing t
153. ault Cube ID Fault The drive parameters are invalid The drive identification is invalid Check all drive parameters Cycle power to the drive If fault recurs go to the Utility menu and select Restore Defaults If fault persists replace Control board Note The Restore Defaults selection will require all drive parameters to be set to their correct values Check all drive parameters Cycle power to the drive If fault recurs go to the Utility menu and select Restore Defaults f fault persists replace Control board Note The Restore Defaults selection will require all drive parameters to be set to their correct values 3 38 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 600 Table 3 4 HPV 600 Drive Faults Closed Loop Curr Reg Fault Actual current does not match the commanded current Check incoming power Check motor parameters and verify proper setting Check motor connections and motor windings for open circuit Check main contactor for bad contact If OK bad current sensor or bad drive DCU Data Fault The DCU parameters are not set correctly Check all drive parameters Cycle power to the drive If fault recurs go to the Utility menu and select Restore Defaults If fault persists replace Control board Note The Restore Defaults selection will require all drive parameters to be set to their correct values Dir Conflict The commanded direc tion from
154. ault is declared sec 0 5 00 1 00 0 5 Brake Hold Time Time before a brake hold fault is declared sec 0 5 00 0 20 0 00 Overspeed Level Threshold for detection of overspeed fault 100 0 150 0 115 0 115 Overspeed Time Time before an overspeed fault is declared sec 0 9 99 1 00 1 00 Overspeed Mult Multiplier for overspeed test 100 150 125 125 Encoder Pulses Encoder counts per revolution ppr 600 10000 1024 1024 Spd Dev Lo Level Range around speed reference for speed 00 1 10 0 10 20 deviation low logic output Spd Dev Time Time before speed deviation low logic out sec 0 9 99 0 5 0 5 put is true Spd Dev Hi Level Level to declare speed deviation alarm 0 99 9 10 0 20 0 Spd Command Subtracts an effective voltage to actual volts 0 6 00 0 00 0 00 Bias speed command voltage Spd Command Scales analog speed command 0 90 3 00 1 00 1 00 Mult Pre Torque Bias Subtracts an effective voltage to actual volts 0 6 00 0 00 0 00 pre torque command voltage Pre Torque Mult Scales pre torque command 10 00 10 00 1 00 1 0 Zero Speed Level Threshold for zero speed logic output 0 99 99 25 00 1 00 Zero Speed Time Time before zero speed logic output is sec 0 9 99 0 10 0 10 declared true Up Dwn Threshold Threshold for detection of up or down 0 9 99 1 00 1 00 direction Mtr Torque Limit Motoring torque limit 0 250 0 200 0 200 0 Regen Torq Limit Regenerating torque limit 0 250 0 200 0 200 0 3 31
155. ay to start the slowdown 30 Up run start Fast up start 31 Dn run start Fast dn start 14 Pump MG 0 Init Contr 1 Stopped Stopped Stopped 2 Start Start Start for wye delta sequence 3 Running Running Run state for wye delta sequence 4 State 4 State 4 5 Run hold Hold Prevents rapid start and stop of wye delta sequence 6 State 6 State 6 7 State 7 State 7 15 Positioning 0 Init Initialization 1 Leveled Leveled The car is leveled at the floor 2 Above level Above level The car is in the leveling zone above the leveled position 3 Above Above The car is above the position not yet at slowdown distance from the floor above 4 Above slow Abve sldla The car is moving up above the current down vane position in the slowdown vane for the next floor up 5 Above slowdown Above sidn The car is moving up above the current position in the slowdown zone for the floor above out of the slowdown vane 6 Above slow Above sld2 The car is moving up above the current down 2 position in the low speed slowdown zone for the floor above 7 Below level Below level The car is in the leveling zone below the leveled position 8 Below Below The car is below the position not yet at slowdown distance from the floor below 9 Below slowdown Below sldla The car is moving down below the current vane position in the slowdown vane for the next floor down 10 Below slowdown Below sldn The car is moving down below the current
156. bient temperature should remain within 32 to 104 Fahrenheit 0 to 40 Celsius Temperatures outside these guidelines may be tolerated but will shorten equipment life Adequate ventilation is required Air conditioning may be necessary The air in the machine room should be free of excessive dust corrosive elements and excessive moisture A NEMA 4 or NEMA 12 enclosure can help meet these requirements if machine room conditions are inadequate If the machine room has open or unglazed win dows or other direct outside openings place equipment cabinets far enough from them so that severe weather does not damage the equipment e Very high levels of radio frequency RF radiation from nearby sources should be avoided RFI may interfere with controller components degrading elevator performance Using hand held communication devices close to the controller may also cause interference Interference from permanently installed radio transmitting antennas is not common e Power line fluctuation should not be greater than 10 Piping and Wiring Proper routing of signal and power wires for the car and dispatcher is essential to trouble free installation of microprocessor based equipment Low voltage and high voltage wiring cannot be run in the same conduit duct or tray How Electrical Noise Occurs Electrical noise occurs in most cases when two wires run along side one another with one of them a high power conductor and the other a low signal leve
157. car station and dispatcher com ponents The Hand Held Unit allows you to set system parame ters and access status and error information You plug the Hand Held Unit into a common telephone jack style connector on one of the circuit boards associated with the microprocessor you want to view or edit Car Network To view or edit the car network CPU you may plug the Hand Held Unit into any car network con troller or cartop station board with a phone jack I O 24 CE or PI boards Car network I O 24 boards can be iden tified by the sticker on the square IC in the upper left cor ner of the board which will be labeled Hall or CTRV Dispatcher To view or edit the dispatching group control network you may plug the Hand Held Unit into any dis patcher I O 24 board Typically the dispatcher is housed in a separate cabinet from the controller cabinets of the cars it controls If you have a dispatcher housed in the Tricon same cabinet with a car controller you can identify the dispatcher I O 24 board by the dHall sticker on the square IC in the upper left corner of the board Figure 1 5 I O 24 Controller Board for Car Network IC with identifying software sticker Phone jack connector 19 Tricon General I nformation Me HHU Dispatcher Board Connection Optional Some installations require that the networks of all cars in a group be accessible from the group dispatcher cabinet In the
158. cess the desired menu If the drive is faulted ACTIVE FAULTS will display the present fault FAULT HIS TORY will display faults that occurred previously Following is a list of detected drive faults Listed after each fault is a description of what the fault is and suggested corrective action Table 3 2 HPV 600 Drive Faults Open Loop Brk Hold Fault Fault Description Corrective Action AtoD Fault Control board ADC con Cycle power to controller and see if fault clears If not replace verter not responding Control board Brake Alarm Dynamic brake resistor Confirm motor data correctly entered into drive braking resis overcurrent NOTE After drive stops this becomes a Brake IGBT Fault Brake hold state does not match commanded state tance connected and sized correctly car balanced correctly Disabled Brk IGBT Fault Brake IGBT overcurrent Overcurrent of braking IGBT has occurred Fault latches but does not shut car down until it stops to allow passengers to exit Confirm motor data correctly entered braking resistance connected and sized correctly car balanced correctly Brk Pick Fault Brake pick state does not match commanded state Disabled Bridge Fault Power module detecting overcurrent or over temperature condition Overcurrent Check proper sizing and connection of dynamic braking resistor Check for short in motor wiring or windings Over temperature Check drive cooling
159. cleared To view or clear this error list do the following e Use the arrow keys to scroll to Parameter 0 e Press DATA FCTN key The first entry is ALL e Press ENT to clear all the errors in the list Use arrow keys to scroll past the ALL entry to view the error list The first error after ALL is the latest error Press the ENT key to clear that particular error The end of the list will be indicated by END For a more complete description of Parameters 800 amp 0 refer to the Magnetek Technical Manual Contents __ Index _MCE Web 3 107 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A ek High Speed Adjust Magnetek DSD 412 Car Balancing In order for the drive to perform properly and be set up correctly the car needs to be properly balanced Geared cars are typically balanced with 40 50 of the cars rated capacity To con firm this the following procedure must be followed ib 2 a g e gw 10 Access the car top Run the car on inspection to the center of the hoistway Stop the car so the crosshead on the counterweight is exactly adjacent the crosshead on the car Place a chalk mark on the cables in the machine room and mark the hoist motor so that while the car is run from the machine room you will be able to tell when the car passes through the center of the hoistway Move the car to a convenient floor Place 40 of the car rated capacity in the car On inspection run the
160. closure A continuous looped ground wire should be run from each hall push button station to the dispatch or controller ground Tricon General I nformation A ek General Wiring Instructions Detailed instructions for connecting the Tricon controller and accompanying components are contained in the drawings package for the job During the job survey site specific information collected is used to engineer the drawings package Contact Motion Control Engineering imme diately if you have questions about the drawings or need additional assistance Velocity Encoder Installation and Wiring The velocity encoder reports hoist motor speed to the controller The encoder must be mounted and wired according to the drawings When installed the encoder must be electrically isolated from the motor or any other ground Resistance between the encoder casing and the motor or other ground should be infinite Do not place the encoder or its wiring close to a magnetic field the motor or brake coils Mag netic fields can induce AC into the encoder signal This can cause the drive to miscount produc ing erratic control at lower speeds The encoder wiring must use a separate grounded conduit Inside the controller cabinet if con trol wires must cross power wires they must cross at right angles to reduce the possibility of interference Encoder Mounting The following illustration shows two typical encoder installations Typical mountin
161. correct balancing of car Check for dragging brake or mechanical bind in machine or hoistway Verify OVLD START LEVEL A1 and OVLD TIME OUT A1 Check for bad motor Overcurr Fault Phase current exceeded 250 of rated current Verify car balanced correctly Verify motor and drive sizing Check for bad motor connection Check for bad main contactor contacts Check for mechanical bind in car or machine Overspeed Fault Motor speed exceeded user entered parame ters Check parameters OVERSPEED LEVEL A1 and OVERSPEED TIME A1 If OK check tracking of motor to desired speed and tune regulator for better performance Overtemp Fault The heatsink tempera ture is too high Drive heatsink temperature exceeded 1052C 2212F Check fans on drive make sure adequate airflow is present Overvolt Fault The DC Bus voltage is too high DC bus voltage exceeded 850 volts on a 460 volt drive or 425 volts on a 230 volt drive Check braking resistance connected and sized properly Check for high AC line Confirm input volt age to drive If above OK possible bad braking IGBT Drive unit needs to be replaced PCU Data Fault PCU parameters not cor rect Check all drive parameters Cycle power to drive If fault recurs go to Utility menu and select Restore Defaults If fault per sists replace Control board Note Restore Defaults will require all drive parameters be set to their correct values Phase Faul
162. ction to move the car up or down Using the programmer access the Display D1 menu Monitor Speed Reference Run the car in the down direction The speed reference displayed on the drive should be neg ative Using the inspection up button run the car in the up direction The speed refer ence should be positive While using the inspection up down buttons to run the car use a hand tach to check car speed It should be moving at approximately the same speed as that displayed by the drive If not access the Adjust AO menu User Switches AL Adjust Contract Motor Spd until the car is running at the same speed displayed by Speed Reference 5 The car is now started and running on inspection Drive Parameter Reference Open Loop Followingis a list of drive parameters with an explanation and setting for each Refer to the pre vious section for initial programming Please refer to HPV 600 AC Drive Start Up Open Loop on page 3 4 Table 3 1 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Open Loop WARNING Parameters with an asterisk must be set correctly for your specific job Parameter Description Unit Range Default ar Adjust AO A1 Drive Contract Car Spd Elevator Contract Speed fom 0 3000 400 Contract Mtr Spd Motor Speed at contract speed rom 150 3000 1130 Response Sensitivity of speed regulator rad 1 0 20 0 10 10 sec Inertia System inertia sec 0 25 50 00 2 0 2 0 Inner Loop Xover Inner speed loop cr
163. current 24 Int speed High inspection speed 30 Hz 29 Accel Decel S curve 0 linear 1 S curve 0 linear rate profile 72 PWM Frequency Preset is 2 KHZ which will cause a lot of audi 10 KHz ble motor noise 80 Motor Capacity Activates MVFC mode automatically when set 9999 to any value 81 Number of motor poles Activates MVFC mode automatically when set 9999 to any value 3 93 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A ee Mitsubishi A500 Magnetic Flux Vector Control The MFVC mode allows the drive to track speed improving control and almost eliminating stall conditions In this mode the A500 can approach the ride quality of a closed loop vector drive The MFVC mode of operation is automatically activated when parameters 80 and 81 are set to any value other than 9999 When MFVC mode is activated the value entered for torque boost parameter 0 is ignored The drive will internally calculate the necessary torque boost values required after the motor has been auto tuned To deactivate the MFVC mode set 9999 in parameters 80 and 81 At this point you should already have adjusted the car in open loop volts hertz mode Depending on the motor it may not be possible to auto tune or run the drive in this mode see the section below explaining adjusting problems If an encoder board and encoder have been provided the encoder board must be unplugged from the drive before auto tuning is performed Auto tuning with the card installed ca
164. d CTRL N v6 2 Output Examples A17 1 2000 Car Controller Board Outputs Terminals Connectors Name Label AF 25 AF26 A3 1 to A3 2 Run up UP AF 17 AF 18 A2 1 to A2 2 Run down DN AF 27 AF 28 A3 3 to A3 4 Brake BK AF 19 AF20 A2 3 to A2 4 High speed HS AF 29 AF30 A3 5 to A3 6 Medium speed MS AF 21 AF 22 A2 5 to A2 6 Door bypass DBYP AF 31 AF 32 A3 7 to A3 8 Access top lock bypass ATLB AF 23 AF 24 A2 7 to A2 8 Access bottom lock bypass ABLB BF 25 BF 26 B3 1 to B3 2 Door open DO BF 17 BF 18 B2 1 to B2 2 Rear door open RDO BF27 BF 28 B3 3 to B3 4 Door close DC BF 19 BF 20 B2 3 to B2 4 Rear door close RDC BF 29 BF 30 B3 5 to B3 6 Door Nudging Freight doors NUDG Fire command BF 21 BF 22 B2 5 to B2 6 Rear door nudging Freight RNUG doors fire car command BF 31 BF 32 B3 7 to B3 8 Door cam CAM BF 23 BF 24 B2 7 to B2 8 Drive reset DRES CF 25 CF26 C3 1 to C3 2 Pump or MG start STRT CF 17 CF 18 C2 1 to C2 2 Pump or MG run RUN CF 27 CF 28 C3 3 to C3 4 Brake lift BL CF 19 CF20 C2 3 to C2 4 Brake relevel BRL CF 29 CF30 C3 5 to C3 6 Full field FF CF 21 CF 22 C2 5 to C2 6 Drive pattern enable PE CF 31 CF 32 C3 7 to C3 8 Approach speed AS CF 23 CF 24 C2 7 to C2 8 Leveling speed LS Contents __ Index _MCE Web 5 25 The Hand Held Unit Me Car Top Board The car top board may be mounted in either the controller cabinet the ca
165. d Disabled Disable when set to Enable and a logic input is Disabled programmed to Run Up and Run Down S Curve Abort Addresses how S Curve Speed Refer Enabled Disabled Disable ence Generator handles a reduction in Disabled speed command before S Curve Gen erator has reached target speed Fast Flux Reduces starting takeoff time by Enabled Enabled Enable reducing motor fluxing time Disabled Main DIP Ena Enables Mains DIP Speed A1 param Enabled Disabled Disable eter which reduces speed when a UV Disabled alarm low voltage is declared DB Protection Dynamic braking protection fault or Fault Fault Fault alarm selection Alarm 3 58 Manual 42 02 2T00 Magnetek HPV 900 AC Vector Drive Table 3 5 HPV 900 Drive Parameters Encoder Fault Temporarily disables Encoder Fault Enabled Enabled Enable Disabled Stopping Mode Determines stopping mode when Immediate Immedi mmediate Spd Command Src multi step Ramp to stop fate Motor Ovrld Sel Motor Overload Selection Alarm Alarm FLT Imme Fit Immediate diate Fault at Stop Auto Stop Auto Stop Function enable Disable Disable Disable Enable Serial Mode Serial Protocol selection None Mode 1 None Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 2 test SER2 FLT Mode Defines reaction to a serial communi Immediate Immediate I mmediate cation fault while in Serial Mode 2 Run remove serial mode 2 rescue DRV Fast Disable Addresses how fast drive responds
166. d car operating panel The car station converts the discrete inputs of the car operating panel into a highspeed serial stream communicating with the car controller through a simple twisted strand cable The car station allows the bulk of the traveler cable to be reduced since it is no longer necessary to use individual wires between the car and the controller for each car operating panel button or lamp Please contact MCE Sales support if you are interested in a car station for your Tricon installa tion Tricon General I nformation Me Dispatcher The compact Tricon dis patcher allows economical centralized control of eleva tor groups of up to six cars The dispatcher controls group cars to provide the most efficient handling of building traffic The dis patcher also controls car parking assignment spe cial operating modes i e lobby peak and group response during atypical operation i e operation during fire conditions emergency power condi tions etc Dispatcher Circuit Boards The circuit board complement of the dispatcher varies slightly according to customer require ments The illustration below shows a typical dispatcher layout Figure 1 4 Typical Dispatcher Layout CPU board DHALL I O 24 boards 5V PS PW5 board 1 8 Manual 42 02 2T00 _Contents_ Index _MCE Web Hand Held Unit HHU The Hand Held Unit is the tool used to set up and troubleshoot the Tricon controller cartop
167. d parameter SPEED COMMAND 3 A3 so it is 5 of con tract speed Using the programmer display motor frequency This can be found under Display DO Power Data D2 MOTOR FREQUENCY Monitor the output frequency of the drive while running the car up on inspection If the frequency is not exactly 3 hertz stop the car If the frequency was less than 3 hertz increase the inspection speed If the frequency was greater than 3 hertz decrease the inspection speed Repeat until the output of the drive is exactly 3 hertz Using a hand tach monitor the speed of the car If the car is moving at less than the inspection speed programmed increase the MOTOR MID VOLTS parameter in the Motor A5 menu If the car is moving faster decrease the parameter Repeat until the car is running at the speed programmed This is the final setting for the MOTOR MID VOLTS parameter Change inspection speed parameter SPEED COMMAND 3 A3 so it is 1 7 of con tract speed Using the programmer display motor frequency This can be found under Display DO Power Data D2 MOTOR FREQUENCY Monitor the output frequency of the drive while running the car up on inspection If the frequency is not exactly 1 hertz stop the car If the frequency was less than 1 hertz increase inspection speed If the frequency was greater than 1 hertz decrease inspection speed The motor may stall at this low frequency Ignore this for now 10 11 13 Repeat until the output of the dr
168. de Open Loop Closed Loop 00cce cence 3 78 Startup for Flux Vector Mode Closed Loop 0 cc ec cee cee eee eeeeees 3 87 SUAS occ oud eh knew iri NAR ESR SE SHS Oh eSE dR OL OSS RER ERS 3 87 SEY ah cauecceet ease nessew eerie EAEE EEREN EEEREN EEREN EEREN 3 88 Motor Tuning Flux Vector Closed Loop Only 0 0 cece eee eee eee eens 3 88 De eh hh A 4 SS ee en aes 44a dda saK 3 89 Mitsubishi A500 Variable Frequency Drive 0c cece ccc cccees 3 91 A500 Startup and Adjustment 6 oc een be bowed eee ead Heide wae esd eeRe es dew eeees 3 91 et Loop Yon BU ercer ee eewre reee EGS ee ee re eeeeeew ie tees 3 91 A500 Inspection Startup Open Loop Volts Hertz 0c e eens 3 91 High Speed Adjustment Open Loop Volts Hertz 0 ccc cece cece cence 3 92 Final Stop Adjustment Open Loop Volts Hertz 0 ccc cece erenneren 3 92 Problems Adjusting Open Loop Volts Hertz 0 cece cece eee een eee ees 3 93 Mitsubishi Open Loop Volts Hertz Parameters 0 0 c cece eee e eee eees 3 93 Mitsubishi A500 Magnetic Flux Vector Control 00 c cee cece eee aes 3 94 Adjusting the Drive in MFVC Vector Mode 0c ccc eect e eee n eee nne eens 3 94 raring the AUIO DING ois ccccderneuedaugebarGe wwe E EEEE EEE EEEE TEB Kes 3 95 iat alae es ede cel eee eee eke eee kee eee eee n E EA 3 95 High Speed Adjustment and Gain Adjustment 0 0 0 ccc cece cece eee eens 3
169. ded C1 01 Accel Rate 1 Acceleration Rate 1 f s2 0 01 8 00 13 00 i C1 02 Decel Rate 1 Deceleration Rate 1 f s2 0 01 8 00 13 00 C1 03 Accel Rate 2 Acceleration Rate 2 f s2 0 01 8 00 13 00 3 00 C1 04 Decel Rate 2 Deceleration Rate 2 f s2 0 01 8 00 6 00 6 00 C1 05 Accel Rate 3 Acceleration Rate 3 f s2 0 01 8 00 6 00 6 00 C1 06 Decel Rate 3 DecelerationRate3 ss iys2 0 01 8 00 6 00 6 00 C1 07 Accel Rate 4 Acceleration Rate 4 f s2 0 01 8 00 13 00 r C1 08 Decel Rate 4 Deceleration Rate 4 f s2 0 01 8 00 13 00 C1 09 Fast Stop Rate Fast Stop Rate f s2 0 01 8 00 3 00 3 00 C1 11 Acc Dec SW fre Accel Decel switching level Hz 0 00 400 0 0 0 0 Motor Slip Compensation C3 01 Slip Comp Gain Slip Compensation Gain 0 0 2 5 1 0 1 0 C3 02 Slip Comp Time Primary Time Delay N A to Flux Vector ms JO 10000 200 200 C3 04 Slip Comp Regen Slip Compensation During Regen 0 1 1 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled N A to Flux Vector Torque Compensation C4 01 Torque Comp Gain Torque Compensation Gain N A to Flux Vector 0 00 2 50 1 00 1 00 C4 02 Torque Comp Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time ms l0 10000 200 200 Time N A to Flux Vector ASR Tuning Flux Vector only C5 01 ASR P Gain 1 _ ASR Proportional Gain 1 Flux Vector only 0 00 300 00 20 00 20 00 C5 02 ASR Time 1 ASR Integral Time 1 Flux Vector only sec 0 0 10 000 0 200 0 200 C5 03 IASR P Gain 2 ASR Proportional Gain 2 Flux Vector only 0
170. detector being set to the bypass position Bypass reset A17 1 1996 Reset A17 1 2000 Where there is no bypass or reset switch in the lobby NYC set to No 118 Fire Allow fire phase2 yes no no yes no When this parameter is set a car recalled when recalled by MR by a machine room or hoistway smoke smoke detector detector will be allowed to initiate Fire Phase 2 operation 119 Fire Allow Phase 2 yes no no yes no When set the car can leave Fire Phase 2 or change without open change in and out of Fire Hold without the doors doors having to be fully open 120 Fire Operation flags 0 255 JO each 0 A17 1 1996 or NYC RS18 1996 1 ANSI 2000 fire code Car fire bypass input operation becomes fire reset opera tion as defined in this code 2 Complete recall before reverting to nor mal service 8 Ignore gate and locks jumped Add the flag numbers of those flags you want set Affected by other fire op params 4 8 16 32 64 128 not currently used 121 Fire Open rear door yes no no yes no Open the rear door instead of the front door when at recall floor on fire Phase recall Contents __Index _MCE Web 5 45 The Hand Held Unit Table 5 18 Car Setup Parameters Screen Me 122 Fire Open the rear door yes no no yes no Open the rear door instead of the front door when at alt recall floor on fire Phase recall to alt floor If set to no the
171. djustment e Open Loop Volts Hertz e MFVC Mode Open Loop with Slip Compensation e Closed Loop Speed Control e Brake Adjustment A500 Startup and Adjustment This section describes adjusting the Mitsubishi A500 drive The instructions are not intended to replace the Mitsubishi drive manual and assume you understand how to use the drive parame ter unit to access monitor modes as well as parameters The drive can be operated in three modes e Open loop volts hertz e MFVC mode open loop volts hertz with slip compensation e Closed loop speed control The drive is shipped with parameters set for open loop volts hertz mode Each mode in turn in the order shown above improves the performance of the drive The highest performance mode closed loop speed control requires an encoder feedback board in the controller cabinet and a motor mounted encoder Even if you intend to run the car in closed loop mode with encoder feedback you must start adjusting from the open loop volts hertz mode and move up one mode at a time This is required because the motor self tune must be done without the encoder board plugged into the drive The A500 drive is shipped with a FR DU04 parameter unit An optional full size parameter unit FRPU04 with the extension cable FR CB203 is available Open Loop Volts Hertz These instructions are for open loop volts hertz adjustment A500 Inspection Startup Open Loop Volts Hertz After verifying all controller
172. dresses how S Curve Speed Ref Enabled Disabled Disabled erence Generator handles a reduc Disabled tion in speed command before S Curve Generator has reached target speed Fast Flux Reduces starting takeoff time by Enabled Enabled Enabled reducing motor fluxing time Disabled Main DIP Ena Enables Mains DIP Speed A1 Enabled Disabled Disabled parameter which reduces speed Disabled when a UV alarm low voltage is declared DB Protection Dynamic braking Protection fault or Fault Fault Fault alarm selection Alarm Encoder Fault Temporarily disables Encoder Fault Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled 3 14 Manual 42 02 2T00 Table 3 1 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Open Loop Magnetek HPV 600 Stopping Mode Determines stopping mode when Immediate Immediate I mmediate Spd Command Src multi step Ramp to stop Motor Ovrid Sel Motor Overload Selection Alarm Alarm FLT Immedi Fit Immediate ate Fault at Stop Auto Stop Auto Stop Function enable Disable Disable Disable Enable Serial Mode Serial Protocol selection None Mode 1 None Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 2 test SER2 FLT Mode Defines reaction to serial communi immediate Immediate immediate cation fault while in Serial Mode 2 Run Only serial mode 2 remove rescue DRV Fast Disable Addresses how fast drive responds Disable Disable Disable to removal of Drive Enable logic Enable input
173. dros after the car stops Helps to avoid pump starts when the car stops and then relevels immediately Do not confuse with the MG shut down time which is very long The MG hold time has a maximum time of 25 sec onds 101 MG Start MG set as yes no no yes no Start the MG set a soon as a direction is soon a a direction is established If this flag is not set the MG established will start when the doors are closing with calls away 102 Pattern Time delay for O 25 5 O sec Time to wait before pattern starts building pattern start auto 103 Pattern Time delay for O 25 5 O sec Time to hold the pattern after the direction pattern start on relevel relays have picked during relevel 104 Pattern Speed set to yes no yes yes no When this flag is set the speed will be set to leveling when LU or LD leveling speed as soon as the car reaches on the leveling zone 105 Pattern Speed set to yes no no yes no Set leveling speed when reaching outer door zone 5 44 Manual 42 02 2T00 Gontents __Index _MCE Web Table 5 18 Car Setup Parameters Screen Main Menus 106 Pattern Time delay for 0 255 O sec Pattern start delay on inspection pattern start on inspec tion 107 Drive High speed yes no no yes no Set to high speed YES 108 Fire Main recall floor 1 32 2 floor Fire Phase 1 recall floor 109 Fire Alternate recall 1 32 3 floor Fi
174. e Hall the second is labeled and numbered 2 the third is labeled and numbered 3 When programming boards in a function set i e Hall Hall2 and Hall3 boards leave ONLY the board you wish to program plugged into the serial com munication network The following table lists the software label that will appear on the I O 24 board upper left cor ner IC depending upon its assigned function Table 5 3 Board Function to Software Label Correlation BOARDS LABEL ON CHIP HHU CTRL Control Card Hall Simplex Hall Board Hall 2 Simplex Hall Board Hall 3 Simplex Hall Board CTOP Car Top Card CSTA Car Station CSTA2 Car Station 2 PI Position Board CCL Car Call Lock Board Dispatcher HHU Dhall Group Hall Calls Dhall2 Group Hall Calls 2 The hand held unit allows realtime observation of all I O 24 board inputs and outputs If the hand held screen below a selected I O board is blank the board is not available or is not com municating If the board is operating properly all 24 inputs and 24 outputs will be displayed at once inputs to the left outputs to the right When an input is turned ON voltage at the pin it will display a 1 An input turned OFF no voltage at the pin will display a period 5 22 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __ Index _MCE Web Main Menus Figure 5 2 Input Output to Connector Correlation CSTA I O 24 Board 8 inputs 8 inputs 8 i
175. e It programs the speed at which the drive will run the motor when the car is at contract speed Go to the S Curves A2 sub menu ACCEL RATE 0 Desired acceleration rate Set to 2 5 ft s2 DECEL RATE 0 Desired deceleration rate Set to 4 0 ft s ACCEL J ERK IN 0 Desired initial jerk rate Set to 3 0 ft s ACCEL J ERK OUT 0 Desired jerk rate when transitioning from acceleration to con tract speed Set to 3 0 ft s DECEL J ERK IN 0 Desired jerk rate when transitioning from contract speed to decel eration Set to 4 0 ft s DECEL J ERK OUT 0 Desired jerk rate when transitioning from deceleration to level ing speed Set to 4 0 ft s Remaining S Curves A2 menu parameters are not used 11 1 13 4 15 Access the Multistep Ref A3 sub menu SPEED COMMAND 1 Leveling speed of the car Set to 3 5 ft min SPEED COMMAND 2 Approach speed of the car Set to 12 ft min SPEED COMMAND 3 Inspection speed of the car Set to 45 ft min SPEED COMMAND 4 Contract speed of the car Set to the cars rated speed Remaining Multistep Ref A3 sub menu parameters are not used 16 17 Access the Power Convert A4 sub menu INPUT L L VOLTS parameter Tells the drive what the input line voltage is This value is used by the drive to declare a low line voltage fault Set to the nominal AC voltage at the input to the drive 3 6 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __ Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 600 18 Go to the Adjust AO sub m
176. e Gripper overspeed in FPM Sets the speed at which the board will set the rope gripper Please refer to Limit Functionality on page 4 16 e Parameter 4 Flags Displays and allows you to change three settings Rope gripper enabled If LED DS17 is on the rope gripper is enabled e Rope gripper overspeed from overspeed parameter If LED DS18 is on the Parameter 2 Limit section overspeed in FPM value will be used to trip the rope gripper e Rope gripper overspeed from governor input If LED DS19 is on the governor input will be used to trip the rope gripper The limit overspeed DS18 on and the governor input DS19 on can both be enabled Either condition would then trigger the rope gripper Parameter entry mode and active parameter displayed are indicated by Parameter I ndication Parameter IDS25 DS DAZ S E Blinking Off Off 1 Car speed in FPM Blinking Off On 2 Limit section overspeed in FPM Blinking On Off 3 Rope gripper overspeed in FPM Blinking On On 4 Flags DS17 On rope gripper enabled DS18 On rope gripper overspeed from overspeed parameter enabled DS19 On rope gripper overspeed from governor input enabled Contents Index _MCE Web 4 13 Release to Normal Operation A ek Entering Parameters 1 Press and hold S2 for 5 seconds to enter parameter mode DS25 will blink rapidly 16 times per second Parameter 1 car speed FPM value will be dis played on LE
177. e cee teen errre eens 5 83 TO A Sn Ghee cs E see Go RSG E E wees oa E ees 5 84 Section 6 Operations k Tis SOCUON 56 5 0k 4 0b 5 x9 5 4S Feb eb F ek inin kantha Ar tAr AnA ARTERA 6 1 Inspection Operation os sax sas 66s sae 64s os se ee ee ee RO ewe ee eRe 6 2 Controler Mpa J Ee a re oe eee eee er reer ea ee ae eee eran ae ee emcee eer ee 6 2 Gar Top epo O oi nh ee ES hs ho 6 2 Acs IGN ECNION s ccc bec cee koi ddai Sra eaaa e a aE eDi 6 2 Car Switch Operation i 5 5 66 646 6 6 6 46 64 84 OGRE GATE GAS 4G 645 04 0405s 6 3 Running the Car From the Hand Held ccc ccc cece cece eee eeeees 6 3 Setting Up Car Switch Operation aw cede ance naenaneeud ud eu eeeneeueedeacevesuan 6 3 Parameter Pe i os oa eee ee eee ees one EERE Sia KE EIEEE ES IAEE REE 6 3 Boeri eee soe ere ee eee eens eee eee eee ee Tee eee ee ee re 6 4 Cor Door CO os ne ee adn rera eea 8 AE 6 4 E EERE S eE a i a E E S E E E A EEE EE E E 6 4 Emergency Power Operation ssessesscesosssssesoscesoesoooeoo 6 5 Operation Ie sserreri KAS Cds RARER E HERE RRI ERRA EES 6 5 GaP PUES secoperakeenrer tot tAn RN ERO EERE EERON E ERT 6 5 ipot Mapping 55 os ceawe a wee Sea wie sdb andes as Hie korea edad EEDE EA 6 6 Car Parameters Description and Operation 0 ce ccc e cece cece eee ee ceees 6 6 Dispatcher Parameters Description and Operation 00 e eee e cence eens 6 7 Code Blue Operation x scs od ook Hoe eee io eK ae es eee RHE eS HHO 6 8 PoU PO ot edees ooh a
178. e encoder is connected correctly Refer to the Yaskawa F7 Users Manual for wiring diagrams Refer to the parameters table shipped with the controller or to the parameters table in this manual section The parameters table shipped with the controller has the specific drive parameters programmed for your installation e Make sure the controller is on inspection operation Verify that the hoistway is clear and that the car is ready to be moved e Apply power to the controller For inspection purposes even if your controller operates in Flux Vector mode closed loop ini tially set the drive to run in V f mode open loop to check elevator mechanical characteristics Set drive parameter A1 02 0 Before attempting to run confirm that the modified parameters of the drive match the list sent with the controller by viewing the modified parameter section on the drive keypad in comparison to settings on the list sent with the controller If your system was programmed to Flux Vector mode at the factory changing to V f may alter some preset speeds thatare setto minimum speeds These will have to be manually repro grammed when the drive is switched back to Flux Vector mode later in this procedure e Verify that the line voltage in parameter E1 01 is set correctly to actual line voltage e Set the motors name plate full load amps in parameter E2 01 Using the Up Down toggle on the Relay Board attempt to run the car If the motor moves i
179. e plugged into a Hall I O 24 board Please refer to I O 24 Board with Terminal Boards at A B and C Positions on page 1 5 Expansion boards include L Terminal board Used for car or hall calls this board provides 8 paired input output combinations The input services the call button and the output enables the button lamp e O Terminal board Used for general purpose I O this board provides 8 independent inputs and 8 independent outputs The common bus power or ground for the outputs is determined by a connection to the Relay board F Terminal board Used for general purpose I O this board provides 8 independent inputs and 8 independent outputs Each output provides two connection points The common bus power or ground for the outputs is determined by a connection to the Relay board e Access board Used when top and or bottom hoistway access is provided Mounts on the I O 24 Controller only position board in the C location CE Driver board These boards interface the controller to third party audible or visual dis plays The type heavy duty or standard and number of driver boards provided depends upon the needs of the particular job Limit board or 2K Limit Gripper board Limit board provides car Feet Per Minute set ting limits overspeed conditions monitors speed feedback controls hoistway learn opera tions 2K Limit Gripper performs the same functions and additionally limits unintended motion and controls an externa
180. e test remove the drive jumper and any tiedown that may have been placed on a safety _Contents __ Index _MCE Web 4 25 Release to Normal Operation 4 26 Manual 42 02 2T00 MeE wes The Hand Held Unit 5 In this Section The Hand Held Unit is the primary programming and adjustment tool for the Tricon system This section provides the information you need to use the Hand Held Unit including e Overview e Car Diagnostics e Car Setup e Dispatcher Setup e Network 5 1 The Hand Held Unit Me Overview The Hand Held Unit is used to set up and trouble shoot the controller It provides user access to system parameters status and error information Connection The Hand Held Unit plugs into any I O 24 or power distribution board in the elevator controller using a simple telephone jack connector If the installation includes a cartop or car station the Hand Held Unit may also be connected to boards in these enclosures Identified by the software label CTRL or CTRV If the installation includes a dispatcher controlling multiple cars the Hand Held Unit provides dis patcher access when plugged into an I O 24 or power distribution board in the dispatcher enclosure Iden tified by the software label dHall 5 2 Manual 42 02 2T00 _Contents_ index _MCE Web Overview Operation Functions are arranged under a series of menus submenus and function screens The top line of the display ind
181. e the FPM scaling If the dis played speed is faster than the observed speed on the hand tach access 01 03 and decrease the scaling The car can now be run on inspection operation Contents __Index _MCE Web a Startup amp Drive Adjustment Drive Faults When a drive fault occurs the fault message will be displayed on the keypad and the drives fault contact will cycle The Tricon controller will attempt to reset the fault automatically If the fault condition remains the reset will stop and the drive will remain in a faulted condition Me You can view the status of the drive at the time of the current fault by looking at the Fault Trace monitors U2 01 to 14 You can also view the last ten fault messages in the Fault History con tained in monitors U3 01 to 20 High speed stops will usually cause a drive fault Motor Tuning Flux Vector Closed Loop Only In order for the drive to properly control the motor it is necessary to program motor character istics into the drive This can be done in a couple of ways however for elevator applications the simplest method is to use the drives Static Auto Tune feature In order for auto tune to complete it is necessary to force close the output contactor e Press the Menu key until the Auto Tune menu appears e Press Data Enter Enter the following data Parameter Data Description T1 01 1 Auto tune no rotate T1 02 Motor rated power If motor data
182. ec1 Ramp down rate with Acc1 fully clockwise fastest rate After all motor control adjustments have been made a ramped release of the brake may be required to control roll back This can be seen with a voltmeter on the output of the control F F Moving the car on inspection with all loads and direction starts observe the brake release as well as the start of the car Slowing the Acc rate will release the brake when the loop current is sufficient to hold the car without rolling back Settings of the following controller parameters can be used to delay the brake lift if required Parameter 81 automatic starts 84 inspection starts 86 releveling starts 3 46 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 600 1 Ensure the brake coil has been connected properly to the controller 2 Connect a meter across the F and F terminals of the drive Set the meter range high enough to measure the brake lifting voltage level for the job 3 With no inputs on at the J 1 terminal of the drive the V 1 4 pot will be selected Adjust the V 1 4 pot fully counterclockwise The meter should read approximately 30 volts 4 Turn the main line power OFF TEMPORARILY jump from AC2 P11A 100VDC relay board on the controller to J 1 1 on the driver 5 Turn the main line power ON Run the car on inspection and adjust the V I 1 Lift voltage pot until brake pick voltage required for the job is obtained 6 Turn the main line po
183. ece eee tenet eens 3 27 Parameter Ses ks bc saatir ira Ah idee E a od AREEN A OEE 3 27 PEL ATM E E E E E E E Pee ee A E E 3 27 ON Tin aeDA i a A A ea aap A E T eee 3 29 EN ho Car reptere stirra EEren ENEAN EERS EE EAN EEE OREA 3 30 HPV 600 Drive Parameter Reference Closed Loop 00ceeceeceeecees 3 31 HPV 600 Drive Faults Closed Loop bse ices bodes ewes eedsedeeesewerees 3 38 HPV 600 High Speed Adjustment Closed Loop 0c cece een eee eens 3 41 Ca EES PETE BE 4a en E E E een ee 3 41 Motor Parameter Adjustments 0 00 cece eee e cee eee c ence ee neeeaes 3 42 Speed Curve Setting and Adjustment 0 ccc cece cee cence eee eens 3 42 HPV 600 Adaptive Tune i655 ok enews Said be ewn ee ewe edo w de eee ed es bee RSeS 3 44 Broke Pt hh ode Ook roba raire tr EOO eG E48 000 eee 3 45 Magnetek HPV 900 AC Vector Drive 0cccecccccececceeeees 3 48 HPY SOO PI os ca cdoveieeiseecddass bicbtededads4hedeai seca dasskiaanse ee 3 48 ere Pe CIO 645 a oe o gt 14S 4a Sd ho E beh kIeee 3 48 Dive FOI a oo oo Sk ie sd oe se CHD AEER ESTES Se Ree REE AES Hee TARR eeR 3 48 DTPA ec cer cannederandedeceheenr essere ences EE E O 3 49 Using the HPV900 Drive Programmer 00s0cne sce ie nodose seve eeeeveavecweans 3 49 Parameter once dds he cases ned deGusinesuetseneonrcanebeokeeseedon lt 3 50 Pe AO ARN vost eers eee eed eee eee ee ees EE tan ee Ges 3 50 Cont Quire CO MMU ai cacta dt lavedeead clad ia ddd iisi ieira
184. ecel Rate 3 Deceleration rate 3 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Accel Jerk in 3 Rate of increase of acceleration up to ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 ACCEL Rate when increasing elevator speed Accel Jerk out 3 Rate of decrease of acceleration to zero ftys3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 when approaching contract elevator speed Decel Jerk in 3 Rate of increase of deceleration up to ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 Decel Rate when decreasing elevator speed Decel Jerk out 3 Rate of decrease of deceleration to zero ftys3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 when slowing the elevator to leveling speed A3 Multistep Ref Speed command 1 Multi Step Speed command 1 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 4 Speed command 2 Multi Step Speed command 2 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 12 Speed Command 3 Multi Step Speed command 3 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 45 Speed command 4 Multi Step Speed command 4 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 Speed Command 5 Multi Step Speed command 5 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 Speed command 6 Multi Step Speed command 6 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 Speed Command 7 Multi Step Speed command 7 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 0 3 33 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Table 3 3 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Closed Loop Me Speed command 8 Multi Step Speed command 8 ft m 3000 to 3000 0 Speed Command 9 Multi Step Speed command 9 ft m _ 3000 to 3000 0 0 Speed Command Multi Step Speed command 10 ft
185. ed non stop to the Code Blue recall floor Once at the floor the corresponding door will open and remain open for as long as the Code Blue button is activated plus the Code Blue wait time set See Dispatcher Parameters Description below Inputs and Outputs Involved Dispatcher All Code Blue call inputs and outputs are located on the dispatcher They start at the next 8 call group after the last hall call and are located in order of bottom floor to top floor front door first then rear door Car An indicator light must be connected to the Code Blue Indicator output This light will turn ON when the car is in Code Blue Recall operation or in Hospital Emergency operation Car Parameters Description The car group assignments table must be filled with a Y for every floor and door where the car will answer Code Blue calls Floor Number 1 32 Floor Designation 6 8 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index i _MCE Web Code Blue Operation Dispatcher Parameters Description The dispatcher floor table contains entries designated CB for front and rear doors at every floor For every entry marked Y a Code Blue call will be allocated The first Code Blue call defined will always be located at the first input of a hall call panel group Hall calls and code blue calls will never share the same hall card group panel Riser Number Floor Number Values e Parameter Code Blue Override Fire Recall will enable the d
186. ed drive faults Listed after each fault is a description of what the fault is and a suggested corrective action Table 3 6 HPV 900 Drive Faults Fault Description Corrective Action AtoD Fault Control board analog to Cycle power to controller and see if fault clears If not replace digital converter not Control board responding Brake Alarm Dynamic brake resistor Confirm motor data correctly entered into drive braking resis overcurrent tance connected and sized correctly and car is balanced cor rectly NOTE After drive stops this becomes Brake IGBT Fault Brk Hold Fault Brake hold state does not match commanded state Disabled Brk IGBT Fault Brake IGBT overcurrent Overcurrent of braking IGBT has occurred Fault latches but does not shut car down until it stops to allow passengers to safely exit Confirm motor data correctly entered braking resis tance connected and sized correctly car balanced correctly Brk Pick Fault Brake pick state does not match commanded state Disabled Bridge Fault Power module is detect ing overcurrent or over temperature condition Overcurrent Check proper sizing connection of dynamic brak ing resistor Check for short in motor wiring or windings Over temperature Check drive cooling fan and heatsink Replace drive if fault cannot be corrected with above measures 3 61 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Table 3 6 HPV 900 Dri
187. ed eh ee enous e a ieee eek eed ieee bereeee 6 8 Inputs and Outputs Involved s cpu bbe ew eee deeds ndew turendsenanreess 6 8 PCE paca E a er eae ee eet rau Ee ees 6 8 E in Fark ore red Eee E E E one eee oer A 6 8 Car Parameters Desa ipile essere cesce teue Meow sa eS bee S OEE REEE 6 8 Dispatcher Parameters Description cc cece cee cee cence eee neeeeees 6 9 vii viii Manual 42 02 2T00 E1 3 3 06 LE i Quick Topics Tricon Controller Cabinet Personal Safety Equipment Safety Installation Considerations General Wiring I nstructions Mef Tricon General Information Tricon The job prints accompanying your Tricon controller are the primary document necessary to install the controller and additional equipment if ordered from MCE The job prints and this manual together provide the information necessary to install adjust and troubleshoot the MCE Tricon elevator controller Study the job prints and read the manual before trying to work with the controller Call Motion Control Engineering with any questions you may have before begin ning installation or start up Your Tricon system may include Car controller Distributed processor elevator control configured according to a customer job survey Car top station Interface interconnect control box between car mounted equipment and the car controller Car top junction box Some jurisdictions require that circuit boards normally mounted inside t
188. ed fault detection threshold 100 0 150 0 125 0 115 Overspeed Time Time before overspeed fault declared sec 0 9 99 1 00 1 00 Overspeed Mult Multiplier for overspeed test 100 150 100 125 Encoder Pulses Encoder counts per revolution ppr 600 10000 1024 1024 Spd Dev Lo Level Range around speed reference for 00 1 10 0 10 20 speed deviation low logic output Spd Dev Time Time before speed deviation low logic sec 0 9 99 1 00 0 5 output is true Spd DevHi Level Level for declaring speed deviation 0 99 9 20 0 20 0 alarm Spd Command Subtracts an effective voltage to volts 0 6 00 0 00 0 00 Bias actual speed command voltage Spd Command Scales analog speed command 0 90 3 00 1 00 1 00 Mult Pre Torque Bias _ Subtracts an effective voltage to volts 0 6 00 0 00 0 00 actual pre torque command voltage Pre Torque Mult Scales pre torque command 10 00 10 00 1 00 1 0 Zero Speed Level Threshold for zero speed logic output 0 99 99 1 00 1 00 Zero Speed Time Time before zero speed logic output is sec 0 9 99 0 10 0 10 declared true Up Dwn Thresh Threshold for detection of up or down 0 9 99 1 00 1 00 old direction Mtr Torque Limit Motoring torque limit 0 250 0 250 0 200 0 Regen Torq Limit Regenerating torque limit 0 250 0 250 0 200 0 Flux Wkn Factor Defines torque limit at higher speeds 60 0 100 0 75 0 100 Ana 1 Out Offset Subtracts an effective voltage to 99 9 99 9 0 00 0 00
189. ed for parameter 370 the drive will ignore parameter 367 and try to follow the encoder feedback as closely as possible This may be a problem during acceleration and deceleration where the inertia of the car can cause the drive to over and under shoot the desired speed In a effort to correct itself excessive output can lead to a bumpy ride Setting parameter 370 to a 2 allows access to gain parameters 372 and 373 They can be used to smooth the ride See the explanation of the parameters below 3 98 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Mitsubishi A500 Variable Frequency Drive Gain Parameters Adjustment When parameter 370 is in mode 2 gain parameters are used to smooth the ride of the car Parameter 372 is the proportional speed loop gain Its starting point is 150 You need to have this high enough to handle the loads but not so high that the car is unstable Parameter 373 is the integral gain of the speed loop A lower number will increase the time the drive will take to respond to a speed variation Its starting point is 5 S Curve Adjustments When the encoder board is installed S curve rounding can be adjusted by doing the following 1 The accel and decel ramp time set in parameter 7 and 8 function normally 2 Rounding can be adjusted when you have set parameter 29 to a 4 3 The accel rounding is parameter 380 The decel rounding is parameter 381 4 Each rounding parameter is normally set to 50 Unusual Operat
190. ed to be completely readjusted Brake Adjustments e V I pot 1 Lifting Voltage e V I pot 2 Reveling Voltage V I pot 3 Running Voltage e Set Acceleration ACC1 to avoid rollback and starting brake bumps Set Deceleration to its maximum value DEC1 full CW Contents __ Index _MCE Web 3 45 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Brake Regulator P11 110 VDC Gnd B1 CTRL BR L J1 1 V I1 y Cy Cir J1 2 V2 123411 212 1 3 V3 papas NoteS The contact Z J1 5 Dec 2 leo Ihe Col S ero eee J1 6 Input Com shown here may not be the same as your a controller Refer to your controller schematics H l ond To 208 VAC Power Note 1 The control has four input selections J1 1 J1 4 The inputs select the voltage pots V I1 V I4 The inputs have priority over all other inputs with J1 1 having the highest priority The LED below the pot will show the active pot Acc1 and Dec 1 are active unless J1 5 or J1 6 inputs are on Tricon does not use Acc 2 or Dec 2 Clockwise rotation of the pots will raise the voltage output of the control Note 3 The releveling brake uses the V 2 pot If you have difficulty controlling rollback when releveling adjust V 2 to partially release the brake Note 4 V I1 Lifting V I2 Releveling o VIM Holding Note 2 Clockwise rotation of Acc1 and Dec1 will quicken the Acc1 Ramp up rate ramp up or ramp down rate of the voltage output Initially start D
191. edit screen use key To return to the previous menu use key To edit e To reach the desired field 6 or right arrow key to move right one field 4 or left arrow key to move left one field e When you reach the desired field 2 or up arrow to increase one increment 8 or down arrow to decrease one increment e When satisfied press the key to start clock e Press the key to abort change You will move back to the Clock screen To return to the Car Setup menu use the key Figure 5 12 Car Clock Screen The Hand Held Unit Mek Reset Errors This screen resets the error log An entry to show time of reset will be displayed To move into the Reset Error edit screen use 8 or key To return to the previous menu use key To answer reset press Yes or No key on the keypad e Press key to update e Press to return to Car Setup menu e Press key to abort change will return to Car Setup screen Figure 5 13 Car Reset Errors Screen Reset Parameters This screen resets car parameters to their default values Figure 5 14 Car Reset Parameters Screen 5 70 Manual 42 02 2T00 Reset Floor Table This screen resets car floor tables to their default values Figure 5 15 Car Reset Floor Table Parameters Screen Reset BMS This screen resets car modem dial out properties to their default values Figure 5 16 Car Reset BMS Parameters Screen Main Menus 5 71 The Ha
192. eficial to run the traveling cable directly to the top of the car junction box This avoids terminating traveler wires at the midway and at the under car junc tion box Car Top Neuron Network Wiring The controller communicates with the car MPU Micro Processor Unit via a neuron network at extremely high frequency The communication cable must be a shielded pair wire Preferably a shielded twisted wire We recommend the shield be tied to a controller network shield terminal on the PW5 board Dispatcher Communication Wiring Car controllers communicate with the group dispatcher through high speed twisted pair net work connections Communication cables white shielded wire between the cars and the dis patcher should be run in a separate pipe from all other signal wiring When a car is part of a group an additional circuit board the Gateway board is used In most applications a Gateway board is mounted in each car cabinet In some jurisdictions NYCHA for example all Gateway boards for all cars in a group are mounted in the group dispatcher cabinet In both instances drawings in the job drawing package detail the appropriate connec tions The following drawings provide examples of both types of interconnection 1 24 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web General Wiring Instructions Figure 1 15 Car Group Communication Standard I mplementation DISPATCHER PW5 Board N1 N2 SHLD N1 N2 Gateway Boa
193. el decel ramp B 4 S shaped Accel decel Ratio 144 Motor Poles Motor Poles 120 frequency RPM 900 RPM 8 but use 4 to auto tune 1200 RPM 6 1800 RPM 4 359 Encoder rotation Looking at the motor shaft if forward rotation UP direction is clockwise set to 0 otherwise set to 1 367 Speed feedback range This parameter is used in mode 0 and not in mode 1 or 2 Sync Speed Full load speed of poles 120 Example 1800 RPM 1750 X 4 poles 1 67HZ 120 368 Feed back Gain Suggested setting 1 369 Encoder Pulses rev Typically 1024 check your encoder 370 Control Mode 0 MFVC mode with encoder 1 vector mode with zero speed 2 vector mode with servo lock 372 Speed Control P gain Used to set the proportional gain of the speed loop A higher set ting will make the speed response faster Suggested setting 150 373 Speed Control gain Used to set the integral gain of the speed loop A lower setting will increase restoration time at the occurrence of a speed variation Suggested setting 5 380 S shaped Accel Only valid when Parameter 29 4 Suggested setting 50 381 S shaped Decel Only valid when Parameter 29 4 Suggested setting 50 Alarms E OC1 Over Current During Acceleration Alarm Drive overheating Check cooling fan Increase Acceleration time Pr 7 Decrease Torque boost Pr OC Output Transistor Module Damaged Disconnect the motor from the M relay and try the drive If the drive trips as soon as it
194. elect Motor Overload Protection Selection OL1 0 3 2 2 0 Disabled 2 Blower Cooled 1 Fan Cooled 3 Vector Motor L1 02 JMOL Time Const Motor Overload Protection Time min 0 1 20 0 11 0 1 0 Power Loss Ridethrough L2 01 PwrL Selection Momentary power loss ridethrough selection 0 2 0 0 0 Disabled 1 Ridethrough for time set in L2 02 2 Ridethrough while CPU has power L2 02 PwrL RideThrough t Momentary Power Loss RideThrough Time sec 0 0 25 5 2 0 2 0 L2 03 PwrL Baseblock t Momentary Pwr Loss Minimum Base Block Time sec 0 1 5 0 0 7 0 7 3 83 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Me 3 84 Manual 42 02 2T00 Stall Prevention L3 01 StallP Accel Sel Stall Prevention Selection During Acceleration 0 2 1 1 N A to Flux Vector 0 Disabled 1 General purpose 2 Intelligent L3 02 StallP Accel Lvl Stall Prevention Level During Acceleration 0 200 180 180 N A to Flux Vector L3 04 StallP Decel Sel Stall Prevention Selection During Deceleration 0 3 0 0 0 Disabled 1 General purpose 2 Intelligent 3 Stall Prevention with Braking Resistor L3 05 StallP Run Sel Stall Prevention Selection During Running 0 2 0 0 N A to Flux Vector 0 Disabled 1 Decel Time 1 2 Decel Time 2 L3 06 StallP Run Level Stall Prevention Level During Running 30 200 160 160 N A to Flux Vector Ref Detection Flux Vector only Set to Drive
195. elp After parking at this floor the car parking floor column will hold the indicated doors open 0 Do not open doors 1 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 Open both doors This parameter overrides the Open doors once parameter for this floor pars 18 25 5 76 Manual 42 02 2700 Contents __Index _MCE Web Table 5 29 Dispatcher Parameter Screen Parameters Main Menus 31 Hold doors open at sixth parking floor 0 3 0 see Help column After parking at this floor the car will hold the indicated doors open 0 Do not open doors 1 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 Open both doors This parameter overrides the Open doors once parameter for this floor pars 18 25 32 Hold doors open at sev enth parking floor 0 3 see Help column After parking at this floor the car will hold the indicated doors open 0 Do not open doors 1 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 Open both doors This parameter overrides the Open doors once parameter for this floor pars 18 25 33 Hold doors open at eighth parking floor see Help column After parking at this floor the car will hold the indicated doors open 0 Do not open doors 1 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 Open both doors This parameter overrides the Open doors once parameter for this floor pars 18 25 34 Parameter 34
196. ening due to electric eye activa tion 7 Car call opening Opening CC Door is opening due to answering a car call at floor 8 Hall call opening Opening HC Door is opening due to answering a hall call at floor 9 Car and hall calls Opening C amp H Door is opening due to answering both a car opening and hall call at floor 10 Opening Opening Door is opening 11 Opening by hall Opening HDoor Opening doors due to the hall door being door open swing doors 12 Reclosing Reclosing Door is closing following a re open door sequence 5 10 Manual 42 02 2T00 Main Menus Table 5 1 States Table Car V 6 26 and HHU Version 6 26 02 06 13 Opened by door Opened DOB Door is opened due to door open button open button activation 14 Opened by Safety Opened SE Door is opened due to safe edge activation edge 15 Opened by elec Opened EE Door is opened due to electric eye activa tric eye tion 16 Opened by a car Opened CC Door is opened due to a car call at present call floor 17 Opened by a hall Opened HC Door is opened due to a hall call at present call floor 18 Opened by botha car and hall call Opened CC amp HC Door is opened due to both a car and hall at present floor 19 Opened Opened Door is opened Door open limit is off 20 Opened by a hall Opened HDoor Door is opened due to the manual hall door door being opened swing door only 21 Opened error OPENED ERROR Doors fa
197. ens U1S1 to U1S2 Bottom The slowdown switch should be set to open immediately AFTER the DS sensor comes on the bottom floor slowdown magnet This can be seen by monitoring the DS relay on the SET9000 sensor interface board LED D4 lights This slowdown switch opens D1S1 to D1S2 Generally for car speeds over 200 feet per minute CTRL No 2 software Top Switch 1 The terminal slowdown switch that is furthest from the floor should be set to open immediately AFTER the US sensor comes on the top floor high speed slowdown magnet This can be seen by monitoring the HU relay on the SET9000 sensor interface board LED D3 lights This slowdown switch opens U2S1 to U2S2 Top Switch 2 The terminal slowdown switch that is closest to the floor should be set to open immediately AFTER the US sensor comes on the top floor one floor run slowdown magnet This can be seen by monitoring the HU relay on the SET9000 sensor interface board LED D3 lights This slowdown switch opens U1S1 to U1S2 Bottom Switch 1 The terminal slowdown switch that is furthest from the floor should be set to open immediately AFTER the DS sensor comes on the bottom floor high speed slow down magnet This can be seen by monitoring the DS relay on the SET9000 sensor inter face board LED D4 lights This slowdown switch opens D2S1 to D2S2 Bottom Switch 2 The terminal slowdown switch that is closest to the floor should be set to open immediately AFTER the DS sensor co
198. enu The first parameter is ACCEL RATE 0 Desired acceleration rate of speed curve function Set to 2 5 ft s DECEL RATE 0 Desired deceleration rate of speed curve function Set to 4 0 ft s2 ACCEL J ERK IN 0 Desired initial jerk rate of speed curve function Set to 3 0 ft s2 ACCEL J ERK OUT 0 Desired jerk rate when transitioning from acceleration to con tract speed Set to 3 0 ft DECEL J ERK IN 0 Desired jerk rate when transitioning from contract speed to decel eration Set to 4 0 ft s DECEL J ERK OUT 0 Desired jerk rate when transitioning from deceleration to level ing speed Set to 4 0 ft s2 The remaining parameters in the S Curves A2 sub menu are not used 1 w 5 6 Access the Multistep Ref A3 sub menu The first parameter is SPEED COMMAND L Sets the leveling speed of the car Set to 3 5 ft min SPEED COMMAND 2 Sets approach speed of the car Set to 12 0 ft min SPEED COMMAND 3 Sets inspection speed of the car Set to 45 0 ft min SPEED COMMAND 4 Sets contract speed of the car if the car speed is 200 ft min or less Set to the cars rated speed If the car is rated for a speed greater than 200 ft min set to 200 ft min If the cars rated speed is greater than 200 ft min go to the SPEED COMMAND 8 parameter otherwise go to step 7 Set SPEED COMMAND 8 to the contract speed of the car The remaining parameters in the Multistep Ref A3 sub menu are not used 1 Access the Power
199. enu Motor A5 MOTOR ID To obtain this value determine the motor speed at the rated excitation frequency without any slip using the formula _120 Rated Frequency No Slip Motor RPM If you cannot determine the motor speed with zero slip take the motor nameplate RPM and use it in the formula Round the number up to the nearest even whole number to determine motor poles If the motor that the drive is connected to has a synchronous no slip speed of 900 or 1200 RPM set this parameter to 6 POLE DFLT If the motor has a synchronous speed of 1800 RPM set this parameter to 4 POLE DFLT 19 RATED MTR PWR Rated motor horsepower or kilowatts Set to the value on the motor nameplate 20 RATED MTR VOLTS Rated motor voltage Set to the value on the motor nameplate 21 RATED EXCIT FREQ Frequency at which the motor is excited to obtain motor nameplate rated RPM Typically this is 60 Hz Set to the motor nameplate or manufac turer data sheet value 22 MOTOR MID VOLTS If the motor is rated for 208 230 volts set this parameter to 14 volts If the motor is rated for 400 480 volts set it to 28 volts 23 MOTOR MID FREQ Set to 3 hz 24 MOTOR MIN VOLTS If the motor is rated for 208 230 volts set to 4 volts If the motor is rated for 400 volts set to 9 volts If the motor is rated for 480 volts set to 8 volts 25 MOTOR MIN FREQ Set to 1hz 26 RATED MOTOR CURR Current required by the motor to obtain rated power at rated speed Set thi
200. eration up to ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 ACCEL Rate when increasing eleva tor speed Accel Jerk out 1 Rate of decrease of acceleration to ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 zero when approaching contract ele vator speed Decel Jerk in 1 Rate of increase of deceleration up to ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 Decel Rate when decreasing elevator speed Decel Jerk out 1 Rate of decrease of deceleration to ft s 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 zero when slowing the elevator to lev eling speed Accel Rate 2 Acceleration rate 2 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Decel Rate 2 Deceleration rate 2 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 7 99 3 55 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Table 3 5 HPV 900 Drive Parameters Me 15 3 56 Manual 42 02 2T00 Accel Jerk in 2 Rate of increase of acceleration up to ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 ACCEL Rate when increasing eleva tor speed Accel Jerk out 2 Rate of decrease of acceleration to ft s 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 zero when approaching contract ele vator speed Decel Jerk in 2 Rate of increase of deceleration up to ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 Decel Rate when decreasing elevator speed Decel Jerk out 2 Rate of decrease of deceleration to ft s 0 8 0 8 0 0 0 zero when slowing the elevator to lev eling speed Accel Rate 3 Acceleration rate 3 ft s J0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Decel Rate 3 Deceleration rate 3 ft s J0 7 99 3 00 7 99 Accel Jerk in 3 Rate of increase of acceleration up to ft s3
201. erify that the motor torque is between 15 as the car passes through the center of the hoistway 5 Verify that the flux reference found under Display Power Data D2 is 100 If not reduce the car speed until it is 6 With the car running from top to bottom and back observe EST NO LOAD CURR found under Display Power Data D2 Enter this estimated value into the parameter NO LOAD CURR 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 until the value of the EST NO LOAD CURR and the NO LOAD CURR are equal 8 Verify that the motor torque is still 15 and flux reference is still 100 If not adjust the NO LOAD CURR as needed 9 Increase the car speed to 100 of contract speed With balanced load still in the car run the car from top to bottom and back 10 While the caris running observe EST NO LOAD CURR found under Display Power Data D2 Compare this value to the value found under NO LOAD CURR found under Adjust Motor A5 11 If the EST NO LOAD CURR value is 2 larger than the NO LOAD CURR then increase FLUX SAT SLOPE 2 by 10 If the EST NO LOAD CURR and NO LOAD CURR values are within 2 continue to step 12 12 Repeat steps 9 and 10 until EST NO LOAD CURR and NO LOAD CURR are within 2 13 Place full load in the car Run the car at contract speed from top to bottom and back 3 68 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __ Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 900 AC Vector Dr 14 Observe EST RATED RPM found under Display Power Data D2 15
202. ern set for high speed 7 Inspection speed Insp speed Pattern set for inspection speed 8 Restart speed Restart The car restarted from between floors 9 State 9 State 9 24 Drive Error 0 No error 1 Up slowdown UP SLDN T O timeout 2 Down slowdown DN SLDN T O timeout 3 Relays pick error PICK ERROR 4 Relays drop error DROP ERROR 5 Brake pick error BRK PICK ERR 6 Brake drop error BRK DROP ERR 7 Overload error OVERLOAD 8 Low oil error LOW OIL 9 Low oil sensor LOW OIL SW activated 10 State 10 STATE 10 11 Drive fault DRIVE FAULT tripped 12 Drive fault FLT DETECTD detected 13 Fault resetting FLT RESETNG 14 Fault resetting off FLT RES WAIT 15 Too many drive TOO MANY FLTS faults 16 Up relevel time UP RELEV T O out 17 Down relevel tim DN REVEL TO eout 18 Up run timeout UP RUN T O 19 Down run time DN RUN T O out 20 Up slowdown UP SLDN T O timeout 21 Down slowdown DN SLDN T O timeout 22 Up normal termi UP NORM TERM nal 23 Down normal ter DN NORM TERM minal Contents __ Index _MCE Web 5 17 The Hand Held Unit Me Table 5 1 States Table Car V 6 26 and HHU Version 6 26 02 06 25 Drive Control O No error Error 1 Safety line open SAFETY LINE 2 Drive cannot run CANNOT RUN UP up 3 Drive cannot run CANNOT RUN DN down 4 Drive cannot run DRIVE FAILURE 5 Rope gripper ROPE GRIPPER activated 6 Door failure DOOR FAILURE 7 Relevel oscillation RELEVE
203. erspeed trip point Drive will 0 150 110 110 trip on a fault if motor speed exceeds this value This is a percentage of Motor Speed RPM entered in parameter 11 14 V Sense Minimum armature voltage above which tach 0 100 25 25 loss and reverse tach loss are operative Per centage of rated armature voltage param 7 15 Tach Sense Sets percentage of per unit tach feedback 0 100 5 5 below which a tach loss will be declared 16 Gearless Ratio Encoder wheel to motor sheave ratio for 1 19 1 1 Note 4 gearless applications Geared applications set to 1 because encoder is mounted on foo J oon motor shaft 17 Rated Ft Min Rated car speed in feet per minute FPM 5 2000 400 X 21 Accel Rate Maximum acceleration rate in ft sec2 Ft sec2 2 10 4 2 4 2 32 Field Sense Percentage of full motor field required to per 30 90 45 45 mit SCR drive to release speed regulator and pick LPR relay which picks loop contactor 40 Response Tracking delay between drive commanded RAD 1 15 6 0 6 0 speed and actual motor speed Sets band width of speed regulator Tracking delay sec 1 Response Higher values result in less delay tighter control 3 111 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Table 3 18 DSD 412 Drive Parameters Me 3 112 Ramp Manual 42 02 2T00 predictable rate upon clamping regulator Contents _ Index _MCE Web 41 System Inertia Sets
204. ested at the factory All drive parameters were preset based on the information provided in the controller order form The drive should run on inspection operation with very little effort If not verify that the motor information given to MCE was correct If not contact Engineering for assistance System Overview The control system uses the HPV 600 internal speed curve algorithm Adjustments to the accel rate jerk rates and decel rate are done through drive parameters Drive Programming The drive has been modified to meet MCE specifications If replacement of the drive is ever required please contact MCE Technical Support MCE will not accept any drive for warranty repair without a Return Material Authorization RMA number issued by Technical Support Removing boards from the drive without authorization may void the manufacturer warranty 3 4 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 600 Once the controller has been powered up the drive must be programmed to operate correctly with the equipment at the job site The drive was pre programmed based on the information provided in the electrical survey but it is important to confirm ALL parameters before attempt ing to run the car The drive may fault on initial power up due to incorrectly set parameters This is normal and may be ignored at this time e Verify that the voltage on the motor nameplate matches the voltage input to the drive If not contact MCE
205. ety actuating arm prior to performing this test Failure to prevent the safety from apply ing may result in the safety applying while the buffer is compressed Begin the test with Fully loaded car at the top floor with one floor added to the floor table The car should be level at the top floor The car should be on door disable The hand held must be displaying a position one floor above the actual top floor L 2 3 4 5 A Danger Connect a jumper on the down direction high speed D2S1 to D2S2 and low speed D1S1 to D1S2 slowdown Jump the Limit board safety contacts J 5 1 to J 5 2 and J 6 1 to J 6 2 Using the simplex parking parameter send the car to floor 1 The car will not slow down at the bottom floor and will impact the car buffer at contract speed Remove the slowdown and Limit board jumpers Remove any tiedown that may have been put on the safety Before moving the car ensure that the car and compensation ropes are in proper sheave grooves Move the car on inspection up off the buffer Check for buffer return the car or counterweight being racked and damage to the equipment 4 20 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __ Index _MCE Web Final Test Contract Speed Buffer Test Counterweight Before performing test ensure you read and complete Limit adjustments carefully and have checked hoistway over travel clearances A Danger Before performing this test ensure that the safety wi
206. ex__ _MCE Web The following table provides a list of parameters Table 5 29 Dispatcher Parameter Screen Parameters Main Menus floor neo HHU Display E a Units Help 1 Maximum number of cars 1 8 2 each Sets the maximum number of cars in the dispatcher group 2 Brake to brake run time 0 255 80 1 10 sec 3 High speed floor run time 1 255 20 1 10 sec 4 Door open or close time 1 255 25 1 10 sec 5 Door transition time 0 255 40 1 10 sec 6 Reassignment penalty 0 255 50 1 10 sec When the dispatcher analyzes ETA times and considers reas signing a hall call already assigned to a particular car the period of time set here is added to the ETA of the car under con sideration This penalty com pensates for the additional time the dispatcher will consume in reassigning the call 7 Reset fire status Yes 1 1 yes no Setting this parameter to 1 yes No 0 resets all internal memorized fire conditions If no fire input is active the group will return to normal operation DO NOT use this technique if in an actual fire situation The parameter will always return a No 8 Parameter 8 9 Parameter 9 10 Parking Main parking 0 32 0 floor Set this to the floor where at floor least one car should always park Setting this to zero will instruct the dispatcher to dynamically select all parking floors 11 Parking second priority 0 32 0 floor If an idle car is availab
207. f the rated capacity If not the counter weight needs to be adjusted If the car is too heavy weight needs to be added to the counter weight to get the car balanced between 40 and 50 of the rated capacity If the car is too light weight needs to be removed from the counterweight to get it balanced between 40 and 50 of the rated capacity Do not proceed with the adjustment process until the car is prop erly balanced 3 108 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index_ _MCE Web Magnetek DSD 412 DC Drive Drive Parameters There are four 4 primary parameters used in high speed adjustment of the DSD 412 drive 40 Response This parameter adjusts how closely the drive tracks the speed pattern Typical values are from 5 to 8 The higher the number the closer the tracking Too high a number will cause vibration in the car mostly noticed at slowdown because the drive is trying to regulate speed too closely Too small a number may cause to car to overshoot the floor due to poor tracking 41 System Inertia This parameter is the inertia of the elevator system It is the time in seconds it takes to accelerate the motor to base speed Typical values are from 0 5 to 2 5 Too large a number may cause vibration and too small a number will cause the speed regulator to become sluggish 42 Stability This parameter adjusts the amount of speed regulator damping This value is usually left at the default of 1 0 8 Current Regulator C
208. fault per sists replace Control board Note Restore Defaults will require all drive parameters be set to their correct values Curr Reg Fault Actual current does not match the commanded current Check incoming power Check motor parameters Check motor connections windings for open circuit Check main contactor for bad contact If OK bad current sensor or bad drive DCU Data Fault The DCU parameters are not set correctly Check all drive parameters Cycle power to drive If fault recurs go to Utility menu and select Restore Defaults If fault per sists replace Control board Note Restore Defaults will require all drive parameters be set to their correct values Dir Conflict Commanded direction from analog input does not match polarity of Up Dwn input Not used Drv Overload Encoder Fault The drive has exceeded the overload curve The drive is in a run con dition and encoder is not operating Check motor connections main contactor contacts and motor windings Make sure brake is lifting Verify encoder is properly connected and feedback matches motor speed Check encoder connections If drive has been running replace encoder If fault occurs on initial start up of drive swap A and A connections to drive May also be caused by high starting current Check for binds in machine or brake and proper balanc ing of car activated Extrn Fault 1 External Fault 1 input is Not
209. fer if it has failed to slow down at a terminal floor as intended Magnetek HPV 600 Drive 1 Refer to the job prints wiring diagrams Locate the sheet that shows the speed refer ence signal to the drive 2 For drives using one floor run logic typically 200 feet per minute or greater place a jumper from terminal TB1 14 to terminal TB1 22 on the drive 3 For drives not using one floor run logic typically under 200 feet per minute place a jumper from terminal TB1 14 to terminal TB1 21 on the drive The drive jumper will create a failure of the speed control system that will cause the drive not to initiate a slowdown at any floor Magnetek HPV 900 Drive 1 Refer to the job prints wiring diagrams Locate the sheet that shows the speed refer ence signal to the drive 2 For drives using one floor run logic typically 200 feet per minute or greater place a jumper from terminal TB1 55 to terminal TB1 7 on the drive 3 For drives not using one floor run logic typically under 200 feet per minute place a jumper from terminal TB1 55 to terminal TB1 6 on the drive The drive jumper will create a failure of the speed control system that will cause the drive not to initiate a slowdown at any floor Mitsubishi A500 Drive 1 Refer to the job prints wiring diagrams Locate the sheet that shows the drive inter face 2 Place a jumper from terminal SD to terminal RH on the drive The drive jumper will create a failure of the
210. ferent approach into the floor You may need to modify other deceleration parameters to get the desired ride 12 Observe the floor stops Make multi floor runs and one floor runs into a floor at the cen ter of the hoistway If the car is stopping short of the floor too high in the down and too low in the up increase the SPEED COMMAND 1 A3 parameter This will result in a faster leveling speed and cause the car to travel farther before stopping 13 Ifthe car is stopping past the floor too high in the up and too low in the down decrease the SPEED COMMAND 1 A3 parameter This will result in a slower leveling speed and cause the car to travel a shorter distance before stopping If you are unable to achieve consistent floor stops by modifying leveling speed the brake may not be adjusted properly Confirm that all brake voltages are set correctly and that the resis tance around the brake coil is connected properly The resistance can be changed to control brake set Less resistance causes a slower drop More resistance causes a quicker drop The car should now be running at contract speed with accurate floor stops and a smooth ride Remove all weights from the car and staying away from the terminal floors make one floor runs and multi floor runs up and down Add weight to the car approximately 100 pounds at a time Staying away from the terminal floors observe the one floor and multi floor runs to be sure that the car rides well under all l
211. fire operation 2 Lobby recall Lobby Recall Phase 1 lobby recall 3 Smoke detectors Smoke recall Lobby recall due to smoke detector activa tion on non lobby floor 4 Lobby smk det SmokeAlt Rec Phase 1 alternate recall due to smoke detector activation on lobby floor 5 State 5 State 5 6 Machine Room Mach Room Machine room smoke detector activated 7 State 7 State 7 8 Lower hoistway _ Low hoistway Hoistway smoke det below recall floor 5 Services 2 0 Init 1 Normal Group oper 2 Simplex Simplex Simplex operation 3 Independent Independent Car is in independent service 4 State 4 State 4 5 Dispatcher loss No dispatcher Car has lost communications with the group dispatcher 6 State 6 State 6 7 State 7 State 7 5 8 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index__ _MCE Web Main Menus Table 5 1 States Table Car V 6 26 and HHU Version 6 26 02 06 down 6 Services 3 0 Init 1 Normal 2 State 2 State 2 3 State 3 State 3 4 Lobby Recall Lobby Recall Lobby Recall 5 State 5 State 5 6 Attendant Attendant Car is in attendant service 7 State 7 State 7 State 7 8 State 8 State 8 State 8 7 Motion Control 0 Init 1 Normal 2 Position lost Lost Posit n Loss of car position Car will search for ter minal landing 3 Between floors Between fl W Car is between floors and in a waiting state wait 4 Between floors Between
212. front door will open 123 Independent Electric yes no no yes no The electric eye will reopen doors on inde eye will reopen doors pendent 124 Independent Allow yes no no yes no Allow the doors to close when no calls regis doors to close with no tered If this flag is OFF the doors will not calls registered close if there are no car calls registered 125 Enable gate and locks yes no no yes no When set to yes gate and lock bypass bypass switches switches on RB board will be operational 126 Rope gripper 0 none 0 2 0 each No rope gripper gt 0 1 GAL GAL rope gripper gt 1 When set the 110 overspeed input is acti vated If not connected to the governor must be wired to 110VDC Changing this parameter requires a controller powerdown afterwards 127 Insp Open door if level yes no no yes no When in in car inspection doors will open at a floor and on IN CAR automatically if the car is leveled at a floor insp If the flag is cleared door will stop any time the car does not move 128 Insp Enable contr yes no no yes no Allow construction Inspection with bypass Insp With bypass switches switches 129 Insp Disable top of car yes no no yes no When this flag is set the controller ignores inspection switch the top of car inspection input Set this flag if the car does not have a top of car inspec tion switch 130 Insp Disable in car yes no yes yes no When this flag is set the controller ignores inspection swi
213. front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 Open both doors This parameter is overridden by the Hold door open parameter for this floor pars 26 33 22 Open doors once at fifth 0 3 0 see Help After parking at this floor the car parking floor column will cycle open close indicated doors 0 Do not open doors 1 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 Open both doors This parameter is overridden by the Hold door open parameter for this floor pars 26 33 23 Open doors once at sixth 0 3 0 see Help After parking at this floor the car parking floor column will cycle open close indicated doors 0 Do not open doors 1 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 Open both doors This parameter is overridden by the Hold door open parameter for this floor pars 26 33 24 Open doors once at sev 0 3 0 see Help After parking at this floor the car enth parking floor column will cycle open close indicated doors 0 Do not open doors 1 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 Open both doors This parameter is overridden by the Hold door open parameter for this floor pars 26 33 25 Open doors once at 0 3 0 see Help After parking at this floor the car eighth parking floor column will cycle open close indicated doors 0 Do not open doors 1 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 Open both doors This parameter is overridden by the Hold door open parameter for this floor pars 26 33
214. g bracket Figure 1 7 Typical Encoder Installations Hoist motor 9 pin D Connector Velocity Encoder Hoist motor shaft Hoist motor shaft Isolator Phenolic bushing isolator Velocity Encoder 1 16 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index_ _MCE Web General Wiring Instructions It is very important that the encoder does not slip wobble bounce or vibrate due to poor instal lation of the shaft extension coupling or encoder mounting It is also important that the encoder housing be electrically insulated from the motor machine or other grounds if the encoder is manufactured by BEI An insulated encoder mount has been furnished with the BEI encoder However this type of mounting may not be practical for all applications therefore the best method for mounting the encoder and coupling it to the motor must be determined at the job site Encoder Isolation The encoder housing must be electrically isolated from the machine ground To check this 1 Measure the resistance between the encoder case and the frame of the motor The measured value must be infinite for complete isolation Encoder Wiring A shielded cable with an appropriate connector at the encoder end is provided The controller end of the cable exposes trimmed and tinned individual conductors The encoder cable must be routed into the controller cabinet in a separate conduit Connect the cable to the encoder using the cable connector
215. ge from Phase II to Phase fire recall 11 State 11 State 11 12 State 12 State 12 13 State 13 State 13 18 Emerg Power 0 Init 1 Off Line pwr 2 Normal Em pwr Car is operating in normal state selected car 3 Stopping Stopping Car is stopping at first available floor 4 State 4 State 4 5 Stopped Stopped Car is stopped 6 Recalling Recalling Car is recalling to designated floor on emer gency power 7 Recalled Recalled Car is recalled to designated floor 5 15 The Hand Held Unit Me Table 5 1 States Table Car V 6 26 and HHU Version 6 26 02 06 19 Earthquake 0 Init 1 Off Off 2 State 2 STATE 2 3 State 3 State 3 4 State 4 State 4 20 Relays 0 Init 1 Stopped Stopped Relays are de energized 2 Up Up Relays are energized for up run 3 Down Down Relays are energized for down run 4 Stopping up Stopping up Relays are energized for up slowdown 5 Stopping down Stopping dn Relays are energized for down slowdown 6 Wait Wait Delay prior to energizing relays 7 Pick error PICK ERROR The relays did not pick the relays proving circuit did not open when the drive went into run 8 Drop error DROP ERROR The relays did not drop The relays proving circuit did not close when all relays where dropped 9 State 9 State 9 21 Brake 0 Init 1 Off Off Brake relay is dropped 2 Lift wait Wait for Lift Delay on brake energiza
216. h handle will latch the calls The car should be removed from door disconnect operation before you run the car from the switch Car Door Operation If a door operator is used the software must be standard VVD software The set up is the same as described above To close the door the door close input to the CTOP board must be turned on As is the case for car switch operation the car direction and starting are controlled through the top and bottom floor car calls The car door will not close without a call above or below the car Hall Call Operation Hall calls may be used and will cause the attendant buzzer to sound when a hall call is registered and the car door is not in motion If you are providing an annunciation light panel in the car wire the hall call wires to the lights The buzzer will sound for 5 seconds then switch off for 10 seconds This will continue until you start the car The car will automatically slow down for hall calls if it is traveling in the proper direction To stop far a hall call in the opposite direction you have to release the car switch to stop at the floor When you stop at a floor it will cancel the up and down calls at the floor To bypass hall calls you can wire a bypass button to the bypass input on the CSTA board When this input is on the car will not slow down for calls as you pass them 6 4 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _ MCE Web Emergency Power Operation Emergency Power Operation
217. h higher priority with a valid floor setting have a parked car the available car will be assigned to this floor 18 Open doors once at park ing floor see Help column After parking at this floor the car will cycle open close indicated doors 0 Do not open doors 1 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 Open both doors This parameter is overridden by the Hold door open parameter for this floor pars 26 33 19 Open doors once at sec ond parking floor 0 3 see Help column After parking at this floor the car will cycle open close indicated doors 0 Do not open doors 1 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 Open both doors This parameter is overridden by the Hold door open parameter for this floor pars 26 33 20 Open doors once at third parking floor see Help column After parking at this floor the car will cycle open close indicated doors 0 Do not open doors 1 Open front doors 2 Open rear doors 3 Open both doors This parameter is overridden by the Hold door open parameter for this floor pars 26 33 5 74 Manual 42 02 2T00 Table 5 29 Dispatcher Parameter Screen Parameters Main Menus 21 Open doors once at 0 3 0 see Help After parking at this floor the car fourth parking floor column will cycle open close indicated doors 0 Do not open doors 1 Open
218. h weight is in the car It should be between 40 and 50 of the rated capacity If not the counterweighting needs to be adjusted If the car is too heavy weight needs to be added to the counterweight to get the car balanced between 40 and 50 of the rated capacity If the car is too light weight needs to be removed from the counterweight to get it balanced between 40 and 50 of the rated capacity Do not proceed with the adjustment process until the car is properly bal anced aon FW Contents Index _MCE Web 3 65 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A ek Motor Parameter Adjustments In order to perform correctly the drive needs to be programmed for the correct motor values and the correct volts hertz ratio so the motor will not stall with a load or at slow speed The fol lowing procedure establishes the volts hertz ratio 1 Place a full load into the car 2 Run the car up and down on inspection speed 3 Usinga hand tach monitor the speed of the car If the car is moving at less than the inspection speed programmed at SPEED COMMAND 3 A3 increase the value of CONTRACT MTR SPD A1 If the car is moving faster than the inspection speed programmed at SPEED COMMAND 3 A3 decrease the value of CONTRACT MTR SPD AD 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the car is moving at exactly the speed programmed at SPEED COMMAND 3 A3 Speed Curve Setting and Adjustment The Magnetek HPV 900 drive has an internal speed curve algorithm that cont
219. he Car top station be mounted in the car controller cabinet instead In these instances the less complex car top junction box is used in place of the car top station Car station Car operating panel interface Dispatcher If the car is part of a group dispatching components and software may be pro vided Normally dispatcher components are contained in a dedicated cabinet but if so ordered they may be installed in one of the car controller cabinets Hand Held Unit The HHU is a hand held programming and diagnostic tool that plugs into the Tricon serial communications stream using a simple telephone style plug 1 1 Tricon General I nformation Me Tricon provides e Lowand mid rise building application Performance up to 300 feet per minute Up to 32 single or double openings e Up to 6 cars in a control group e Extensive field programmability Car Controller Tricon controllers are available in both ASME A17 1 2000 compliant and non com pliant versions The system is compatible with industry available drives including e Magnetek HPV 600 AC vector drive e Magnetek HPV 900 AC vector drive e Yaskawa F7 AC vector drive e Mitsubishi A500 AC drive e Magnetek DSD412 DC drive A typical Tricon controller is shown to the right Typical component locations are called out on the following page 1 2 Manual 42 02 2700 _Contents Index _MCE Web Tricon Figure 1 1 Typical Controller Layout Control board CPU 5V
220. he Escape key will move the programmer back to the Sub Menu level Parameter Settings Check the following parameters to confirm they are set correctly for your application Note that many parameters are not listed because their default values will not need to be modified or they are not used in this application Adjust AO menu 1 Goto sub menu Drive AL 2 CONTRACT CAR SPD Rated contract speed of the car Set to the speed in feet per minute for which the car is rated 3 CONTRACT MTR SPD Set to the motor RPM that will make the car run at contract speed This is not the data from the motor nameplate This parameter sets the speed at which the drive will run the motor when the car is commanded to run at contract speed 4 Skip down to the ENCODER PULSES parameter Set to the number of pulses per rev olution PPR from the encoder nameplate Contents Index _MCE Web 3 27 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A ek Go to the S Curves A2 sub menu ACCEL RATE 0 Acceleration rate of speed curve function Set to 2 5 ft 2 DECEL RATE 0 Deceleration rate of speed curve function Set to 4 0 ft s2 ACCEL J ERK IN 0 Initial jerk rate of speed curve function Set to 3 0 ft s2 ACCEL J ERK OUT 0 J erk rate when transitioning from acceleration to contract speed Set to 3 0 ft s 10 DECEL J ERK IN 0 J erk rate when transitioning from contract speed to deceleration Set to 4 0 ft s 11 DECEL J ERK OUT 0 J erk rate when transitioni
221. he cars rated capacity in the car On inspection run the car so it about 10 feet above the center of the hoistway Place an Amprobe on one of the leads to the hoist motor While observing the display on the Amprobe run the car down on inspection operation through the center of the hoistway Write down the amperage displayed while the car passes by the chalk mark on the cables The value may vary slightly so average the value if necessary 7 Place the car about 10 feet below the center of the hoistway 8 While observing the display on the Amprobe run the car up through the center of the hoistway Write down the amperage displayed while the car passes by the chalk mark on the cables The value may vary slightly so average the value if necessary 9 Ignoring whether the recorded values were positive or negative if the value recorded while the car was running up was greater than the value running down the car is too heavy Remove 100 pounds of weight from the car and repeat steps 8 through 10 until the recorded values are equal but of opposite polarity 10 Ignoring whether the recorded values were positive or negative if the value recorded while the car was running down was greater than the value running up the car is too light Add 100 pounds of weight to the car and repeat steps 7 and 8 until the recorded values are equal but of opposite polarity When the values are equal but of opposite polarity the car is balanced Check how muc
222. he current status of the state machines The following table lists each state potential status display State Name HHU Label and an explanation Help where appropriate Main Menus If a Current State is in CAPITAL LETTERS it indicates an error condition Table 5 1 States Table Car V 6 26 and HHU Version 6 26 02 06 ID Name State State Name HHU Label Help 1 Master 0 Init Initialize System initialization 1 Normal 2 State 2 State 2 3 Loss of Commu NETWORK LOSS Loss of communication with any node nications card in control network 4 Invalid Parame INVALID PAR Invalid Parameter s ters 5 State 5 State 5 6 State 6 State 6 2 Inspection 0 Init 1 Top of car TOC Insp on Top of car inspection 2 In car In car insp In car inspection 3 Access Access Access inspection 4 Controller Insp control Inspection set from the controller switch 5 TOC input failure TOC FAILURE TOC inspection inputs do not agree 6 In car input fail IN CAR FAIL In car inspection inputs do not agree ure 7 Access failure ACCESS FAIL Access inspection inputs do not agree 8 Control failure CONTROL FAIL Controller inspection inputs do not agree 3 Services 1 0 Init 1 Normal Automatic 2 Fire Fire System is in a fire service 3 Inspection Inspection System is in inspection 4 Doors disabled Door disable Car doors are prevented from opening from the controller switch 5 State 5 St
223. her the recorded values were positive or negative if the value recorded while the car was running up was greater than the value running down the car is too heavy Remove 100 pounds of weight from the car and repeat previous steps until the recorded values are equal but of opposite polarity Ignoring whether the recorded values were positive or negative if the value recorded while the car was running down was greater than the value running up the car is too light Add 100 pounds of weight to the car and repeat preceding steps until the recorded values are equal but of opposite polarity When the values are equal but of opposite polarity the car is balanced Check how much weight is in the car It should be between 40 and 50 of the cars rated capacity If not the counterweighting needs to be adjusted If the car is too heavy weight needs to be added to the counterweight to get the car balanced between 40 and 50 of rated capac ity If the car is too light weight needs to be removed from the counterweight to get it balanced between 40 and 50 of rated capacity Do not proceed with the adjust ment process until the car is properly balanced Magnetek HPV 600 Motor Parameter Adjustments In order to perform correctly the drive needs to be programmed for the correct motor values Volts hertz ratio must be correctly set or the motor may stall with a load or at slow speed 1 2 3 Place a full load into the car Change inspection spee
224. ia ab eas 3 52 Running the Car ino 8 wR AS rr ERE er ENEEIER ENNEA EE ROE SIO RES 3 53 Drive Parameter Reference 6420 c0000400sseae i ienanser deeesiawnaveaaed 3 53 Drive Fauls axed ene ecssgennae enin kid En E ch hia A ETER eens 3 61 HPV 900 High Speed Adjustment 4i0s6cdasdeedi inetd ealeseesasieaisendaawea 3 65 EE a eie e E EEEN ee oe ee EOE TE E E 3 65 Motor Parameter Adjustments sassis siarisa siitti i dagr IEEE aAA eos 3 66 Speed Curve Setting and Adjustment cc cece cece cece cess eeeees 3 66 HPY 900 Adaptive Tuning 5 hss SSS kad 4a titti Shades Ia eels Ses 3 68 Broke Ado DOSi 54h hese 4 oe E ee ea 3 69 Yaskawa F7 Drive co ook 665 6 5 665 CR RG IN AE ka EE ENE EN Re OHS 3 72 De ET oc hak ee de ea ee eC Che bodes eeeksd eee 3 73 ie hp ee E wa oa a EET ET A OEE 3 73 Di Uke so Se a E I I ecedeesenonesdseeedsiucauaee ba 3 74 PU e trinene rire ease oe edd 0 heh i ees 3 74 Scaling Cor Speed to Mot soosi caacaddeseeakeda eels iido s Iitti hidis iasad 3 75 Parameter 01 03 Display Scaling side ees ct eee eee sedebereadeeerads 3 75 SA AII R E E EE ere e kes beak E E A A E head ede es 3 75 A a TTET T T T T TATTA T Rea eRe mh ml TTE ITET 3 75 Aa EEE A ELT ETE EEE TT 3 75 Maximum motor speed E1 04 Default 60Hz Setting 0 0 cee eee eee 3 76 Sample setup of O1 03 6 isa pckdewwaddsiaaneee eww nidesepaneebes ae teense 3 76 Eo io a a PE E cca eee 6 Lee 60640056 FER 6 5 TET EOT 3 77 Inspection Startup V f mo
225. icates the currently active menu Moving within the Current Menu To move within the current menu down through submenus or back up to the current menu use The 2 and 8 keys or the Up Down arrow keys Moving Between Submenus The submenu is displayed on the second line of the display To move between sub menus use the 4 and 6 keys or the Left and Right arrow keys A Bae l y Activating a Submenu To select the submenu to be the currently active menu or to select a displayed function screen from an active submenu press the key or the 8 key while the desired submenu is displayed Think of the key as an lt ENTER gt key OR with submenu selected After you select a submenu Dispatcher setup for example it will move to the top line of the display and its function screens will be listed one at a time on the second line The Hand Held Unit pM e Making an Entry in a Function Screen With the desired function displayed press the B key Return to Last Menu Press the star key Think ofthis as the lt ESCAPE gt key Jumping To jump through a long list quickly you can jump four topics at a time Press the B to jump up Press the B to jump down 5 4 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index_ _MCE Web Overview Navigating Suggestion Take a minute or two to experiment with moving around through the menus submenus and function screens You will pick it up quickly Menu organiz
226. iled to open fully timeout 22 Closing Closing Door is closing 23 Reopening Reopening Door is reopening after being in closing state 24 Closed Closed Door is closed door closed limit is made 25 Locking Locking Doors are locking 26 Locked Locked Door lock is made 27 Closing error CANNOT CLOSE Door failed to close timeout 28 Locking error CANNOT LOCK Door failed to lock timeout 29 Locked error UNLOCKED Lost gate or lock while car was moving 30 Opening error OPENING ERR Door failed to open timeout 31 State 31 State 31 32 State 32 State 32 33 State 33 State 33 34 State 34 State 34 11 Door Operator 0 Init 1 No door No door No door operator on this riser 2 Stopped open Stopped open Door is fully open and power removed 3 Stop closed Stopped closed Door is fully closed and power removed 4 Stopped ajar Stopped ajar Door is stopped neither fully opened nor closed and power is removed 5 Opening Opening Door is opening 6 Opened Opened Door is fully opened 7 Closing Closing Door is closing 8 Closed Closed Door is fully closed door close limit is on 9 Locking Locking Door is locking closing waiting for gates and locks 10 Drop cam Drop cam Drop retiring cam 11 Locked Locked Door is locked locks and gates are made 12 Closing error CLOSE ERROR Doors did not fully close Door close limit did not open in Par 17 13 Opening error
227. ill open the safety circuit e Physically verify that all hoistway doors are closed and locked Verify main line power supply voltage is as ordered as seen on the prints shipped with the controller 3 2 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index__ _MCE Web Controller Power Up Controller Power Up After powering up the controller for the first time check the following Power LEDs on Relay Board ON If not verify all transformer and power supply voltage levels are correct per the prints SAF LED on relay board ON If not troubleshoot the safety string pp BOOR Insp e Phase sequence monitor may be off The reverse phase monitor is OK if the red light is on If not check phase to phase voltage to see if voltage is correct and all fuses are intact If this is the case monitor not on shut off main line switch and swap two of the incoming feeds at the controller main terminal Locks LED ON If not find the open door lock Gate LED ON If not adjust the gate so it is closed when the doors are fully closed Limit board relay should be energized Temporarily jump the SF1 and SF2 contacts on the limit board until the board can be set up properly e UNT DNT LED ON Up normal limit Down normal limit If not troubleshoot the nor mal directional limits 1 024 CAR Boards are Communicating with the MPU Board To verify check the status of the three 3 LEDs on the top left hand of the I O24 labeled CTRL
228. indings and main contactor contacts Setup Fault 1 Rated motor speed poles and frequency not set correctly RATED EXCIT FREQ A5 RATED MTR SPEED A5 and MOTOR POLES A4 do not satisfy the formula 9 6 lt 120 Excit Freq Motor Poles Motor Speed lt 1222 3 Setup Fault 3 Motor Poles parameter not set correctly MOTOR POLES A4 must be set to an even number Setup Fault 5 Rated Motor Power and Rated Motor Voltage not set correctly Check RATED MOTOR PWR A4 RATED MTR VOLTS A4 They must satisfy the formula 07184 Motor Pwr Motor Voltage Drive Current Rating Setup Fault 6 Multi Step speed refer ence exceeds contract speed Check SPEED COMMAND 1 through SPEED COMMAND 16 and CONTRACT CAR SPD parameters Setup Fault 7 Run logic inputs not cor rectly defined Check LOG IN 1 TB1 16 through LOG IN 9 TB1 24 for cor rect setting Setup Fault 8 DIR CONFIRM C1 enabled RUN UP RUN DOWN not assigned as logic inputs SPD COM MAND SRC C1 not set to ANALOG I NPUT Not used Setup Fault 9 Incorrect setting of motor parameters Motor parameters must satisfy the following formulas MOTOR MIN VOLTS lt MOTOR MID VOLTS lt RATED MTR VOLTS MOTOR MIN FREQ lt MOTOR MID FREQ lt RATED EXCIT FREQ Confirm settings of motor parameters Stall Test Fault Motor current exceeds value of STAL TEST LVL for more than time period specified by
229. ine 3 40 Manual 42 02 2T00 Magnetek HPV 600 HPV 600 High Speed Adjustment Closed Loop The drive should be running on inspection speed at this point When commanded to run in the up direction the car should run up when commanded to run down the car should run down Use a hand tach to confirm that the speed displayed on the drive programmer at DISPLAY DO ELEVATOR DATA D1 SPEED REFERENCE exactly matches the speed of the car While observing the hand tach run the car up and down in the middle section of the hoistway Modify CONTRACT MTR SPEED under the ADJ UST AO MOTOR A5 menu to exactly achieve the speed displayed at SPEED REFERENCE Car Balancing In order for the drive to perform properly the car must be properly balanced Geared cars are typically balanced with 40 50 of the cars rated capacity To confirm this 1 2 aoe WwW 10 11 Access the car top Run the car on inspection to the center of the hoistway Stop the car so the crosshead on the counterweight is exactly adjacent to the crosshead on the car Place a chalk mark on the cables in the machine room and mark the hoist motor so that while the car is run from the machine room you will be able to tell when the car passes through the center of the hoistway Move the car to a convenient floor Place 40 of the cars rated capacity in the car On inspection run the car so it is about 10 feet above the center of the hoistway Place an Amprobe on
230. information that will help you understand and safely maintain MCE equipment We strongly recommend you review this preface and read this manual before installing adjusting or maintaining Motion Control Engineering equipment This preface dis cusses Safety and Other Symbol Meanings e Safety Precautions e Environmental Considerations e In This Guide Safety and Other Symbol Meanings A Danger This manual symbol is used to alert you to procedures instructions or situations which if not done properly might result in personal injury or substantial equipment damage A Caution This manual symbol is used to alert you to procedures instructions or situations which if not done properly might result in equipment damage This manual symbol is used to alert you to instructions or other immediately helpful information Safety Precautions A Danger This equipment is designed to comply with ASME A17 1 National Electrical Code CE and CAN CSA B44 1 ASME A17 5 and must be installed by a qualified contractor It is the responsibility of the contractor to make sure that the final installation complies with all local codes and is installed in a safe manner This equipment is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10 000 rms sym metrical amperes 600 volts maximum The three phase AC power supply to the Drive Isolation Transformer used with this equipment must originate from a fused disconnect switch or ci
231. ing System Components on page 2 2 Sensor head installation consists of installing the crosshead bracket the adaptor bracket and the sensor head assembly The sensor head assembly mounts to the adaptor bracket via a floating subassembly that allows the sensor head to move with tape or hoistway irregularities Tape guides at each end of the sensor assembly grip the hoistway tape and keep the sensors at the correct distance from the strip magnets Figure 2 4 Sensor Head Assembly Tape guide Floating bracket subassembly Hoistway Equipment pM e L 2 3 4 Clip the crosshead bracket to the crosshead Check that the bracket is square with the crosshead Bolt the adaptor bracket to the crosshead bracket Check that the adaptor bracket is square with the crosshead bracket Slide the sensor head mounting subassembly onto the adaptor bracket Remove the screws that hold the tape guide outer end caps in place and remove the caps Figure 2 5 Tape Guides Tape Guide closed Tape Guide open Position the sensor head assembly on the steel tape Replace the tape guide caps Reinsert the Screws Bolt the sensor head assembly to the subas sembly Adjust the mounting bracket and secure Connect the sensor head assembly to the interconnect box using the supplied cable If needed adjust the sensor assembly so it does not ride hard on one side of the uni strut bracket during any part of the trave
232. ing full load 1 Select the Default Motor option for the Motor ID parameter This will load default val ues into the motor data parameters to prepare the drive for the adaptive tune 2 Place a balanced load in the car Reduce the car speed to 70 of contract speed by changing the value of SPEED COMMAND 8 A3 3 Run the car from top to bottom and back While the car is running monitor the motor torque under Display Power Data D2 The torque should be between 15 If not verify that the car is balanced correctly If the car does not have compensation motor torque will vary depending on car position in the hoistway Verify that the motor torque is between 15 as the car passes through the center of the 3 44 Manual 42 02 2T00 hoistway 4 With the car running from top to bottom and back observe EST NO LOAD CURR found under Display Power Data D2 Enter this estimated value into the parame ter NO LOAD CURR A5 5 Repeat until the value of the EST NO LOAD CURR and the NO LOAD CURR A5 are equal 6 Verify that motor torque is still 15 and flux reference is still 100 If not adjust the NO LOAD CURR A5 as needed 7 Increase car speed to 100 of contract speed With a balanced load in the car run from top to bottom and back 8 While the car is running observe EST NO LOAD CURR found under Display Power Data D2 Compare this value to the value found under NO LOAD CURR found under Adjust Motor A
233. ing speed and cause the car to travel farther on before stopping 13 If the car is stopping past the floor too high in the up and too lowin the down decrease the SPEED COMMAND 1 A3 parameter This will result in slower leveling speed and cause the car to travel a shorter distance before stopping 3 If you are unable to achieve consistent floor stops by modifying leveling speed the brake may not be adjusted properly Confirm that all brake voltages are set correctly and that the resis tance around the brake coil is connected properly The resistance can be changed to control brake set Less resistance causes a slower drop More resistance causes a quicker drop The car should now be running at contract speed with accurate floor stops and a smooth ride Remove all weights from the car and staying away from the terminal floors make one floor runs and multi floor runs up and down Add weight to the car approximately 100 pounds at a time Staying away from the terminal floors observe one floor and multi floor runs to be sure that the car rides well under all load conditions Keep adding weight until the car has full load less the weight of anyone riding the car _Contents __ Index _MCE Web 3 43 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A ek HPV 600 Adaptive Tune If the motor is old and no data is available for it an adaptive tune must be performed The adap tive tune requires that the car is run at contract speed and is capable of lift
234. ion in Mode 1 or 2 When the drive is run in mode 1 or 2 and you encounter unusual performance high current with no motor speed unusual motor noise not present in mode 0 see the section below on clearing all of the parameters to factory setting Clearing the Drive Parameters to Factory Default If the drive performs unusually in mode 1 or 2 of closed loop operation you will have to clear the drive to the factory 3 default values You should clear all of the parameters with the encoder board installed 1 From the PU mode push help 2 times 2 Move the cursor with the arrow keys to 4 Pr Clear then push read 3 Move to 2 clear all then push read 4 Push write The display should say clear all parameters Contents __ Index _MCE Web 3 99 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Me You will have to change all factory default parameters values to the ones shown in the table for open loop operation It is best to start by running the car in the open loop mode as you have done to ensure you have entered all of the parameters properly The auto tune without the encoder board installed will have to be redone as well as the 300 parameters to run with the encoder and the higher performance modes Table 3 17 A500 Parameters Closed Loop Speed Control Pai Parameter name Parameter function 29 Accel Decel Profile 0 Linear Accel decel ramp 1 S shaped Accel decel ramp A 2 S shaped Acc
235. iring Connections for Properly Grounded Systems 00 eee ee eeeee 65 General Wiring Instructions ccc ccc cece eee c cece cence eees 1 16 Velocity Encoder Installation and Wiring ccc cece e cece cece eeeeeees 1 16 Encoder on eke ca nwnd kitt tt Peres PARRE ede ne bend ee EEEN 1 16 PCOS Isolation cdo eee Sew sod Raw NRA AAE eRe ERS 1 17 Pe Py 0h 9 6d 9 59 ooo nsaee 445 6008s eds taia 1 17 T Limit 2K Motor Speed Position Sensor 6 isscsccaeeeesad bua sedev ber eadadeoeasn 1 18 Mounting the Magnet Assembly inci scedaadeesvadsaucaads s beeaniaeannese va 1 18 Mounting the Speed Sensor 404 09 90 49 V4 0444444499 rnnr erreen ernen 119 Low Voltage Sa WINO 6 2 nko hho Gd b 08 dS Saks io id Ia OEN eieaa 1 20 Fiype leomna Do oy ds is oR eee hE REC Ee EOR 1 21 O Type Terminal Eoad scos srrrerkoeken ehbad i EERTE TIARE EEROR NEES 1 22 Ee Teminal Board 6 cen eid hae heeds ee eea he nh EERO PERRONE ERR 1 23 High Power Va bh Se eee ed ekeh seek DISKA nis dd ea eae Sees Lie Sees 1 24 Traveling Cable Wiring hie bak ke ed hse ewes Sones 4ooWSdeeew Rd e4ooeeSaes 1 24 Car Top Neuron Network Wiring 2s caw cannes cud dies 406000454 e Kode eves sede 1 24 Dispatcher Communication Wiring goods onc awe een aws 405 0A ae eee eR eee roo 1 24 Section 2 Hoistway Equipment Hoistway Eguipmient 65 i655 6 50 44944646 46500444 an EER CARERS SOE HOES 2 1 SET 9000 Landing System cc ccc cc ccc wc eee e cece eee eeees 2 2 Ho
236. is Floor patcher is open Invalid IDZ Magnet The car is lost or the zone magnet for this floor is not Floor here or there should be no zone magnet at this floor and one is installed Invalid Rear IDZ Magnet The car is lost or the rear zone magnet for this floor is Floor not here or there should be no rear zone magnet at this floor and one is installed Lobby Fuse Car This error indicates that the lobby button fuse on the car Floor local hall board is open Lobby Fuse Disp This error indicates that the lobby up button fuse on the Floor dispatcher is open Locks J umped The lock contacts are made although the doors are Floor opened doors cannot close because it is presumed that the lock contacts are jumped out Locks Opened While Running Lock contacts opened while car was moving Floor Lost GL While Running GL input lost while running Floor Low Oil Floor MG Switch Operated The car has been stopped by either the in car MG switch Floor or the lobby MG switch Missing Down Slowdown Vane A down slowdown vane is missing below floor given Floor Missing Up Slowdown Vane A up slowdown vane is missing above floor given Floor Motor Field Fault Motor field fault Floor No Communications With No communication with a remote board Card name No Dispatcher Com The car lost communications from the dispatcher Floor No parameter Oil Buffer Switch Oil buffer switch Floor Overload Tripped 5 20 Manual 42 02 2T00
237. is invalid Check all drive parameters Cycle power to drive If fault recurs go to Utility menu and select Restore Defaults f fault persists replace Control board Note The Restore Defaults selection will require all drive parameters to be set to their correct values Curr Reg Fault Actual current does not match commanded cur rent Check for proper incoming power Check motor parameters and verify proper settings Check motor connections and motor windings for open circuit Check main contactor for bad contact If OK bad current sensor or bad drive DCU Data Fault The DCU parameters are not set correctly Check all drive parameters Cycle power to drive If fault recurs go to Utility menu and select Restore Defaults f fault persists replace Control board Note The Restore Defaults selection will require all drive parameter to be set to their correct values Dir Conflict Commanded direction from analog input does not match polarity of Up Dwn input Not used Drv Overload Drive exceeded over load curve Check motor connections main contactor contacts and motor windings Make sure brake is lifting Verify encoder is properly connected and that feedback matches motor speed Extrn Fault 1 External Fault 1 input is activated Not used activated Extrn Fault 2 External Fault 2 input is Not used activated Extrn Fault 3 External Fault 3 input is Not used act
238. is enabled to run the drive is damaged E OC2 Over Current During Constant Speed Alarm Drive overheating Check cooling fan Consider using Magnetic Flux Vector Control Mode if using V F mode Auto tune motor to the drive E OC3 Over Current During Decel or Stop Alarm A Drive overheating Check cooling fan B Increase Decel time Pr 8 C Check brake unit FR BU H transistor or brake resistor if applicable D Output transistor module damaged Disconnect the motor from the M relay and try the drive If the drive trips as soon as it is enabled to run the drive is damaged 3 100 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index_ _MCE Web Mitsubishi A500 Variable Frequency Drive Brake Adjustment The following adjustments have been set from survey data The brake assembly and all pins should be cleaned thoroughly and all spring tensions set properly to hold 125 of car capacity prior to adjusting the brake driver Brake shoes should be checked to insure at least 95 surface contact If spring tensions are changed after this adjustment the brake driver will need to be completely readjusted Brake Adjustments e V I pot 1 Lifting Voltage e V I pot 2 Reveling Voltage V I pot 3 Running Voltage e Set Acceleration ACC1 to avoid rollback and starting brake bumps Set Deceleration to its maximum value DEC1 full CW Contents __ Index _MCE Web 3 101 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Brake Regulator P11 110 VDC G
239. is in sec 0 50 10 00 10 50 0 5 torque limit before Hit Torque Limit mes sage displayed SER2 INSP SPD Defines serial mode 2 Inspection ft min 0 100 30 30 only serial mode 2 SER2 RS CRP SPD Defines creep speed that will be used in ft min 0 100 10 10 rescue mode SER2 RS CPR Time Defines maximum time drive will continue ft min 0 100 180 180 to run at rescue creep speed only serial mode 2 SER2 FLT TOL Defines maximum time that may elapse sec 0 0 2 0 0 04 0 04 between valid run time messages before a serial fault is declared only serial mode 2 Rollback Gain Ant rollback gain 1 99 1 1 Notch Filter Frq Notch Filter Center Frequency Hz 5 60 20 20 Notch Filt Depth Notch filter maximum attenuation 0 100 0 0 MSPD Delay 1 4 Determine recognition time delay for a sec 0 00 10 0 10 00 0 00 defined multistep speed command A2 S Curves Accel Rate 0 Acceleration rate 0 ft s l0 7 99 3 00 3 50 Decel Rate 0 Deceleration rate 0 ft s 0 7 99 3 00 4 00 Accel Jerk in 0 Rate of increase of acceleration up to ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 5 0 ACCEL Rate when increasing elevator speed Accel Jerk out 0 Rate of decrease of acceleration to zero ftys3 0 8 0 8 0 5 0 when approaching contract elevator speed Decel Jerk in O Rate of increase of deceleration up to ft s3 0 8 0 8 0 5 0 3 32 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index__ _MCE Web Table 3 3 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Closed Loop Magnetek HPV 600
240. ispatcher to select a car for Code Blue recall when it is on Fire Recall mode 6 e Parameter Code Blue Wait Time will determine how long a car will sit at the Code Blue recall floor waiting for the operator to activate the Hospital Emergency key switch The time is in seconds e Parameter Code Blue Override Independent and Attendant will enable the dispatcher to select cars for Code Blue recall even when they are on Independent or Attendant service _Contents_ __Index__ _ MCE Web 6 9 Operations 6 10 Manual 42 02 2T00 MeE Numerics 5V 6A Power Supply 1 4 A A500 drive startup 3 91 AC Drive parameters MagneTek HPV 900 Drive 3 9 Yaskawa F7 Drive 3 79 Access 5 36 Access board 1 4 Access Inspection 6 2 ASME A17 1 2000 compliant 1 2 Attendant Operation One floor run 6 4 Attendant Service 5 26 5 28 5 78 6 3 B BMS board 1 6 5 66 5 82 Board identification 1 3 Brake 5 25 Parameters 5 43 Brake Adjustment A500 3 101 F7 3 89 HPV600 3 23 HPV900 3 69 Buffer tests 4 19 C Car Balancing 3 20 Car Controller Board Inputs 5 24 Car Diagnostics 5 6 Car Door Operation 5 26 5 27 5 28 5 37 5 38 5 39 5 40 5 41 6 4 Code Blue 5 52 Fire 5 45 Lobby 5 48 Parking 5 47 5 74 Car errors 5 6 5 19 Car Setup Parameters Screen 5 38 Car speed in FPM 2K Limit Gripper 4 13 Car Station Board 1 7 5 28 Car Top Inspection 6 2 Car Group Interconnection 1 24 CE Driver board 1 4 5 54 5 60 5 63 CE Indicato
241. istway Tape ao o4kasd ce cdadunadiead candade ended s iiad 2 3 Top Bracket and Hanger Installation 446904444000 deddee deeds nues ein eens devs 2 3 Bottom Bracket and Tensioner Installation cccecceeceeceeeeseees 2 4 Ame aa Box a yk ed Ph a oe eRe Reece EN 2 5 Sensor Head ING A cn caciadcenkasnseensesbeaeere aan keadcakecdeeadase ved 2 5 Mamet Fe a hd S040 4h oe HO 849d 4404 4ReS Sede ewe ade 2 7 Leveling Magnet Installation 0 ccc ccc cee cee c nonnerne renren 2 8 Towna DEES og ah 6s ek EOE A REOPEN 55 S44 RRS 2 10 No High Speed Operation Front Doors ONLY 00 ccc cece eee e eee snene 2 10 No High Speed Operation Front amp Rear DOOrs 0 ccc ccc cee eee e eens 2 11 High Speed Operation Front Door ONLY iiccidieeive rei soiavaiwie due dekeueeaned 2 12 High Speed Operation Front amp Rear DOOrS cece cece cece ne eneees 2 13 Landmg System CAI 5 ck sche ak irrt ent nae bend eedd a wawes ieee ddes i neeees 2 13 Limit and Slowdown Switches cccccccce ccc ccecccccccees 2 14 Section 3 Startup amp Drive Adjustment In this Secon 6 9 6 44 KAKO OKO D KEE K RAKED EEHERES RENTS EEE RHEL ER ERR ROO 3 1 Controller Inspection ee eT ee 3 2 Controller Power UP 44 464 644 04 4044064 00600 nk 06060 445 445 54 4009 4484 3 3 Magnetek HPV 600 ois ccc 5c see isinna 95 85s Ede k SEER EHS LHRH RES REE HS Ue 3 4 HPV 600 AC Drive Start Up Open Loop sccastiiesesaceedeved dandswnonaseets 3 4
242. ithout rolling back Settings of the following controller parameters can be used to delay the brake lift if required Parameter 81 automatic starts 84 inspection starts 86 releveling starts 3 24 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 600 1 Ensure the brake coil has been connected properly to the controller 2 Connect a meter across the F and F terminals of the drive Set the meter range high enough to measure the brake lifting voltage level for the job 3 With no inputs on at the J 1 terminal of the drive the V 1 4 pot will be selected Adjust the V 1 4 pot fully counterclockwise The meter should read approximately 30 volts 4 Turn the main line power OFF TEMPORARILY jump from AC2 P11A 100VDC relay board on the controller to J 1 1 on the driver 5 Turn the main line power ON Run the car on inspection and adjust the V I 1 Lift voltage pot until brake pick voltage required for the job is obtained 6 Turn the main line power OFF Remove the jumper from J 1 1 on the driver 7 Turn the main line power ON Run the car on inspection and wait until the LED over the V I 3 pot lights Adjust the V 1 3 hold voltage pot until approximately 60 brake lifting voltage is obtained or the brake holding voltage previously measured If the brake drops at this level stop the car turn the pot clockwise 1 full turn and attempt to run the car again 8 Whilerunning the car turn the inspection speed pot cou
243. itialize 2220 2 Wire Initial 1110 User Initialize 3330 3 Wire Initial A1 04 Enter Password If Al 04 does not match A1 05 parameters 0 9999 0 A1 01 thru Al 03 and A2 01 thru A2 32 can not be changed A1 05 Select Password 0 9999 0 Sequence B1 01 Reference Source Selects the frequency reference input source l 0 4 0 0 0 Operator 2 Serial Com4 Pulse Input 1 Terminals 3 Option PCB B1 02 Run Source Selects the run command input source 0 3 1 1 0 Operator 2 Serial Com 1 Terminals 3 Option PCB B1 03 Stopping Method Selects the stopping method 0 3 0 0 0 Ramp to Stop 2 DC Injection to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 3 Coast with Timer B1 04 Reverse Oper Prohibition of reverse operation 0 2 0 0 0 Reverse Enabled 1 Reverse Disabled 2 Exchange Phase change rotation direc tion DC Injection Braking B2 01 DCInj Start Freq DC Injection Braking Start Frequency speed Hz 0 0 10 0 1 5 1 5 B2 02 DCInj Current DC Injection Braking Current N A to Flux Vec 0 100 50 50 tor B2 03 DCInj Time Start DC Injection Braking Time at Start sec 0 00 10 00 0 00 A V F Control open loop 0 20 Flux Vector closed loop 0 0 B2 04 DCInj Time Stop DC Injection Braking Time at Stop sec 0 00 10 00 0 50 0 50 3 79 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A exe Accel Decel Field Adjustable Parameters are sha
244. ivated Extrn Fault 4 External Fault 4 input is Not used drive is open Fan Alarm Heatsink cooling fan not Check fan and connections Clean heatsink operating Fuse Fault The DC Bus fuse on the Check fuse If OK check motor connections Check motor for continuity from windings to ground If OK replace drive Ground Fault Sum of all phase cur rents exceeded 50 of rated drive amperage Disconnect motor from drive Cycle power to drive If problem clears possible bad motor or wiring If problem does not clear possible bad system ground or bad drive Hit Torque Limit Mtr id Fault Mtr Data Fault The measured current is equal or greater than the torque limit setting Invalid motor parame ters Verify car balance correct Verify motor and drive sizing Can be delayed by increasing value of TRQ LIM MSG DLY A1 parameter Check all drive parameters Cycle power to drive If fault recurs go to the Utility menu and select Restore Defaults f fault persists replace Control board Note The Restore Defaults selection will require all drive parameter to be set to their correct values Mtr Overload Motor has exceeded the motor overload curve Verify correct car balance Check for dragging brake or mechanical bind in machine or hoistway Verify setting of OVLD START LEVEL A1 and OVLD TIME OUT A1 parameters Check for bad motor Overcurr Fault Phase current exceeded 250 of rated
245. ive and will set all of the drive parameters to the MCE Drive default values Parameter A1 03 will display 0 after Initialization 3 85 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A axe Note 1 At the factory MCE sets parameters to the values in the MCE Set column and saves those values as defaults by setting parameter 02 03 1 In the field drive parameters can be reset to MCE Set values by setting parameter A1 03 1110 Field Adjustable parameters can then be re entered Note 2 Yaskawa drive software has been modified for this application Some of the parameters in this sheet are different and are not available in the drive manuals If a drive has been replaced in the field all parame ters should be entered manually and verified according to this parameter sheet Figure 3 2 Velocity Curve and S Curve Parameters Yaskawa F7 Velocity FPM Velocity High Speed Range Dio2 7y pe eS a P1 17 P1 18 C1 01 Acceleration Medium High Level Zero Speed P1 04 a P1 07 Time Table for Selection of S Curves Increasing the value time of an S curve parameter causes a longer smoother transition Range Velocity FPM Start Accel End Accel Start Decel End Decel 1 Less than P1 01 w P1 04 P1 05 w P1 06 w P1 07 2 Between P1 01 and P1 02 P1 08 P1 09 wP1 10 wP1 11 3 Between P1 02 and P1 03 P1 12 w P1 13 wP1 14 wP1 15 4 Greater than P1 03 P1 16 w P1 17 w P1 18 P1 19 w These are the only S curve pa
246. ive is exactly 1 hertz Using a hand tach monitor car speed If the car is moving at less than the inspection speed programmed increase the MOTOR MIN VOLTS Motor A5 menu If the car is moving faster decrease the parameter Repeat until the car is running at the speed programmed This is the final setting for MOTOR MIN VOLTS Reset the SPEED COMMAND 3 A3 parameter to 45 feet per minute or the desired inspection speed Contents Index _MCE Web 3 21 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A ek Speed Curve Setting and Adjustment The Magnetek HPV 600 drive has an internal speed curve algorithm that controls acceleration deceleration and jerk rates There are four independently selectable speed curves This system uses only the first Preliminary setting of speed curve parameters was done in the drive programming section The values entered at that time are designed to be somewhat aggressive to ensure that the car does not overshoot the floors but rather comes in slow This will prevent the car from running into the pit or the overhead until the final values for the speed curve are entered L 2 Place a balanced load in the car Disable the doors and place a car call two floors away from the present position of the car one floor away if the car speed is 200 feet per minute or less Keep the elevator away from the terminal floors at this time 3 10 11 While the car is running monitor car speed with a hand t
247. kg ee eee itet ee aE ENEE RAE PR EERE DOES 5 32 Dispatcher EP Hall Boas cc sedieecacseacd deeaseeiiaiiatiaiieieetedeedeeduane 5 34 Extension Board EXTEN esirsirsiirit ritn EASES EEIE ered REAR ROR 5 36 hoot oe eee ar E ETANTE EET EEE T E ETET TT 5 38 Param cles 6 6 aati 628 hao e npr RAL Od KEKE ERETRIA INRENA 3 38 Fire Poe Per UGS oni dch csc ckidwias otendideeades a haeebiereabins se 5 49 Ts hae be bad si rh eauwew sues oen tags Hide a chiens ee 5 50 To view all the floors use he ss ico b ccc gad ede e ese ranra eeeeebeesd RETEA IIA RA 5 50 AACR TINO T E E Coe ele ee ee ee eh bee bed Dee Reo eee EEEE 5 51 Floor Table Sp cial Conditions orrec ewes eas bea eee see tar Pee EEE ORO RE REE EOE OS 5 51 Group Assignments View amp Edit Screen 0 ccc cee cece enn renne 5 52 To view all the floors use the oo coc saccad eden eee ea ben peaten tens earearearasaceaane 5 52 TOSA 43442510 irt ied ede s dee nad eek eed eed eeeeeeeee 5 52 Car Soft Lockouts View amp Edit Screen 0 ccc cen een tenn teens 5 53 To view all the floors use the s srsrrsrierierisrreer ertor er ristis ris rist iss anys 5 53 Too tolo recreire eae nEs heehee O ETTET ET 5 53 CE Indicator Set Up View amp Edit Saree oi cca nunnu nn nunne runnner 5 54 Toselectafloor to VIEW sscrerrsirssres d sdra r EMER RAE RHE Re eRGe Roe eK RT RRS RE RL 5 55 Toedittheselecdted loor 3 5 os or oe eos tr Arrin ENITEN EIERS E ENERE 556 Position Indicators View amp Edit Scree
248. l 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index_ _MCE Web Main Menus Floor Table The floor table setup screen describes the building to the dispatcher Figure 5 17 Dispatcher Floor Table Screen To move into the Floor Table screen use 8 or key To return to the previous menu use key Table 5 30 Dispatcher Floor Table Parameters Editable Fields Description Value Riser 1 32 Floor 1 33 Front up yes no Front down yes no Rear up yes no Rear down yes no CB front Code Blue yes no CB rear Code Blue yes no To view all the floors use the 2 or up arrow key to move backwards one 1 floor e 8 or down arrow key to move forward one 1 floor To edit a floor Press the key When you are on the desired floor you will see a blinking cursor e Keep pressing the key until you reach the desired field Enter the value using the numbers on the keypad or the Yes No keys e Press the key to accept You will move to the next field If you are on the last field you will move back to a view screen e Press the key to abort change You will be back to a view screen To return to the Dispatcher Setup menu use the key _Contents __ Index _MCE Web 5 79 The Hand Held Unit A axe Dispatcher Input amp Outputs Figure 5 18 Dispatcher Inputs and Outputs Screen The Input amp Output menu consists of three 3 sub menus I O boards DHA
249. l through the hoistway Interconnect box Va Tape guide raat Sensor assembly Adaptor bracket Ne Steel tape 2 6 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index_ _MCE Web SET 9000 Landing System Magnet I nstallation The floor leveling and slowdown magnetic strips are 6 inches long Install all floor leveling magnets before installing one floor run up high speed up one floor run down and high speed down magnets Two speed operation requires leveling one floor run up and one floor run down magnets only Three speed operation requires leveling one floor run up one floor run down high speed up and high speed down magnets Selective installations front and rear car doors require in addition to the appropriate two speed or three speed operation magnets front and rear door zone magnets Door zone magnets are placed to the left front door zone and right rear door zone of the lev eling magnet Consistent measurement is the key to good installation Cut a stick to the slowdown distance required for the job and use it to install all one floor run magnets For three speed jobs cut a second stick for the high speed magnets This will ensure consistent slowdown targets Even if the targets are installed at an incorrect distance by up to 2 inches the speed board in most cases may be adjusted to accommodate Floor leveling magnets are placed in the center of the tape Up slowdown magne
250. l back This can be seen with a voltmeter on the output of the control F F Moving the car on inspection with all loads and direction starts observe the brake release as well as the start of the car Slowing the Acc rate will release the brake when the loop current is sufficient to hold the car without tolling back Settings of the following controller parameters can be used to delay the brake lift if required Parameter 81 automatic starts 84 inspection starts 86 releveling starts Contents Index _MCE Web 3 89 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A eE 10 Ensure the brake coil has been connected properly to the controller Connect a meter across the F and F terminals of the drive Set the meter range high enough to measure the brake lifting voltage level for the job With no inputs on at the J 1 terminal of the drive the V I 4 pot will be selected Adjust the V 1 4 pot fully counterclockwise The meter should read approximately 30 volts Turn the main line power OFF TEMPORARILY jump from AC2 P11A 100VDC relay board on the controller to J 1 1 on the driver Turn the main line power ON Run the car on inspection and adjust the V I 1 Lift voltage pot until brake pick voltage required for the job is obtained Turn the main line power OFF Remove the jumper from J 1 1 on the driver Turn the main line power ON Run the car on inspection and wait until the LED over the V I 3 pot lights Adjust the V 1 3 hold voltage po
251. l conductor As current flows through the high power wire magnetic lines of flux voltage expand outwards around the out side of the wire and voltage from the magnetic lines of flux is induced in the low level conductor The low level conductor in the case of Tricon may be a 24 volt input that really only needs to see 12 volts to turn on If the voltage induced from the high power conductor is large enough to induce a 12 volt spike the input can falsely turn on How to Avoid Electrical Noise Problems The easiest way to avoid noise problems is to properly route high and low level signal wiring Keep low level wiring in separate conduit from high power wiring If high and low power wiring must be run in the same duct separate them by a minimum of three to four inches If one must cross the other it should be at a ninety degree angle A second way to protect against electrical noise problems is to run low level wiring in shielded cable The shield provides a conductor external to the actual signal wiring to collect any induced voltage from surrounding high power wiring The shield or drain as it is often referred to must be connected to ground at one end The shield or drain should never be connected to ground at both ends Contents Index _MCE Web 1 13 Tricon General I nformation A ek Possible EMI RFI Interference The main source of EMI RFI problems is semiconductor devices that switch at high frequencies such a
252. l rope gripper Refer to Section 4 for more information PI board I O 24 board with special position indicator software and up to three O type Terminal boards Used to provide expandable position indicator control e Gateway board When a car is part of a group a Gateway board is provided in the control ler cabinet to communicate with the group dispatcher 1 4 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Tricon Figure 1 2 1 O 24 Board with Terminal Boards at A B and C Positions PH HAMMER SurseEresarescers a REABBSBALBB RB board Provides power bus fuses and heavy duty relays for drive brake and motor con trol Also provides mode Inspection Normal and motion control switches for operating the elevator from the controller cabinet One of three different RB boards is used depend ing upon job requirements LAS wi BESSA al i inal RSE E Bb ni Tricon General I nformation ek Additional circuit boards may be used including EXT 1 board Used for additional input output capability BMS board Used to interface to a modem for central monitoring e MAC board Used to interface to a MAC door operator e HHSW board Modem interface for monitoring applications SLH board Fuse board for specific applications Door boards Door operator interface boards e CE Fixture boards with LON interface Used when extensive external fixtures are required Cartop Station The standard cartop s
253. l when OV is input asa 100 0 0 0 0 0 Bias percentage of max output frequency E1 04 100 0 H3 04 Term A3 Signal Sets the signal level of terminal A3 0 1 0 0 0 0 to 10VDC 1 10 to 10VDC H3 05 Terminal A3 Sel Terminal A3 Function Selection O 1F 1F 1F 1F Not Used H3 06 Terminal A3 Gain Sets the output level when 10V is input 0 0 100 0 100 0 1000 0 H3 07 Terminal A3 Bias Sets the frequency reference when OV is 100 0 0 0 0 0 input 100 0 Analog Outputs See H4 01 oda tis in F7 Drive anual H4 01 Terminal FM Sel Terminal FM Monitor Selection 1 99 1 1 1 Frequency Ref H4 02 Terminal FM Sets terminal FM output level when selected 0 0 100 0 100 0 Gain monitor is at 100 1000 0 H4 03 Terminal FM Bias Sets terminal FM output level when selected 110 0 to 0 0 0 0 monitor is at 0 110 0 H4 04 Terminal AM Sel Terminal AM Monitor Selection 1 99 2 2 2 Output Freq H4 05 Terminal AM Sets terminal AM output voltage in percent of 0 0 100 0 100 0 Gain 10Vdc when selected monitor is at 100 out 1000 0 H4 06 Terminal AM Bias Sets terminal FM output voltage in percent of 110 0 to 0 0 0 0 10Vdc when selected monitor is at 0 output 110 0 H4 07 AO Level Select Selects the signal level of terminal FM 0 2 0 0 1 0 Oto 10Vdc 1 10 to 10V 2 4to 20mA H4 08 AO Level Select Selects the signal level of terminal AM 0 2 0 0 2 0 Oto 10Vdc 1 10 to 10V 2 4 to 20mA Motor Overload L1 01 MOL Fault S
254. le to park floor and the Main parking floor when set to a number other than 0 has a parked car the available car will be assigned to this floor 12 Parking third priority 0 32 0 floor If an idle car is available to park floor and floors with higher priority with a valid floor setting have a parked car the available car will be assigned to this floor 13 Parking fourth priority 0 32 0 floor If an idle car is available to park and floors with higher priority with a valid floor setting have a parked car the available car will be assigned to this floor 5 73 The Hand Held Unit Me Table 5 29 Dispatcher Parameter Screen Parameters 14 Parking fifth priority floor 0 32 0 floor If an idle car is available to park and floors with higher priority with a valid floor setting have a parked car the available car will be assigned to this floor 15 Parking sixth priority floor floor If an idle car is available to park and floors with higher priority with a valid floor setting have a parked car the available car will be assigned to this floor 16 Parking seventh prior ity floor floor If an idle car is available to park and floors with higher priority with a valid floor setting have a parked car the available car will be assigned to this floor 17 Parking eighth priority floor floor If an idle car is available to park and floors wit
255. ling row typically row 2 center row but check your job prints to be certain Remove the backing from a leveling magnet strip and place it carefully in the correct row just under the level guide magnet a 4 Repeat these steps for each floor in the building 2 9 Hoistway Equipment A ek Slowdown Magnets One floor run up and down magnets are required on all jobs The distance from floor level cen ter of the leveling magnet to the top of a down slowdown magnet or to the bottom of an up slowdown magnet is called the slowdown distance Magnet placement instructions for your particular job are in the job print package provided The following descriptions are general guidelines only No High Speed Operation Front Doors ONLY For jobs not requiring high speed operation slowdown distance is typically one foot of slowdown for every 50 FPM of contract speed OR the shortest floor height divided by 2 5 whichever is smaller The table below pro vides slowdown distances for non high speed operation This distance may need to be adjusted depending on the rotating equipment used One floor run speeds are typically under 200 FPM with 8 6 floors Speed Slowdown Distance Min Floor Height 50 FPM TO 2 6 100 FPM 2 0 4 6 125 FPM 2 6 5 6 150 FPM 3 0 6 6 175 FPM 3 6 7 6 200 FPM 4 o 8 6 Magnet placement All magnets are NORTH POLE For Up Slowdowns Measurement is f
256. ll be able to tell when the car passes through the center of the hoistway Move the car to a convenient floor Place 40 of the car s rated capacity in the car On inspection run the car so it about 10 feet above the center of the hoistway Place an Amprobe on one of the leads to the hoist motor While observing the display on the Amprobe run the car down on inspection operation through the center of the hoistway Write down the amperage displayed while the car passes by the chalk mark on the cables The value may vary slightly so average the value if necessary 7 Place the car about 10 feet below the center of the hoistway ao e gw Contents Index _MCE Web 3 95 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A ek 8 While observing the display on the Amprobe run the car up through the center of the hoistway Write down the amperage displayed while the car passes by the chalk mark on the cables The value may vary slightly so average the value if necessary 9 Ignoring whether the recorded values were positive or negative if the value recorded while the car was running up was greater than the value running down the car is too heavy Remove 100 pounds of weight from the car and repeat steps 8 through 10 until the recorded values are equal but have opposite polarity 10 Ignoring whether the recorded values were positive or negative if the value recorded while the car was running down was greater than the value running up the car
257. ll not apply by tying down the safety actuating arm Failure to prevent the safety from applying may result in the safety applying while the buffer is compressed Begin the test with Empty car at the bottom floor with one floor added to the floor table 1 Connect a jumper on the down direction high speed U2S1 to U2S2 and low speed U1S1 to U1S2 slowdown 2 Jump the Limit board safety contacts J 5 1 to J 5 2 and J 6 1 to J 6 2 3 Using the simplex parking floor parameter send the car to the top floor The counter weight will not slow down at the bottom floor and will impact the buffer at contract speed 4 Remove the slowdown and Limit board jumpers 5 Remove any tiedown that may have been placed on the safety A Danger Before moving the car ensure that the car and compensation ropes are in proper sheave grooves Move the car on inspection to lift the counterweight up off the buffer Check for buffer return the car or counterweight being racked and damage to the equipment Contents __ Index _MCE Web 4 21 Release to Normal Operation A ek Governor Safety Test Preparation A Danger Only qualified elevator personal skilled in final adjustment and safety testing should per form the following test Safety tests have the potential to damage equipment e Over speed tests must be done as far as possible from the terminal landings e Over speeding will prevent the car from slowing down at the floor the ca
258. llows you to set up blink sound times for hall lanterns and or gongs _Contents __ Index _MCE Web 5 61 The Hand Held Unit RA exe To move between the sub menus use Aor left arrow key to move left 6 or right arrow key to move right To move into the sub menu use e 8 or key to move into sub menu making it the current menu To return to the previous menu use the key Floor Setup This Floor Setup screen has fields to enter values for position indicator out puts and to indicate whether or not there are hall lanterns associated with an opening To move into the Floor Setup screen use the 8 or key To retum to the previous menu use the key Figure 5 9 PI Board Setup Floor Setup Menu Position Indicator Board Entry here determines which relays on associated Terminal board will close to drive Potential Lantern Locations LU LD RLU RLD position indicators at this floor Y N Y N Floor Y indicates lantern is present at this location N indicates no lantern at this position LU Front opening Up lantern LD Front opening Down lantern RLU Rear opening Up lantern RLD Rear opening Down lantern 5 62 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Main Menus Ifa value is entered in a PI entry field the associated board is used to drive position indi cator outputs at this floor The value entered determines which relay or relays in the group will be enabled
259. lowdown is broken the safety circuit will open and a tach failure fault will be detected UP and DN inputs are both off indicating that the caris not in motion and the limit board senses speed Safety will be opened Car speed on inspection exceeds 125 FPM DZBP Door Zone Bypass is on and car speed exceeds 125 FPM Relay sequencing test fails Each time the car comes to a halt the board sequentially one at a time tests three relays for the gripper and monitors the result Relays are tested individually to prevent the gripper from applying and opening the safety circuit Contents __ Index _MCE Web 4 17 Release to Normal Operation pe Fault Operation The last detected fault is displayed on LEDs DS17 through DS21 as a binary value The values of each lighted LED are summed to determine the active fault Sum of lighted LEDs Fault ID N oOo O OY N Tr TN N WN V 0 v HD ND N QoQ AOA A A A A 1 2 4 8 16 32 CN 1 4 5 Overspeed at HDSL When a fault occurs LED DS25 will blink slowly once per second Table 4 3 2K Limit Gripper Fault Identification Table ID Fault 0 No Tights No fault 1 Overspeed up 2 Overspeed down 3 Overspeed at HUSL MPU 2 V2 xx Overspeed at terminal up MPU 2 V3 xx 4 Overspeed at USL MPU 2 V2 xx Overspeed in DZ up MPU 2 V3 xx 5 Overspeed at HDSL MPU 2 V2 xx Overspeed at terminal down MPU 2 V3 xx 6 Overspeed at DSL MPU 2 V
260. m access switch Pressing the bottom floor car call will close the doors and move the car down The next car call will move the car up If car open and close buttons are operational a door will only open if the car is in a door zone 6 2 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index_ _MCE Web Car Switch Operation Car Switch Operation The controller can be used for car switch self leveling operation This can be done with stan dard car software or manual door operation software The standard drive software CTRL No 1 for cars 200 fpm or less or CTRL No 2 for cars greater than 200 fpm can be used All I O boards required for standard automatic operation are required for car switch operation Manual door software can be used with a standard car station or car switch Running the Car From the Hand Held The car may be run from the hand held unit for tune up purposes The door disable switch on the controller should be on Entering a floor in the simplex parking floor parameter 141 moves the car to the entered floor e Parking delay time parameter 142 should be set to 0 Before the car is run from the car switch the parking floor must be set to 0 and the door disable switch must be off If the door disable switch is on the car switch will latch the top and bottom floor car calls Setting Up Car Switch Operation To use car switch operation The car must be on attendant service To put the car on attendant
261. mance of this warranty Products that are not manufactured by MCE such as drives CRTs modems printers etc are not covered under the above warranty terms MCE however extends the same warranty terms that the original manufacturer of such equipment provide with their product refer to the warranty terms for such products in their respective manual End User License Agreement This End User License Agreement Agreement grants you the right to use the software con tained in this product the Software subject to the following restrictions You may not i copy the Software except for archive purposes consistent with your standard archive procedures ii transfer the Software to a third party apart from the entire product iii modify decompile disas semble reverse engineer or otherwise attempt to derive the source code of the Software iv export the Software or underlying technology in contravention of applicable U S and foreign export laws and regulations and v use the Software other than in connection with operation of the product LICENSOR S SUPPLIERS DO NOT MAKE OR PASS ON TO END USER OR ANY OTHER THIRD PARTY ANY EXPRESS IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION ON BEHALF OF SUCH SUPPLIERS INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON INFRINGE MENT TITLE MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Important Precautions and Useful Information This preface contains
262. med out while re leveling in the down direction Floor 5 19 The Hand Held Unit Me Table 5 2 Car Errors Display Table v6 26 Down Run Timeout Down run timeout Floor Down Slowdown Timeout Down slowdown timeout Floor Drive Fault The drive faulted Floor Emerg Power Car entered emergency power operation Floor Error Log Cleared The error log has been cleared No parameter Escape Hatch Open Escape hatch open Floor No Floors Defined No floors defined Gate and Locks J umped The gate and lock contacts are made although the doors Floor are opened doors cannot close because it is presumed that the gate and lock contacts are jumped out Gate J umped The gate contact is made although the doors are opened Floor doors cannot close because it is presumed that the gate contact is jumped out Gate Opened While Running Gate contact opened while the car was running Floor Governor Operated Governor operated Floor Hall Ack Indicators Fuse Car Hall ack lights fuse on the car s local hall board is open Floor Hall Ack Indicators Fuse Disp This error indicates that the hall acknowledgement indi Floor cators fuse on the dispatcher is open Hall Call Buttons Fuse Car This error indicates that the hall buttons fuse on the car Floor local hall board is open Hall Call Buttons Fuse Disp This error indicates that the hall buttons fuse on the d
263. mes on the bottom floor one floor run slow down magnet This can be seen by monitoring the DS relay on the SET9000 sensor inter face board LED D4 lights This slowdown switch opens D1S1 to D182 2 14 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Limit and Slowdown Switches Figure 2 6 Hoistway Switch Opening Electrically Correlated to Magnet Positions Final Limit Floor level 6 inches a Normal Limit Floor level 1 5 inches Is Floor Level Magnet Slow Down Jone Floor Run Up Magnet CTRL No 2 Software High Speed Slowdown Hion Speed Up Magnet High Speed gt 200 FPM ONLY In between Floor Level Magnets High Speed Down Magnet High Speed High Speed Slowdown io CTRL No 2 Software gt 200 FPM ONLY Slow Down LED D2 Jone Floor Run Down Magnet Board power indicator Normal Limit __ Floor level 1 5 inches ia Floor Level Magnet Final Limit P Floor level 6 inches O O O AY D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 DIO D1 LED D3 I oo ovo oa oe SS oS eo LED D4 SS a a Oo gi E e a 1 B DYOWODOGOOOO RE eee 110VAC 9 44 5gg LANDING SYSTEM SENSOR INTERFACE BOARD 8 S 3 3 Contents __ Index _MCE Web 2 15 Hoistway Equipment 2 16 Manual 42 02 2T00 MeE Th Fi Quick Topics Ln this Section Controller I nspection Controller Power Up Magnetek HPV 600 Magnetek HPV 900 Yaskawa F7 Mi
264. mmediately to the right of the floor level magnet Slowdown and Leveling magnets are NORTH POLE Door zone magnets are SOUTH POLE Down slowdown High speed slowdown minus 6 Slowdown inches distance minus 6 inches Front door zone Floor level Slowdown distance minus 6 inches Rear door zone High speed slowdown minus 6 inches Up slowdown 1 Install a door zone magnet for each door opening in its corresponding location If there are two openings at a floor install both door zone magnets Door zone magnets are SOUTH POLE Landing System Cabling Wire the cartop interconnect box as described in your job prints Relay outputs are dry contact 1 amp N O _Contents __ Index _MCE Web 2 13 Hoistway Equipment A ek Limit and Slowdown Switches The limit and slowdown switch arrangement for your particular job is described in the job prints Generally for car speeds under 200 feet per minute CTRL No 1 software Normal Limit The normal directional limits should be set open when the car is 1 5 before floor level at the terminal floors Final Limit The final limits should be set to open no sooner than 6 beyond the floor Top Terminal Slowdown The slowdown switch should be set to open immediately AFTER the US sensor comes on the top floor slowdown magnet This can be seen by monitoring the US relay on the SET9000 sensor interface board LED D3 lights This slowdown switch op
265. mode 110 Multistep Enable Allows enabling drive internal S curve func 0 0ff OFF OFF tions 1 ON 150 Preset Speed S Used with internal S Curve functions FPM 0 1000 0 0 0 0 164 Curve 170 Accel Decel S Used for Acc Dec when internal S Curve is Sec 0 25 0 5 0 5 0 173 Curve used 174 Jerk S Curve Percent Jerk of S Curve 0 100 30 0 30 0 177 Motor machine job dependent Actual speed value entered in FPM However speed range maximum value is described as percentage of contract speed Speeds in excess of defined maximum will cause drive to generate fault 450 Encoder PPR P10 must be set correctly Incorrect value will cause under or over speed condition Note 1 Parameter 9 is equal to isolation transformer secondary voltage Note 2 Only entries in Field MCE column are changed after drive Note 3 When Filling P 52 job entry verify that 1 25 lt P 9 P 52 lt 3 Otherwise a separate transformer for motor field supply is needed Note 4 Installer Verify parameter 10 and 16 for correct values They vary according to the installed encoder and mounting procedure see MagneTek manual CS0601 for an explanation of these parameters 3 113 Startup amp Drive Adjustment 3 114 Manual 42 02 2T00 MeE LEI Quick Topics m is Section t Board Adjustment Test wes Release to Normal Operation a In this Section Before the car can be released to normal operation speed and position
266. mon itor drive current at low speed to ensure torque boost is no higher than needed Mitsubishi Open Loop Volts Hertz Parameters The drive is shipped with the following parameters The parameters listed are those which have been adjusted differently than Mitsubishi factory drive defaults Table 3 15 Mitsubishi Open Loop Drive Parameters Par number Parameter name Parameter function Default value 0 Torque boost Greater torque at low speed 6 or less 1 Maximum frequency Maximum frequency limit 60 Hz 2 Minimum frequency Minimum frequency limit 2 5 Hz 3 Base frequency Motor nominal operating frequency 60 Hz 4 High speed High speed setting 60 Hz 5 Int speed Approach and low inspection speed setting 12 Hz 6 Int speed Leveling speed setting 8 Hz 7 Acceleration time 1 7 Sec 8 Deceleration time 2 Sec 9 Thermal overload relay Adjust to the motor nameplate Motor nominal current 10 DC Injection brake Adjusts the point the drive will begin to DC 0 7 Hz operating frequency inject for stopping the motor 11 DC Injection brake Adjusts the amount of time the DC will be 0 5 sec duration applied 12 DC Injection brake Adjusts the of motor voltage applied at the 5 voltage stop 19 Base frequency voltage Motor name plate voltage must be lt main Motor nominal voltage line VAC 22 Current limit Maximum current allowed in percentage of 160 drive nominal
267. motor and brake connections try moving the car on controller inspection If the direction of the motor is reversed reverse any two of the hoist motor wires The torque boost parameter may require some adjustment for low speed torque If set too high the final leveling speed current on automatic as well as low inspection speed will be very high This should be adjusted as lowas possible while still able to move full load at the final leveling speed The inspection speed may be low inspection speed parameter 5 or high inspection speed parameter 24 To run at high inspection speed set car parameter 132 to yes Contents Index _MCE Web 3 91 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A ek High Speed Adjustment Open Loop Volts Hertz This mode of operation uses torque boost at low speed to increase motor torque to keep the full load up and full load down leveling speeds approximately equal Final leveling speed parameter 6 can be reduced only if the motor has enough torque to level under all load conditions If final leveling speed is too slow the car may stall at leveling speed or leveling current may be too high There is no speed regulation or load compensation in open loop volts hertz mode All adjust ments may cause high acceleration deceleration and holding currents You must check these current levels after each adjustment to insure they are kept as low as possible 1 Adjust acceleration time parameter 7 for comfortable
268. n cause the auto tuning parameters to be stored incorrectly Always remove power from the drive before unplugging or plugging in the board Adjusting the Drive in MFVC Vector Mode Initial conditions Car may be run in inspection from the controller e Car load must be balanced The encoder board if provided must be unplugged from the drive before auto tuning e Always remove power from the drive before unplugging or plugging in a board 1 Move car to the lowest floor 2 Set the drive to PU by pressing the PU key 3 Set the following parameters Table 3 16 A500 Parameters MFVC Parameter Value FO OKT 1 60 Hz 2 0 Hz 3 60 Hz 4 60 Hz 5 6 Hz Cc BRE 7 2 Sec 8 2 Sec 9 Motor nameplate current 10 0 7 Hz II OB SCOT TB o ON 7 22 200 29 1 S curve 71 13 3 94 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __index_ _MCE Web Mitsubishi A500 Variable Frequency Drive Table 3 16 A500 Parameters MFVC 77 0 801will let you view the motor values stored and write enable 80 Motor horsepower multiplied by 0 746 Some of the typical values for this parameter 7 5 HP 5 5 10 HP 7 5 12 5 HP 9 3 15 HP 11 Motor Poles 120 frequency RPM 900 RPM 8 but use 4 to auto tune 81 1200 RPM 6 1800 RPM 4 83 Motor Voltage V Nameplate voltage Must be less than or equal to the input AC line voltage 84 60 Hz 96 Auto Tuning Enable Use 1 to tune with
269. n page 3 4 Before attempting to run the drive confirm that the parameters are set correctly Verify that parameters in the drive match those in the Test sheets For detailed information about the pro gramming unit please refer to the Magnetek HPV 600 manual Using the HPV600 Drive Programmer The HPV 600 programmer is used to pro gram the drive and to display drive data The programmer has three menu levels e Menu level e Sub menu level Entry level There are five keys on the front of the programmer These keys perform different functions depending on which menu level is active At the Main Menu level the left and right arrows move the programmer between Main Menu 3 selections The up and down keys move the programmer into the various Sub Menus at each Main Menu selection Pressing the Enter key will move the programmer into the Sub Menu cur rently displayed At the Sub Menu level the up and down arrows display various parameters in the Sub Menu Pressing the Escape key will move the programmer back to the Main Menu level Pressing the Enter key while at the Sub Menu level moves the programmer into the Entry level to modify the displayed parameter At the Entry level the left and right arrows move a cursor to highlight data When a digit is highlighted pressing the up arrow will increase the value and pressing the down arrow will decrease it Pressing the Enter key will save the value displayed on the programmer Pressing t
270. n the opposite direction stop the car and Reverse any two of the hoist motor wires e Verify that elevator operates in the proper direction Run elevator up and down to check the hoistway Please refer to Scaling Car Speed to Motor on page 3 75 for V f Open Loop controls 3 78 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index _MCE Web Table 3 14 Yaskawa F7 Drive Parameters Yaskawa F7 Drive Field Adjustable Parameter cells are shaded All other parameters should be set to the values shown in the Field MCE Set column WARNING Parameters with an asterisk must be set correctly for your motor machine job Digital Operator guia z Setting MCE Field No Display Parameter Description Unit Range Defaults MCE Set Initialization A1 00 Select Language Selects the language for the Digital Operator 0 6 0 0 0 English 3 Francais 6 Portuguese 1 Japanese 4 Italiano 2 Deutsch 5 Espanol A1 01 Access Level Sets parameters accessible by Digital Operator 0 2 2 2 0 Operation Only 1 User Level A2 parameters must be set 2 Advanced Level A1 02 Control Method Selects the drive control method 0 3 0 0 V F without PG 2 Open Loop Vector 1 V F with PG 3 Flux Vector closed loop V F Control open loop 0 Flux Vector closed loop 3 A1 03 Init Parameters Sets parameters to default values see Note 1 0 3330 O O 0 No In
271. n to the terminal landings while in a learn mode Please refer to Operation Inspection Setup Before High Speed on page 4 7 Please refer to Operation Normal Setup High Speed on page 4 7 If any car speed or slowdown adjustments are made after the limits are learned the Limit board learn process must be repeated The limit board must learn the speed of the car on Inspection to provide inspection speed protection The car should be fully adjusted in high speed without going to the terminal landings The hoistway limits must be set to open at the same distance from the terminal landing as the selector magnet slowdowns The board will open the safety circuit output stopping the car if any of the following conditions are detected The car runs at 150 of the learned inspection speed after the inspection speed has been learned This is used for inspection operation before the limit board speed feedback has been scaled at high speed Please refer to Operation Inspection Setup Before High Speed on page 4 7 The car runs at 10 above contract speed or one floor run speed This allows detection of an overspeed of the one floor run learned speed as well as high speed multi floor run overspeeds The car exceeds 30 of contract speed in the opposite direction from the intended direc tion Direction slowdown inputs operate without any tach feedback This allows a tach loss to be detected The car is
272. nd B1 CTRL BR L J1 1 V I1 y Cy Cir J1 2 V2 123411 212 1 3 V3 papas NoteS The contact Z J1 5 Dec 2 leo Ihe Col S ero eee J1 6 Input Com shown here may not be the same as your a controller Refer to your controller schematics H l ond To 208 VAC Power Note 1 The control has four input selections J1 1 J1 4 The inputs select the voltage pots V I1 V I4 The inputs have priority over all other inputs with J1 1 having the highest priority The LED below the pot will show the active pot Acc1 and Dec 1 are active unless J1 5 or J1 6 inputs are on Tricon does not use Acc 2 or Dec 2 Clockwise rotation of the pots will raise the voltage output of the control Note 3 The releveling brake uses the V 2 pot If you have difficulty controlling rollback when releveling adjust V 2 to partially release the brake Note 4 V I1 Lifting V I2 Releveling o VIM Holding Note 2 Clockwise rotation of Acc1 and Dec1 will quicken the Acc1 Ramp up rate ramp up or ramp down rate of the voltage output Initially start Dec1 Ramp down rate with Acc1 fully clockwise fastest rate After all motor control adjustments have been made a ramped release of the brake may be required to control roll back This can be seen with a voltmeter on the output of the control F F Moving the car on inspection with all loads and direction starts observe the brake release as well as the start of the car Sl
273. nd The connection at the car controller must be free of paint so the ground connection is made to the bare metal of the enclo sure The car controller should read less than 1 ohm to ground with the power off Ground straps or short loops of ground wire should be run from the controller ground connection to the primary duct connections An uninterrupted 8 AWG ground wire should be run from the hoist motor frame to the controller ground The ground connection to the hoist motor must be free of paint A continuous looped ground wire should be run from each hall lantern and position fix ture box to controller ground The ground connection at each fixture should make an electrical connection to the bare metal of the fixture box and its cover This connection should be free of paint An uninterrupted ground wire of minimum 14 AWG should be run from a termination point on the cab to the controller ground An uninterrupted ground wire should be run from the cab enclosure to the ground ter minal on the cab to protect passengers and personnel from electrical shock An uninterrupted ground wire should be run from each car operating panel to the ground terminal on the cab to protect passengers and personnel from electrical shock An uninterrupted ground wire should be run from the dispatch cabinet chassis or back plate to earth ground The connection at the dispatch cabinet must be free of paint so the ground connection is made to the bare metal of the en
274. nd Held Unit A ek Dispatcher Setup The Dispatcher Setup menu includes e Parameters Floor table e Disp Inputs amp Outputs e Clock e BMS Setup Parameters The dispatcher setup screen allows viewing and modification of car controller parameters To move into the Parameter screen use 8 or key To return to the previous menu use key To view all the parameters use the 2 or up arrow key to move backwards one 1 parame ter 7 amp 1 keys together to move backwards ten 10 parameters 9 amp 3 keys together to move backwards twenty 20 parameters 8 or down arrow key to move forward one 1 parameter 7 amp 1 keys together to move forward ten 10 parameters 9 amp 3 keys together to move forward twenty 20 parameters To change a numeric parameter Press the key You will see a blinking cursor Enter the value using the numbers on the key pad e Press the key to accept You will move back to a view screen e Press the key to abort change You will move back to a view screen To change a Yes No flag e Press the key You will see a blinking cursor e Press the Yes or 2 key for yes Press the No or 8 key for no e Press the key to accept You will move back to a view screen e Press the key to abort change You will move back to a view screen To return to the Parameters menu must be at a view screen use the key 5 72 Manual 42 02 2700 Contents __Ind
275. ne voltage when AC power is connected Never operate Tricon controls with covers removed from drive or brake controls After AC power has been removed internal capacitors can remain charged for up to 5 min utes Wait at least 5 minutes after power down before touching any internal components To prevent the risk of shock all equipment should be securely grounded to earth ground with a minimum of 8 AWG wire as outlined in the National Electrical Code Failure to obtain an actual earth ground may result in electrical shock to personnel When using test equipment oscilloscopes etc with a power cord that electrically ties probe common to earth ground an isolation transformer should be used to isolate the instrument common from earth ground Remain clear of all rotating equipment while working on the controls Equipment Safety All equipment should be securely grounded to earth ground with a minimum of 8 AWG wire as outlined in the National Electrical Code Failure to obtain a true earth ground may result in electrical shock Improper grounding is the most common cause of electrical component failure and noise induced problems Replace components only with main line power off Damage to equipment or unexpected operation of the elevator may occur if this precaution is not observed Substitution of parts or unauthorized modifications should not be attempted before first contacting Motion Control Engineering to ensure all safety features are main
276. ng back Settings of the following controller parameters can be used to delay the brake lift if required Parameter 81 automatic starts 84 inspection starts 86 releveling starts 3 70 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 900 AC Vector Drive 1 Ensure the brake coil has been connected properly to the controller 2 Connect a meter across the F and F terminals of the drive Set the meter range high enough to measure the brake lifting voltage level for the job 3 With no inputs on at the J 1 terminal of the drive the V 1 4 pot will be selected Adjust the V 1 4 pot fully counterclockwise The meter should read approximately 30 volts 4 Turn the main line power OFF TEMPORARILY jump from AC2 P11A 100VDC relay board on the controller to J 1 1 on the driver 5 Turn the main line power ON Run the car on inspection and adjust the V I 1 Lift voltage pot until brake pick voltage required for the job is obtained 6 Turn the main line power OFF Remove the jumper from J 1 10n the driver 7 Turn the main line power ON Run the car on inspection and wait until the LED over the V I 3 pot lights Adjust the V 1 3 hold voltage pot until approximately 60 brake lifting voltage is obtained or the brake holding voltage previously measured If the brake drops at this level stop the car turn the pot clockwise 1 full turn and attempt to run the car again 8 Whilerunning the car turn the inspection speed pot c
277. ng from deceleration to leveling speed Set to 4 0 ft s Remaining S Curves A2 parameters are not used OC ONAL 1 Access the Multistep Ref A3 sub menu SPEED COMMAND 1 Leveling speed of the car Set to 3 5 ft min SPEED COMMAND 2 Approach speed of the car Set to 12 0 ft min SPEED COMMAND 3 Inspection speed of the car Set to 45 0 ft min SPEED COMMAND 4 Contract speed of the car If less than 200 ft min set to cars rated speed If the car is rated for a speed greater than 200 ft min set to 200 ft min If the cars rated speed is greater than 200 ft min go to the SPEED COMMAND 8 parameter 7 Set SPEED COMMAND 8 to contract speed Remaining Multistep Ref A3 sub menu parameters are not used Ue WN D 1 Access the Power Convert A4 sub menu 2 INPUT L L VOLTS parameter Input line voltage This value is used by the drive to declare a low line voltage fault Set to the nominal AC voltage at the input to the drive 3 Go to sub menu Motor A5 4 MOTOR ID To obtain this value determine the motor speed at the rated excitation frequency without any slip The formula is _120 Rated Frequency No Slip Motor RPM If you cannot determine motor speed with zero slip take the motor nameplate RPM and use it in the formula Round the number up to the nearest even whole number to determine motor poles If the motor has a synchronous no slip speed of 900 or 1200 RPM set this parameter to 6 POLE DFLT If the moto
278. ng this parameter count to zero disables this feature 148 Disable access inspec 0 255 1 each 0 Enable tion switch 1 Disable 2 Bottom rear 3 Top rear 149 Parameter 149 0 each 150 Encoder Medium speed 0 120 0 each look ahead distance 151 Encoder High speed 0 250 JO each look ahead distance 152 Encoder Medium speed 24 1000 48 each slowdown distance 153 Encoder High speed 0 72 1200 each slowdown distance 154 Encoder Disable auto yes no no yes no reset 5 47 The Hand Held Unit Table 5 18 Car Setup Parameters Screen Me 155 Emerg Power Enable yes no no yes no Set to yes if emergency power operation is emergency power oper allowed for this car ation 156 Emerg Power Recall yes no no yes no Emergency Power Recall recalls cars on cars on Indep Or Atten Independent or Attendant dant 157 Lobby return Return 0 32 0 floor Determines lobby return floor A zero will floor disable lobby return feature 158 Lobby return Drop car yes no no yes no When set activation of the lobby return calls immediately switch will immediately drop all registered car calls 159 Lobby return Open 0 3 0 each When the car is returned to the lobby recall door once floor cycle the selected door s one time 0 no 1 front 2 rear 3 both 160 Lobby ret Hold doors 0 3 0 each When the car is returned to the lobby recall open floor open and hold open
279. not reopen or reopen buzzer only 41 Rdoor Time after clos O 255 20 each If the car has a direction and the doors can ing start to begin nudg not close after this time expires the door ing will assume nudging operation 42 Rdoor op Open time 0 25 5 15 sec If the doors cannot open in this time they out time will reclose and try again until the retry count is reached 43 Rdoor op Close time O 25 5 15 sec Rear door close T O time out time 44 Rdoor op Door lock fail 0 25 5 3 sec Rear door lock T O time ure timeout time 45 Rdoor op Flag 1 yes no no yes no 46 Rdoor op Open output yes no no yes no The rear door open output will be kept stays ON when door always ON while the door is opening or opened opened WARNING Some door operators could be damaged if this flag is set 47 Rdoor op Close output yes no no yes no Set this flag for door operators that do not turns OFF when door run with power Example Moline closes 48 Rdoor op No close limit yes no no yes no Set this flag if the door operator does not have a close limit The controller uses the door gate contact to detect a closed door 49 Rdoor op Test jumped yes no no yes no When this flag is set the computer will ver gate and locks while ify that the gate and locks are open when closing the close limit is made 50 Rdoor op Flag 3 yes no no yes no 51 Rdoor op cam drop tim 0 25 5 JO sec If the cam does not drop in this time an e
280. not returned can be manually selected at any time with the man ual selection switch If the manual switches have not been provided you can force the dis patcher to try another phase 1 return sequence by putting the phase 2 car in inspection operation A second function of parameter 20 is to turn off emergency power operation If the time is set to 0 emergency power operation will be disabled and the inputs will be remapped as described above Parameters 21 and 22 Limit Phase 1 and Phase 2 Operation e Operation Mode 1 Auto recall Auto phase 2 Manual override Parameters 21 and 22 are set to No The emergency power will operate as follows All cars will sequentially return to the lobby phase 1 operation e After the cars have returned or have been bypassed the first car will return to service The car select switches will allow you to select another car Selecting another car will start a phase 1 recall operation of the car in service e Operation Mode 2 Auto recall Manual phase 2 Manual override e Parameter 21 set to Yes will allow you to recall all cars starting with cars that have their manual select switch on and then all remaining cars afterwards The manually selected car will then be returned to service for phase 2 operation e Operation Mode 3 Manual recall Manual override e Parameters 22 set to No will allow only cars with their manual select switch on to be selected With the select switch
281. nputs B m B E 7 B 8 outputs 8 outputs 8 outputs A2 1 A2 8 B2 1 B2 8 C2 1 C2 8 8 outputs 8 outputs 8 outputs A3 1 A3 8 B3 1 B3 8 C3 1 C3 8 Connector labeling on I O 24 Board 5 23 The Hand Held Unit Controller Board has inputs and outputs related to equipment found in the machine room Me The controller board is always located in the controller cabinet and Table 5 4 Car Controller Board CTRL N v6 2 Input Examples A17 1 2000 Car Controller Board I nputs Terminals Connectors Name Label AF 1 Al 1 Controller inspection switch COINS AF 2 Al 2 Controller inspection up button CUIB AF 3 Al 3 Controller inspection down button CIDB AF 4 Al 4 Doors disable switch DD AF 5 Al 5 Relay sequence RSEQ AF 6 Al 6 Drive fault DRF AF 7 Al 7 Overloads OVL AF 8 A1 8 Primary locks swing door PRL BF 1 B1 1 Safety line SAF BF 2 B1 2 Gate GATE BF 3 B1 3 Locks LOCKS BF 4 B1 4 Gate amp Locks GL BF 5 B1 5 Up normal terminal UNT BF 6 B1 6 Up slowdown limit USL BF 7 B1 7 Down normal terminal DNT BF 8 B1 8 Down slowdown limit DSL CF 1 C1 1 Brake drop switch BDS CF 2 C1 2 Up high speed limit HUSL CF 3 C1 3 Controller inspection switch 2 COINS2 CF 4 C1 4 CF 5 C1 5 CF 6 C1 6 Down high speed limit HDSL CF 7 C1 7 CF 8 C1 8 5 24 Manual 42 02 2T00 _Contents __ Index _MCE Web Main Menus Table 5 5 Car Controller Boar
282. ns CTOP CSTA or HALL Board 5 57 PI Driven Directly from O type Terminals 0 ccc cece eee e nee ce nees 5 58 Light Duty CE Fixture Drivers 5 i053 ckeekeckee kee 5046 Gees eee Seuweneen es 5 60 PI Board Setup eo 0 9 9 9 44 eRe eee Noee een deneeads 5 61 jalota ae ET a EEEE EN E E E E T OE T E E cate es 5 62 Indicator Parameters ees desde ecddcdGbeedeercereeneeese EEE PEEPAR eens Ree eeses 5 65 Lantern Parameters sercrresercsci endeadecde eee abe ede end ERIE E E eek RneeeRs Hoe 5 65 foi CS nee ET T EEE TE nin TEE ET EE E re EEE T 5 66 Car Lockout Setup se hn kdb andes kEs TANEN ENESES RARE INEI EERI AEE 5 68 E A EE E EE AE E E E EEE EEE E EE E tensa 5 69 vi Manual 42 02 2T00 E1 3 3 06 7 Be eS chan 0s a en ON eae ee hee ewe eek 5 70 Rest Poor TaBe serere riai ee ere re aren rey rere rare er ee rere eae re 3 71 ie es eee cee E E eS ne he 4080 AA E E E 3 71 a possat tiiir behaved dh NEP ATANA EBASI eR OEE Es 5 72 ge 17 gana revere diaa ide iida kka eioan 5 72 Poor Tae hike 65 54 ben birari eho he 5 79 Dispatcher TU HE US sore Kd degassed minei iida E DAENT RRE 5 80 G EE PE AA EEEE EE E E ET E EE VEE T A POET 3 81 PMO SD a eisiosdu iiid diaaa bodhassces tidetddinssee ata i aa 5 82 Reset Dispatcher Parameters s cc ches anew eae 66a 0 rrer N04 Sw ANSE bee eoe eds 5 83 Reset Dispatcher Floor Table ccccscsessncdecs eee nren sna ee ceeeaseereueese 3 83 Reset Dispatcher BMS Parameters 00 e ec cece e
283. ns clear to avoid water accumula tion in the unit In This Manual This manual is the installation adjustment and troubleshooting guide for the Tricon car con trol When viewed online as a pdf file hyperlinks buttons or blue text link to related topics and informational websites The manual includes Contents Table of Contents When viewed online as a pdf file hyperlinks in the Contents link to the associated topic in the body of the manual Section 1 Tricon General Information General description and wiring guidelines Section 2 Hoistway Equipment Terminal switch hoistway magnets and tape and SET 9000 installation Section 3 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Controller startup drive startup drive tuning and brake adjustment instructions Section 4 Release to Normal Operation Limit board adjustment and Final test descrip tions Section 5 The Hand Held Unit Howto use the Hand Held Unit to program and trouble shoot the controller Complete with parameter definitions where appropriate Section 6 Operations Controller behavior descriptions for Inspection Car Switch Attendant Emergency Power and Code Blue operating modes Index Alphabetical index to help you find information in the manual When viewed online as a pdf file index entry page references are hyperlinks to the associated informa tion in the body of the manual Me Contents Section 1 Tricon General Information Hiato gi ss 655 SEES SAE SS OS
284. nt door down hall call lockouts at this Yes No floor Front CC Front Car Call lockouts Yes No Rear HU Car has rear door up hall call lockouts at this floor Yes No Rear HD Car has rear door down hall call lockouts at this floor Yes No Rear CC Front Car Call lockouts Yes No To view all the floors use the e 2 or up arrow key to move backwards one 1 floor e 8 or down arrow key to move forward one 1 floor To edit a floor Press the key when you are on the desired floor You will see a blinking cursor e Keep pressing the key until you reach the desired field Enter the value using the numbers on the keypad or the Yes No keys e Press the key to accept You will move to the next field If you are on the last field you will move back to a view screen e Press the key to abort change You will move back to a view screen To return to the Floor Table menu must be at a view screen use the key The car will reject up calls at the top floor and down calls at the bottom floor Therefore if you are adding floors add the top and the bottom floor first Then add all the intermediate floors 5 53 The Hand Held Unit Me CE Indicator Set Up View amp Edit Screen This setup menu is used to program the heavy duty CE fixture driver board that has an Eche lon LON networking chip and is directly connected to the Tricon serial network This configu ration is typically used when more than fo
285. ntents __ Index _MCE Web 3 37 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Me HPV 600 Drive Faults Closed Loop Ifa fault occurs in the drive the Fault LED on the front panel lights To access drive faults using the hand held programmer go to the FAULTS FO menu This menu has two sub menus ACTIVE FAULTS F1and FAULT HISTORY F2 Use the arrow keys to access the desired menu If the drive is faulted ACTIVE FAULTS will display the present fault FAULT HIS TORY will display faults that have occurred previously Following is a list of detected drive faults Listed after each fault is a description of what the fault is and suggested corrective action Table 3 4 HPV 600 Drive Faults Closed Loop Fault Description Corrective Action AtoD Fault Analog to digital con Cycle power to controller and see if fault clears If not replace verter on control board Control board not responding Brake Alarm Dynamic brake resistor Confirm motor data is correctly entered braking resistance is overcurrent connected and sized correctly and car is balanced correctly NOTE After drive stops alarm becomes a Brake IGBT Fault Brk Hold Fault Brake hold state does not match the com manded state Disabled Brk IGBT Fault Brake IGBT overcurrent Overcurrent of braking IGBT Fault latches but does not shut car down until it stops to allow passengers to safely exit Con firm motor data correctly entered into drive braking resis
286. nterclockwise until the car runs at approximately 8 10 fpm 9 JumpJ13 to 1 2 releveling input 10 Adjust V1 2 to approximately 80 of brake hold voltage This is the releveling brake voltage which may be adjusted higher or lower for a drag brake The brake shoes should not lift completely off the drum If the shoes lift completely off the drum stop the car Turn the V I 2 pot counterclockwise a couple of turns and repeat step 10 If the brake shoes lift completely on re level there may be insufficient torque in the hoist motor to assure adequate leveling control 11 Remove jumper J 1 3 and J 1 2 12 Turn the ACC1 pot fully clockwise This will allow a rapid response of the brake regulator from a lower voltage level to a higher voltage level 13 Turn the DEC1 pot fully clockwise This will allow rapid response of the brake regulator from a higher voltage level to a lower voltage level This will also help prevent excessive arcing on the contacts of the B relay _Contents __ Index _MCE Web 3 25 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A ek HPV 600 AC Drive Start Up Closed Loop The Magnetek HPV 600 drive can be configured as a closed loop AC vector drive with the optional Incremental Encoder card In order to obtain optimal ride quality and performance the drive must be tuned to the motor The tuning process requires that you be familiar with the drive and AC motors If you have never worked on this drive or any other AC Vector d
287. numeric value and the sum of lighted LED values is the numeric indicator of a particular fault Table 4 1 Limit Board Learn Mode LED Meanings LED Meaning LED 10 Learn up limits LED 11 Learn down limits LED 12 Learn tach reverse LED 13 Learn slowdown setup fault LED 14 Learn slowdown missing fault LED 15 Learn pulse tach LED 16 Learn speed clamp 45 Release to Normal Operation A exe In normal mode the sum of the value of lighted LEDs indicates a fault For example if LEDs 10 1 and 12 4 were lighted in the illustration below their sum would be 5 5 indicates an Over speed at HDSL fault Figure 4 3 Limit Board Fault LED Meanings m m iw D Valuq 64 32 16 O stan OH stan gt 0O zian N ig ian Gepoan m m w w 8 N 5 5 Overspeed at HDSL Table 4 2 Limit Board Fault Indications LED Sum Fault No LEDs lighted No fault Overspeed up fault Overspeed down fault Overspeed at HUSL high speed up slowdown switch Overspeed at USL up slowdown switch Overspeed at HDSL high speed down slowdown switch Overspeed at DSL down slowdown switch Direction Failure Inspection Failure Up WO CO NI dD UO A w N e OJ Inspection Failure Down Stall Failure Up Stall Failure Down m m m N No demand failure up p w No demand failure down A Bypass locks failure
288. o 0 vice will close its doors and recall immediately to the code blue floor Code blue overrides Fire Service 44 Code Blue Wait time 0 255 45 sec Determines how long a car called to a floor for emergency medical service will wait for in car activa tion before returning to normal service 45 Parameter 45 46 Fire Fire bypass resets yes no 1 0 1 yes 1 Determines whether or not the all smoke detectors no 0 primary fire switch being set to Bypass will reset all smoke detectors 47 Fire Has remote fire yes no 1 0 O yes 1 Set to yes if there is a remote fire switch no 0 switch installed for this job Directs the dispatcher to moni tor the appropriate input 48 Fire Recall overrides yes no 1 0 1 yes 1 Determines whether or not fire code blue no 0 service operation will override emergency medical service oper ation 49 Fire Recall switch resets yes no 1 0 O yes 1 Determines whether or not the smoke detectors no 0 primary fire switch being set to the ON and then the OFF position will reset all smoke detectors 50 Parameter 50 51 Fire Flags 0 255 0 Ea This parameter is a bitmap 0 A17 1 1996 or NYC RS18 1996 1 A17 1 2000 Car fire bypass input operation becomes fire reset operation as defined in code 2 Latch Phase 1 fire recall oper ation key switch inputs 4 8 16 32 64 128 not used Add the flag numbers of those flags you want set 5 78 Manua
289. o edit a floor Press the key when you are on the desired floor You will see a blinking cursor e Keep pressing the key until you reach the desired field Enter the value using the numbers on the keypad or the Yes No keys e Press the key to accept You will move to the next field If you are on the last field you will move back to a view screen e Press the key to abort change You will move back to a view screen To return to the Floor Table menu must be at a view screen use the key The car will reject up calls at the top floor and down calls at the bottom floor Therefore if you are adding floors add the top and the bottom floor first Then add all the intermediate floors 5 52 Manual 42 02 2T00 Car Soft Lockouts View amp Edit Screen Figure 5 5 Car Soft Lockouts Screen Main Menus When the screen is selected from the menu the first floor is displayed However the first car floor may not be the cars bottom floor since in a group not all cars may go to the bottom floor Table 5 22 Simplex and Group Dispatcher Parameters Editable Fields Explanation Value Floor Number Floor Number See note above Floor Designation Use keypad to enter a name up to five characters The characters can be letters digits or punctuation marks Front HU Car has front door up hall call lockouts at this floor Yes Lockout No Nothing Out Front HD Car has fro
290. oad conditions Keep adding weight until the car has full load less the weight of anyone riding the car Contents Index _MCE Web 3 67 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A ek HPV 900 Adaptive Tuning If the motor is an old motor and no data is available for it an adaptive tune must be performed The adaptive tune requires that the car is run at contract speed and is capable of lifting full load 1 Select the Default Motor option for the Motor ID parameter This will load default val ues into the motor data parameters to prepare the drive for the adaptive tune 2 Enter the following motor data into the drive e Motor HP or kW from nameplate into RATED MTR POWER Motor AC voltage from nameplate into RATED MTR VOLTS e Motor AC frequency usually 60 cycles into RATED EXCIT FREQ e Motor nameplate full load amps into RATED MTR CURR The number of motor poles into MOTOR POLES e Motor RPM with full load at the correct frequency into RATED MTR SPEED 3 Place a balanced load into the car Reduce the car speed to 70 of contract speed by changing the value of SPEED COMMAND 8 A3 4 Run the car from top to bottom and back While the car is running monitor the motor torque found under Display Power Data D2 The torque should be between 15 If not verify that the car is balanced correctly If the car does not have compensation the motor torque will vary depending on car hoistway position V
291. obby smoke detector s LSMK AO 5 Al 5 Lobby recall switch EP pre transfer LREC AO 6 A1 6 Lobby MG stop switch LMG AO 7 A1 7 Machine room smoke detector MSMK AO 8 A1 8 Lower hoistway smoke detector LHSM BL 1 B1 1 Hall Call button 1 HCB1 BL 2 B1 2 Hall Call button 2 HCB2 BL 3 B1 3 Hall Call button 3 HCB3 BL 4 B1 4 Hall Call button 4 HCB4 BL 5 B1 5 Hall Call button 5 HCB5 BL 6 B1 6 Hall Call button 6 HCB6 BL 7 B1 7 Hall Call button 7 HCB7 BL 8 B1 8 Hall Call button 8 HCB8 CL 1 C1 1 Hall call button 9 HCB9 CL 2 C1 2 Hall call button 10 HCB10 CL 3 C1 3 Hall call button 11 HCB11 CL 4 C1 4 Hall call button 12 HCB12 CL 5 C1 5 Hall call button 13 HCB13 CL 6 C1 6 Hall call button 14 HCB14 CL 7 C1 7 Hall call button 15 HCB15 CL 8 C1 8 Hall call button 16 HCB16 5 30 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _ MCE Web Main Menus Table 5 11 Hall Board HALL N v6 2 Output Examples A17 1 2000 HALL N Board Outputs Terminals Connectors Name Label AO 26 A3 1 to A3 2 Position indicator 1 HP1 AO 18 A2 1 to A2 2 Position indicator 2 HP2 AO 28 A3 3 to A3 4 Position indicator 3 HP3 AO 20 A2 3 to A2 4 Position indicator 4 HP4 AO 30 A3 5 to A3 6 Position indicator 5 HP5 AO 22 A2 5 to A2 6 Position indicator 6 HP6 AO 32 A3 7 to A3 8 Position indicator 7 or Up direction arrow HP7U AO 24 A2 7 to A2 8 Position indicator 8 or Down direction arrow HP8D
292. off If it does not a learn fault will be displayed on the diagnostic LEDs D10 D17 Please refer to Limit Board Learn Mode LED Meanings on page 4 5 The fault will be displayed if the slowdown is not positioned properly Contents Index _ MCE Web 5 Release to Normal Operation A ek Operation Normal After the normal set up has been completed the limit board goes into normal operation D25 will be on continuously In normal operation speed is checked as it reaches the limits If the speed at a limit is excessive the safety will open to prevent the car from going beyond the floor The Limit board checks if the car is going too fast beyond contract speed The Limit board checks if the car is moving in the proper direction If the car is told to go in one direction and its speed exceeds 20 of contract speed in the opposite direction for greater than 1 2 second it will also cause a trip After the board trips it will automatically reset after the car has halted for more than 2 seconds Tachometer disconnected faults will be detected if a run has begun detected speed remains 0 and a slowdown is broken A trip will occur when the UP and DN inputs are both off indicating that the car is not in motion but the Limit board detects an active speed signal The safety will open A trip will occur if the speed of the car on inspection is greater than 125 FPM A trip will occur if DZBP is on and the car exceeds 125 FPM 4 8
293. oise is seen when the door motor is operating CX or OX are lit on the screen add suppression around door operator circuitry Try to pinpoint when the noise occurs i e what relay is picking or dropping Once the problem relay is identified add arc suppression around the coil Standard arc suppressors resistor capacitor networks are used on AC relays Diode resistor combinations work well for DC relays Consult Motion Control engineering for proper compo nent sizing Machine Room Preparation When preparing the machine room for elevator controller installation consider Equipment location Machine room environment When choosing equipment location consider Adequate working space for comfort and efficiency and a good working space such as a workbench or table Logical arrangement taking into consideration other equipment in the machine room and electrical power Do not install equipment in a hazardous location A telephone in the machine room facilitates remote diagnostic and adjustment assistance If any areas in the machine room are subject to vibration they should be avoided or rein forced to prevent equipment damage Provide adequate lighting to work with control cabinets and machines Wiring is reduced if the drive isolation transformer if used is located near the controller 1 12 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index _MCE Web Installation Considerations Environmental conditions are important e Am
294. one of the leads to the hoist motor While observing the display on the Amprobe run the car down on inspection operation through the center of the hoistway Write down the amperage displayed while the car passes by the chalk mark on the cables The value may vary slightly so average the value if necessary Place the car about 10 feet below the center of the hoistway While observing the display on the Amprobe run the car up through the center of the hoistway Write down the amperage displayed while the car passes by the chalk mark on the cables The value may vary slightly so average the value if necessary Ignoring whether the recorded values were positive or negative if the value recorded while the car was running up was greater than the value running down the car is too heavy Remove 100 pounds of weight from the car and repeat previous steps until the recorded values are equal but of opposite polarity Ignoring whether the recorded values were positive or negative if the value recorded while the car was running down was greater than the value running up the car is too light Add 100 pounds of weight to the car and repeat preceding steps until the recorded values are equal but of opposite polarity When the values are equal but of opposite polarity the car is balanced Check how much weight is in the car It should be between 40 and 50 of the cars rated capacity If not the counterweighting needs to be adjusted If the car is too heavy
295. open at the same distance from the terminal landing as the selec tor magnet slowdowns The board will sense a normal learn mode when the board is in the learn mode and the UP input goes on Either the USL or HUSL input will be on If after UP input is on and HS or MS are not on then the board enters inspection set up mode as outlined in the inspection setup When the car enters set up mode LEDs D10 and D11 are illuminated 1 To place the limit board on the learn mode press and hold the S3 and S1 switches Release switch S1 before releasing switch S3 LED D25 will blink rapidly four times per second Diagnostic LEDs D10 and D11 will be on 2 After normal learn mode is entered it is necessary to run the car from the bottom land ing to the top landing If two slowdown limits are present USL and HUSL then after the top landing is reached it is necessary to move the car one floor down from the top and then run the car up to the top again After this is completed LED D10 should turn off 3 Next the car should be run to the bottom If two slowdown limits are present DSL and HDSL the car should be moved up one floor and run to the bottom again After this operation is complete LED D11 should go out and the board will enter normal opera tion 4 When the normal learn trip is performed It also determines if the slowdowns are placed in the proper position The slowdown should open within 200 milliseconds of the HS or MS relay going
296. or 425 volts on a 230 volt drive Check braking resistance con nected and sized properly Check for possible high AC line Confirm input voltage to drive If everything checks OK possi ble bad braking IGBT Drive unit needs to be replaced PCU Data Fault PCU parameters not cor rect Check all drive parameters Cycle power to drive If fault recurs go to the Utility menu and select Restore Defaults f fault persists replace Control board Note The Restore Defaults selection will require all drive parameters to be set to their correct values Phase Fault Open motor phase Check motor motor connections motor windings and main contactor contacts Setup Fault 1 Rated motor speed poles and frequency not set correctly Parameters RATED EXCIT FREQ A5 RATED MTR SPEED A5 and MOTOR POLES A4 do not satisfy the formula 9 6 lt 120 Excit Freq Motor Poles Motor Speed lt 1222 3 Setup Fault 3 Motor Poles parameter not set correctly MOTOR POLES A4 must be set to an even number Setup Fault 5 The Rated Motor Power and Rated Motor Voltage parameters are not set correctly Check RATED MOTOR PWR A4 and RATED MTR VOLTS A4 They must satisfy the formula 07184 Motor Pwr Motor Voltage Drive Current Rating Setup Fault 6 Multi Step speed refer ence exceeds contract speed Check SPEED COMMAND 1 through SPEED COMMAND 16 and CONTRACT CAR SPD parameters
297. or Enter the lobby floor for this car 26 Car 5 lobby floor number 1 32 1 floor Enter the lobby floor for this car 27 Car 6 lobby floor number 1 32 1 floor Enter the lobby floor for this car 28 Modem initialization Enter the initialization string for string 1 the modem used for the primary dial out line See modem docu mentation 29 Modem initialization Enter the initialization string for string 2 the modem used for the second ary dial out line See modem documentation Reset Dispatcher Parameters This screen allows you to reset dispatcher parameters to their default values Reset Dispatcher Floor Table This screen allows you to reset dispatcher floor tables to their default values Reset Dispatcher BMS Parameters This screen allows you to reset dispatcher BMS modem parameters to their default values 5 83 The Hand Held Unit A axe Network The Network screen allows you to view parameters for serial communication between system components e To move into the edit screen use 8 or key To return to the previous menu use key Figure 5 20 Network Screen 5 84 Manual 42 02 2T00 _Contents_ index _MCE Web Quick TOES his Section Inspection Operation Switch Operation gency Power Operation Blue Operation wes Operations 6 In This Section This section contains descriptions of controller operating modes including e Inspection Operation e Car Switch Attend
298. or Rotation Allows user to reverse direction of motor Forward Forward Forward or rotation Reverse Reverse Spd Ref Release Determines when speed reference release Reg release Reg Reg release is asserted Brake picked release Cont Confirm Src Determines if an external logic input is None None External TB used for contactor confirmation External TB 1 Pre Torque Source Determines if a pre torque command is None None None used and if used determines the source of Analog input the pre torque command Serial Pre Torque Latch Chooses if analog pre torque command is Not latched Not Not latched latched Latched latched Ptorg Latch Clck Determines source of pre torque latch External TB 1 External External TB control if used Serial TB1 Fault Reset Src Fault reset source External TB 1 External External TB Serial TB1 Automatic Overspd Test Src Determines external logic source to trigger External TB 1 External External TB overspeed test Serial TB1 Brake Pick Src If drive controls mechanical brake deter Internal Internal Internal mines source of brake pick command Serial Brake Pick CNFM Determines if a logic input is used for None None None brake pick confirm External TB 1 Brake Hold Src If drive controls mechanical brake deter Internal Internal Internal mines source of brake hold command Serial Ramped Stop Sel Chooses between normal stop and torque None None None ramp down stop Ramp on stop Ramp Down En Src Determines
299. or has To obtain this value refer to step 20 above If the synchronous speed of the motor is 900 RPM set this parameter to 8 poles If the synchronous speed of the motor is 1200 RPM set this parameter to 6 poles If the synchronous speed of the motor is 1800 RPM set this parameter to 4 poles This value must be an even number or a Setup Fault will occur 8 RATED MTR SPEED Tells the drive what speed the motor should be turning when it is excited at its rated frequency and producing rated power Set to the value from the motor nameplate or the manufacturer data If this value is not available temporarily set it for the value calculated by the following formula No Slip Motor RPM X 98 The final setting can be calculated by the drive by performing an adaptive tune This value must be less than 900 RPM on 8 pole motors 1200 RPM on 6 pole motors and 1800 RPM on 4 pole motors or a drive set up fault will occur Reuland motors have the synchronous speed on the motor nameplate Setting this parameter to synchronous speed will result in a set up fault The correct value is approximately synchronous speed times 0 9833 9 NO LOAD CURR Tells the drive what current is required to turn the motor at rated speed with no load This can be determined from the motor manufacturer data sheets on new motors If it is not available temporarily set it to 50 The final setting can be calculated by the drive during adaptive tuning The remaining paramete
300. ore speed deviation low sec 0 9 99 0 5 0 5 logic output is true Spd Dev Hi Level Level for declaring speed deviation 0 99 9 10 0 20 0 alarm Spd Command Bias Subtracts an effective voltage to volts 0 6 00 0 00 0 00 actual speed command voltage Spd Command Mult Scales analog speed command 0 90 3 00 1 00 1 00 Pre Torque Bias Subtracts an effective voltage to volts 0 6 00 0 00 0 00 actual pre torque command voltage Pre Torque Mult Scales pre torque command 10 00 10 00 1 00 1 0 Zero Speed Level Threshold for zero speed logic out 0 99 99 25 00 1 00 put Zero Speed Time Time before zero speed logic output sec 0 9 99 0 10 0 10 is declared true Up Dwn Threshold Threshold for detection of up or 0 9 99 1 00 1 00 down direction Mtr Torque Limit Motoring torque limit 0 250 0 200 0 200 0 Regen Torq Limit Regenerating torque limit 0 250 0 200 0 200 0 Flux Wkn Factor Defines torque limit at higher speeds 60 0 100 0 100 0 100 Ana Out 1 Offset Subtracts an effective voltage to 99 9 99 9 10 00 0 00 actual analog output 1 Ana Out 2 Offset Subtracts an effective voltage to 99 9 99 9 10 00 0 00 actual analog output 2 Ana Out 1 Gain Scaling factor for analog output 1 0 10 0 1 0 1 0 Ana Out 2 Gain Scaling factor for analog output 2 0 10 0 1 0 1 0 Fit Reset Delay Time Before a fault is automatically sec 0 120 5 5 reset Flt Reset Hour Number of faults allowed to be auto faults 10 10 3 3
301. ores its own configuration information Each system is factory configured according to particular job requirements before shipment Typically you will not need to program position indicator outputs but will only need to connect them as shown in the prints for the particular job When configuring a PI board the serial communication to any other PI board on the system MUST be disconnected If this is not done information on the other boards will be cor rupted To disconnect boards not to be programmed unplug the communication connector from the PI boards that you are not configuring The PI Board Setup menu consists of three 3 sub menus Floor Setup There is a Floor Setup menu for each floor served by the car You scroll through the floors to the floor you want to program select it then set up position indicator outputs and make settings that tell the controller if there are lanterns gongs associated with the opening If lantern gong outputs are indicated they are automatically assigned to outputs not used for position indicators or directional arrows Indicator Parameters Per floor this menu allows you to set up blink times for the position indicator outputs if desired and also to make a setting that tells the controller if directional arrows are associated with the opening If so two directional arrow outputs are automati cally assigned to outputs not used for position indicators e Lantern Parameters Per floor this menu a
302. ossover fre rad 0 1 20 0 2 0 2 0 quency with Ereg speed regulator sec Gain Reduce Mult Percent of speed regulator response 10 100 100 100 in low gain Mode Gain Chng Level Speed level to change to low gain 0 100 0 100 0 mode with internal gain switch Tach Rate Gain Helps with effects of rope resonance 0 30 0 0 0 Spd Phase Margin Sets phase margin of speed regula o 45 90 80 80 tor only with PI speed regulator Ramped Stop Time Time to ramp torque from rated sec 0 2 50 0 20 0 20 torque to zero only with torque ramp down stop function Contact Flt Time Time before a contactor fault is sec 0 10 5 00 0 50 2 0 declared Brake Pick Time Time before a brake pick fault is sec 0 5 00 1 00 0 5 declared 3 9 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Table 3 1 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Open Loop Me Brake Hold Time Time before a brake hold fault is sec 0 5 00 0 20 0 00 declared Overspeed Level Threshold for detection of overspeed 100 0 150 0 115 0 115 fault Overspeed Time Time before an overspeed fault is sec 0 9 99 1 00 1 00 declared Overspeed Mult Multiplier for overspeed test 100 150 125 125 Encoder Pulses Encoder counts per revolution ppr 600 10000 1024 1024 Spd Dev Lo Level Range around the speed reference 00 1 10 0 10 20 for speed deviation low logic output Spd Dev Time Time bef
303. ot achieve stable leveled if trying up down for too condition in this time leveled for at least long leveled validation time abort releveling altogether 68 Releveling stall timeout 5 255 15 sec If the car is releveling continuously in one time direction for this time relevel is aborted 69 A car level for this time 0 25 5 3 sec If this car is continuously leveled for this is considered level time it is considered leveled OK and the relevel timeout timer is reset 70 Field Motor field weak yes no lyes yes no When set the motor field goes into weaken ens timed when flag is ing after the field weaken time has elapsed set 71 Drive Restart in yes no yes yes no If the car stops away from a floor it will re start in approach speed instead of medium speed 5 42 Manual 42 02 2T00 Gontents __Index _MCE Web Table 5 18 Car Setup Parameters Screen Main Menus 72 Drive Monitor LU LD yes no no yes no When true the operation of LU LD and DZ and DZ is monitored for stuck sensors 73 Drive Consecutive drive 0 255 5 each If the drive accumulates this number of faults count faults and or run timeouts it will set to DRIVE FAULT and will refuse to move Can only be reset by setting the car to inspection or turning the power off 74 Consecutive drive faults 0 255 120 sec If this time elapses without any drive faults time or timeout
304. ounterclockwise until the car runs at approximately 8 10 fpm 9 JumpJ13 to 1 2 releveling input 10 Adjust V1 2 to approximately 80 of brake hold voltage This is the releveling brake voltage which may be adjusted higher or lower for a drag brake The brake shoes should not lift completely off the drum If the shoes lift completely off the drum stop the car Turn the V I 2 pot counterclockwise a couple of turns and repeat step 10 If the brake shoes lift completely on re level there may be insufficient torque in the hoist motor to assure adequate leveling control 11 Remove jumper J 1 3 and J 1 2 12 Turn the ACC1 pot fully clockwise This will allow a rapid response of the brake regulator from a lower voltage level to a higher voltage level 13 Turn the DEC1 pot fully clockwise This will allow rapid response of the brake regulator from a higher voltage level to a lower voltage level This will also help prevent excessive arcing on the contacts of the B relay Startup amp Drive Adjustment ek Yaskawa F7 Drive The Yaskawa F7 drive is capable of open and closed loop operation For closed loop Flux Vector mode operation the optional encoder PG card must be installed If purchased the PG card was installed and tested at the factory Contact MCE Engineering if you require closed loop operation and do not have a PG option card installed g a X 4 PG Option Card NI PG Connection Terminals ey DLL
305. out 0 no cam error will be generated If the door has no cam this time should be set to 0 52 Rdoor op Hold close 0 25 5 0 sec This parameter extends operation of the and open limits opened open and close relays after the limits have been reached It is used on door operators that have no hysteresis on their limits and also to ensure that the doors will make the gate and locks after the close limit has been reached 53 Signals Advanced posi yes no no yes no If set the position indicator and lanterns are tion indicator advanced Contents __Index _MCE Web 5 41 The Hand Held Unit Table 5 18 Car Setup Parameters Screen Me approach speed 54 Signals Use last two yes no no yes no Set this parameter to convert the last two pos outputs as direction hall position indicator outputs into direction arrows arrows 55 Signals Flash Pl when yes no no yes no Flash PI when on nudging on nudging 56 Signals Pulse buzzer yes no no yes no Pulse buzzer when on nudging when on nudging 57 Signals Flash and pulse 0 25 5 1 sec This parameter sets the rate of PI flashing rate on nudging and buzzer pulsing when on nudging 58 Signals Position indica 0 255 O sec If this timer is set to a value other than tor timeout time zero the position indicator will be turned OFF the set number of seconds after the car stopped with no direction and
306. out motion Use 101 to tune with motion Starting the Auto tune To start the auto tune procedure 1 Set parameter 96 to 101 and push the write key 2 Push the EXT button The display will show 101 STOP EXT 3 Push the controller up inspection button The motor will hum intermittently and then the car will accelerate to full speed in the up direc tion before decelerating Do not stop the car unless it gets too close to the top landing or moves too fast 4 Hold the up direction button until the display shows the 103 completed This may take 10 seconds after the car has stopped moving in the up direction When com pleted the display will show TUNE 103 COMP STF STOP PU Please refer to Problems Auto Tuning In MFVC Mode on page 3 97 if the auto tune fails After a successful auto tune more fine tuning can be achieved by adjusting the drive gain as explained in the following paragraph Car Balancing For the drive to perform properly the car needs to be properly balanced Geared cars are typically balanced with 40 50 of the cars rated capacity To confirm this the following procedure must be followed 1 Access the car top Run the car on inspection to the center of the hoistway Stop the car so the crosshead on the counterweight is exactly adjacent the crosshead on the car 2 Placeachalk mark on the cables in the machine room and mark the hoist motor so that while the car is run from the machine room you wi
307. outputs working together For example after an input is detected the same connection becomes an output to drive the indicator bulb for that input L Type Terminal boards are used for Car and Hall Call connections Figure 1 14 L Type Terminal Board Connections L TYPE TERMINAL BOARD To positive voltage on Relay Board CONNECTION EXAMPLE ONLY GND RB Board _Contents __ Index _MCE Web 1 23 Tricon General I nformation A ek High Power Wiring High power wiring that should be piped separately from all other signal wiring includes the fol lowing e Main line connections to the cabinet Motor armature and motor field wiring e Brake coil wiring Generator shunt field wiring e Generator armature wiring In most cases it is practical to run the motor armature motor field and brake wiring in one pipe The other wiring should all be run in separate pipes NOT in the common duct with signal wiring Traveling Cable Wiring When laying out traveling cable wiring it is always best to have the low voltage signal wiring multiple layers away from any 14 AWG power wires The number of required wires and twisted pairs is documented in the job prints The travelers are also identified by the use of yellow terminals in the top of the car junction box Always allow 10 or more additional wires for spares On lower rise cars it is often ben
308. ower wir ing the two should cross at a ninety degree angle Terminal boards mounted on I O 24 boards are used for low voltage connections The func tion of the particular I O 24 board Terminal board set is determined by the software installed on that I O 24 board Each I O 24 board is labeled according to its function or location For example the I O 24 board used in the car station is labeled CSTA while the I O 24 used for hall call connections in the controller cabinet is labeled HALL Figure 1 11 I O 24 Board Layout CSTA Software installed in this chip determines function of board and terminal boards Terminal board locations I O 24 Board 8 inputs 8 inputs 8 inputs r a 7 8 outputs 8 outputs 8 outputs A2 1 A2 8 B2 1 B2 8 C2 1 C2 8 8 outputs 8 outputs 8 outputs A3 1 A3 8 B3 1 B3 8 C3 1 C3 8 si Connector labeling on I O 24 Board In the wiring prints inputs and output labeling will tell you where the terminal board to be used is located using the I O24 board label i e CSTA the Terminal board position i e A the Terminal board type i e F and the connector pin number For example CSTA AF 28 means pin 28 on the F Type terminal board in the A position on the CSTA I O24 board 1 20 Manual 42 02 2T00 General Wiring Instructions Three Terminal boards are most commonly used for low voltage signal wiring e F Type Terminal Board
309. owing the Acc rate will release the brake when the loop current is sufficient to hold the car without rolling back Settings of the following controller parameters can be used to delay the brake lift if required Parameter 81 automatic starts 84 inspection starts 86 releveling starts 3 102 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Mitsubishi A500 Variable Frequency Drive 1 Ensure the brake coil has been connected properly to the controller 2 Connect a meter across the F and F terminals of the drive Set the meter range high enough to measure the brake lifting voltage level for the job 3 With no inputs on at the J 1 terminal of the drive the V 1 4 pot will be selected Adjust the V 1 4 pot fully counterclockwise The meter should read approximately 30 volts 4 Turn the main line power OFF TEMPORARILY jump from AC2 P11A 100VDC relay board on the controller to J 1 1 on the driver 5 Turn the main line power ON Run the car on inspection and adjust the V I 1 Lift voltage pot until brake pick voltage required for the job is obtained 6 Turn the main line power OFF Remove the jumper from J 1 10n the driver 7 Turn the main line power ON Run the car on inspection and wait until the LED over the V I 3 pot lights Adjust the V 1 3 hold voltage pot until approximately 60 brake lifting voltage is obtained or the brake holding voltage previously measured If the brake drops at this level stop the car turn the
310. ows are configured in the Indicator Parameters submenu 5 64 Manual 42 02 2T00 Main Menus Indicator Parameters This screen contains fields to modify indicator behavior To move into the Indicator Parameters screen use 8 or key To return to the previous menu use key To edit a field keep pressing the key until you reach the desired field Enter the value using the numbers on the keypad or the Yes No keys Use the key to accept You will move to the next field If you are on the last field you will move back to the Indicator Parameters screen e Use the key to abort change You will move back to the Indicator Parameters screen Table 5 26 Indicator Parameters Edit Screen Editable Field Description Value Blink ON time This sets the time the lights will stay ON when position indicator 1 100 seconds blinks Blink OFF time This sets the time the lights will stay OFF when position indicator 1 100 seconds blinks Sleep time If there is no position and or direction change for longer than the 1 100 seconds time set in this field the position indicator will shut off Setting this time to zero will turn the indicators ON indefinitely Has dir arrows If set to YES two outputs will be allocated for direction arrows Yes No To retum to the PI Board setup menu use the key Lantern Parameters This screen contains several parameters related to the hall lan terns
311. p and more resistance causes a quicker drop The car should now be running at contract speed with accurate floor stops and a smooth ride Remove all weights from the car and staying away from the terminal floors make one floor runs and multi floor runs up and down Add weight to the car approximately 100 pounds at a time Staying away from the terminal floors observe the one floor and multi floor runs to be sure that the car rides well under all load conditions Keep adding weight until the car has full load less the weight of anyone riding the car The drive is now successfully set up Brake Adjustment The following adjustments have been set from survey data The brake assembly and all pins should be cleaned thoroughly and all spring tensions set properly to hold 125 of car capacity prior to adjusting the brake driver Brake shoes should be checked to insure at least 95 surface contact If spring tensions are changed after this adjustment the brake driver will need to be completely readjusted Brake Adjustments V I pot 1 Lifting Voltage e V I pot 2 Reveling Voltage V I pot 3 Running Voltage e Set Acceleration ACC1 to avoid rollback and starting brake bumps Set Deceleration to its maximum value DEC1 full CW _Contents __ Index _MCE Web 3 23 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Brake Regulator P11 110 VDC Gnd B1 CTRL BR L J1 1 V I1 y Cy Cir J1 2 V2 123411 212 1
312. position in the slowdown zone for the floor below out of the slowdown vane Main Menus Table 5 1 States Table Car V 6 26 and HHU Version 6 26 02 06 11 Below slowdown Below sld2 The car is moving down below the current 2 position in the low speed slowdown zone for the floor below 12 Leveled error LEVEL ERR The car suddenly lost both LU and LD at the same time 13 No leveling inputs NO LEV INP No leveling inputs have been detected 16 Nudging 0 Init 1 Off Nudging is off 2 Timing Timing Nudging time is running 3 Ready Ready Nudging timer has expired but there is no demand for the car 4 On On Nudging is active 5 State 5 State 5 17 Fire 2 0 Init 1 Off 2 Indep recall Indep recall Phase 1 recall while car is on Independent service 3 Attendant recall Att recall Phase 1 recall while car is on Attendant ser vice 4 Recall Recall Car is in Phase 1 recall 5 Recalled Recalled Car has completed Phase 1 recall 6 Phase II Phase II Car is in Phase II fire operation 7 Car to hold glitch Hold wait Waiting for either fire door hold input on filter or timer expiration after in car fire input goes off 8 Hold Hold Phase II fire door hold service 9 Soft hold Soft hold Car is away from recall floor doors are open in car fire input is off and timer for fire door hold has expired 10 Start recall Start recall Transition sta
313. pot clockwise 1 full turn and attempt to run the car again 8 Whilerunning the car turn the inspection speed pot counterclockwise until the car runs at approximately 8 10 fpm 9 JumpJ13 to 1 2 releveling input 10 Adjust V1 2 to approximately 80 of brake hold voltage This is the releveling brake voltage which may be adjusted higher or lower for a drag brake The brake shoes should not lift completely off the drum If the shoes lift completely off the drum stop the car Turn the V I 2 pot counterclockwise a couple of turns and repeat step 10 If the brake shoes lift completely on re level there may be insufficient torque in the hoist motor to assure adequate leveling control 11 Remove jumper J 1 3 and J 1 2 12 Turn the ACC1 pot fully clockwise This will allow a rapid response of the brake regulator from a lower voltage level to a higher voltage level 13 Turn the DEC1 pot fully clockwise This will allow rapid response of the brake regulator from a higher voltage level to a lower voltage level This will also help prevent excessive arcing on the contacts of the B relay _Contents __ Index _MCE Web 3 103 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A ek Magnetek DSD 412 DC Drive Magnetek Drive installation instructions can be found in the separate manufacturers manual Magnetek Technical Manual CS 0274 enclosed with the project shipment The drive has been modified to meet MCE specifications The Magnetek Technical Man
314. pping in down direction 10 Start up relevel StartUpRelev Start up for relevel hydro only 11 Releveling up Relevel up Releveling 12 Start down relevel StartDnRelev Start down for relevel not used 13 Releveling down Relevel down Releveling down pump 20 Start up slow Start UpSldn 14 Start up pump Start up P 15 Start up Start up Start for up run 16 Start down Down start Start for down run 17 Run up Running up Running up 18 Run down Running down Running down 19 Start up slow Strt Up s p Start up slowdown 21 Start down slow Start DnSldn Start down slowdown 5 13 The Hand Held Unit Me Table 5 1 States Table Car V 6 26 and HHU Version 6 26 02 06 5 14 Manual 42 02 2T00 22 Up slowdown Up slowdown Drive in up slowdown 23 Down slowdown Down slowdown Drive in down slowdown 24 Up run fast Run up fast Car is running up at high speed 25 Up run fast 2 Run up f2 Running up at fast speed waiting for the adjustable time delay to start the slowdown 26 Dn run fast Run down fast Car is running down at high speed 27 Dn run fast 2 Run dn f2 Running down at fast speed waiting for the adjustable time delay to start the slowdown 28 Up run 2 Run up2 Running up waiting for slowdown delay to start the slowdown 29 Down run 2 Run dn2 Running down waiting for slowdown del
315. provided 1 Route the cable through a separate conduit to the controller cabinet 2 Connect the controller end of the cable as shown in the job prints 3 Verify that the encoder shield is soldered to the drain wire wire without insulation Keep the cable shield connection as short as possible A Caution Do not coil excess Encoder cable near high voltage components noise may be induced If the cable must be shortened trim it at the controller end Do not cut and re splice in the middle of the cable or shorten at the Encoder end Contents __Index _MCE Web Li Tricon General I nformation ek T Limit 2K Motor Speed Position Sensor For A17 1 2000 CSA B44 00 compliant controllers a speed position sensor mounted on the elevator machine motor provides feedback to the T Limit 2K Limit Gripper board through a special cable assembly This connection is detailed on the Limit Rope Gripper Board drawing in the drawings package accompanying the controller The speed sensor detects a magnet assembly attached to the shaft of the motor as the magnet assembly passes during each motor revolution Mounting the Magnet Assembly DO NOT drill any holes in the motor shaft to mount the assembly Use hose clamps as shown in the following illustration Figure 1 8 Mounting the Speed Sensor Magnet Assembly End View Magnet Magnetic Side View Shunt Iron Aluminum Base Motor Shaft Hose Clamp 1 18 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _
316. r Set Up 5 54 Cleaning hoistway tape 2 4 Clear fault counter 4 6 Clock Setup 5 69 5 81 Code Blue 5 78 6 8 Communication cables 1 24 Connecting Cars to Groups 1 24 Controller board 1 4 Controller inspection 3 2 6 2 Counterweight buffer test 4 21 CPU 1 4 D De burring hoistway tape 2 4 DHall Board Inputs 5 30 5 32 5 34 DHALL Board Outputs 5 31 DHALL card 5 80 DHALL2 card 5 80 DHALL3 card 5 80 Diagnostic States 5 7 Directional limits 2 14 Dispatcher board 1 10 Dispatcher connections 1 24 Dispatcher Setup 5 72 Dispatcher Parameter Screen Parameters 5 66 5 73 5 82 DN 4 5 4 9 Door Operation 6 3 6 4 Access 6 2 Code Blue 6 8 Inspection 6 2 Door Parameters 5 38 5 73 Fire 5 45 Lobby 5 48 Parking 5 47 5 74 Down slowdown magnets 2 7 Drive Parameters 5 42 Drive applications 1 2 DSD 412 3 104 DSL 4 5 4 9 DZ 4 10 DZBP 4 5 4 9 E ECHLON boards 5 54 Electrical noise 1 13 Emergency power 5 48 5 77 6 5 6 7 Pre transfer 6 5 EMI RFI problems 1 14 Empty Floors 5 51 Encoder Isolation 1 17 Encoder Mounting 1 16 Encoder Parameters 5 47 Encoder Wiring 1 17 Environmental Considerations 1 13 F F Terminal board 1 4 1 21 F Type Terminal board wiring 1 21 False Floors 5 50 5 51 Fault display 4 6 Final limits 2 14 Fire Operation 5 28 5 30 5 32 5 34 5 49 Code Blue 5 78 Doors 5 45 Flags 2K Limit Gripper 4 13 Floor leveling magnets 2 7 Floor Setup screen 5 62 Floor Table 5 50 Floor Table screen 5
317. r has a synchronous speed of 1800 RPM set this parameter to 4 POLE DFLT 5 RATED MTR PWR Rated motor horsepower or kilowatts Set to the value on the motor nameplate 6 RATED MTR VOLTS Rated motor voltage Set to the value from the motor name plate 7 RATED EXCIT FREQ Frequency at which the motor is excited to obtain motor nameplate rated RPM Typically this is 60 Hz Set to the value from the motor name plate or the manufacturer data sheet 3 28 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 600 8 MOTOR POLES parameter Tells the drive how many poles the motor has If the syn chronous speed of the motor is 900 RPM set to 8 poles If the synchronous speed of the motor is 1200 RPM set to 6 poles If the synchronous speed of the motor is 1800 RPM set to 4 poles This value must be an even number or a Setup Fault will occur 9 RATED MTR SPEED Speed the motor should be turning when it is excited at its rated frequency and producing rated power Set to the value from the motor nameplate or the manufacturers data If this value is not available temporarily set it for the value calculated by No Slip Motor RPM 0 98 The final setting can be calculated by the drive during adaptive tuning This value must be less than 900 RPM on 8 pole motors 1200 RPM on 6 pole motors and 1800 RPM on 4 pole motors or a drive set up fault will occur Reuland motors have the synchronous speed on the motor nameplate Setting
318. r is run to The car may not set the governor at the overspeed setting and you must be prepared to stop the car before the car gets to the terminal landing at a speed greater than contract speed Insure that the car is readjusted to run at normal speed after completing an overspeed test A Danger If the car has a counterweight safety ensure that the safety will not apply by tying down the safety actuating arm prior to performing this test Failure to prevent the safety from apply ing may result in the safety applying while the buffer is compressed Governor Safety Test Overspeed 1025 Regulator Before performing this test ensure you read and complete Limit adjustments carefully Before the test e Measure and record the raw tach voltage at regulator terminal 1 2 e Measure and record car speed on inspection and high speed This is done to allow you to re scale the car speed on inspection after overspeeding the car e Place a full load in the car The car should be level at the top floor The car should be on door disable Be prepared to stop the car if the safety fails to apply 1 Move the regulator trip disable header jumper to the disable position center pin jumped to D pin left side 2 Send the car down two floors from the bottom monitoring the car speed and position 3 As the caris running turn the contract speed pot clockwise until the car is at the desired tripping speed 4 The car
319. r to the Floor Table Please refer to Floor Table on page 5 50 Top Floor Test Procedure 1 Access the Parking Floor parameter 141 in the Setup Parameters menu 2 Set to the newly entered value for the top floor Step 2 commands the car to run to a floor beyond its limit of travel When the car passes the slowdown switch in the hoistway it will immediately start to slow down and will level and stop at the terminal floor Bottom Floor Test Procedure With the car at the top floor and an additional floor in the floor table the controller will believe the car is one floor higher than it actually is 1 Access the Parking Floor parameter 141 in the Setup Parameters menu 2 Setto 01 Step 2 commands the car to run to a floor beyond its limit of travel When the car passes the slowdown switch in the hoistway it will immediately start to slow down and will level and stop at the terminal floor Reset Floor Table After testing both the top and bottom floors change the Floor Table back to the correct number of floors Please refer to Floor Table on page 5 50 Contents __Index _MCE Web 33 Release to Normal Operation A ek Emergency Terminal This procedure will test the operation of the Emergency Terminal Stopping ETS system This system is present only on cars that have rated speeds of 150 feet per minute or greater It is designed to remove power from the hoist motor and brake before the car strikes the buf
320. rake 0 25 5 JO sec How long the brake will hold after the car remains ON after car reaches the full leveled position Allows the becomes level auto car to fully stop motion before setting the brake 84 Brake Time to delay the 0 25 5 O sec Brake lift delay in inspection brake lift insp 85 Brake Time brake 0 25 5 fO sec Brake drop delay in inspection remains ON after car stops insp 86 Brake Time to delay the 0 25 5 O sec Brake lift delay when releveling Allows the brake lift relevel drive to pre torque before starting prevent ing rollback 87 Brake Time Brake 0 25 5 JO sec How long the brake will hold after the car remains ON after car reaches the full leveled position Allows the becomes level relevel car to fully stop motion before setting the brake 5 43 The Hand Held Unit Table 5 18 Car Setup Parameters Screen Me leveling when ODZ on 88 Brake Brake has con yes no jno yes no The brake has a contact that opens when tact which opens when the brake is lifted If the brake does not brake lifts have this contact set this flag to NO 89 Brake Brake uses BRL yes no no yes no Set this parameter to Yes if a separate output when releveling relevel setting is desired WARNING If the controller does not have hardware for brake relevel BRLR relay or electronic brake con trol DO NOT set this parameter
321. rameters and retry Ifthe dynamic auto tune fails you can try the auto tune in the static mode The static mode uses a 1 in parameter 96 Follow the procedure for auto tuning If any error occurred the car will stop and the display will show the error An example of this is TUNE 9 ERROR STF STOP PU Error 9 Inverter trip e Check value of parameter 80 it should be set to the kilowatts capacity of the motor Example 7 horsepower motor 7 x 0 746 5 22 KW If the drive does not auto tune correctly and parameters 80 and 81 are not set back to 9999 the drive will still be in advanced MFVC mode using Mitsubishi motor constants This is OK as long as peak current does not exceed twice the motor nameplate rated current If the peak currents are greater than twice the motor nameplate take the drive out of the MFVC mode Parameter 80 and 81set to 9999 and manually adjust the torque boost Monitoring Peak Current Check the peak output current of the drive with full load Run the car in both directions and monitor peak current using the FR PU04 parameter unit 1 Press the help key twice from the main menu until monitor appears then press rea q a 2 Scroll down using the arrow button to PEAK I and press read The peak current will be displayed from the last run the car made As long as the peak current does not exceed twice the motor nameplate current when the car is run up and down drive setup is good If i
322. rameters that require field adjustment to smooth the elevator ride All the other parameter values are set to the MCE Drive defaults Set values for 200 volts The value at 400V is twice that of 200V Do not initialize the drive in the field if it is not required Setting A1 03 1110 and pressing enter will initialize the Drive and will set all of the drive parameters to the MCE Drive default values Parameter A1 03 will display 0 after Initialization 3 86 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index_ _MCE Web Yaskawa F7 Drive At the factory MCE sets drive parameters to the values in the MCE Set column and saves those values as defaults by setting parameter 02 03 1 In the field the drive parameters can be reset to MCE Set values by setting parameter A1 03 1110 The Field Adjustable parameters can then be re entered The Yaskawa drive software has been modified for this application Some of the parameters in this sheet are different and are not available in the drive manuals Ifa drive has been replaced in the field then all the drive parameters should be entered manually and should be verified according to this parameter sheet Startup for Flux Vector Mode Closed Loop Enable the drive for Flux Vector Mode by setting parameter A1 02 3 e Remember to reset preset speed minimums back to the design settings sent with the con troller e Attempt to run the elevator on inspection while in Flux Vector mode If encoder
323. ration of the SET 9000 system as the car travels at contract speed 10 After smoothing the tape edges wipe off all excess oil and dirt from the face of the tape so that the magnets will stick properly when they are installed later Do not use rags that leave lint on the tape during cleaning 2 4 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web SET 9000 Landing System Interconnect Box Installation The interconnect box contains the electronics that interpret the landing sensor inputs for the car controller Depending on your installation requirements you may have one of two intercon nect boxes e Cartop Station Most installations use a cartop station containing not only the board that connects to the landing sensor but boards performing other functions as well Control Box In some installations there is a requirement that the microprocessor and door controller electronics that are normally in the cartop station be located in the Tricon elevator control cabinet instead In these cases a smaller interconnect box the control box is used in place of the cartop station Figure 2 1 earlier in this section shows an installation using the con trol box actual unit shown to the right Regardless of the interconnect box type used mount it in a secure location on the elevator crosshead close enough to the landing sensor head to connect the two with the cable provided Sensor Head Installation Please refer to SET 9000 Land
324. rcuit breaker sized in conformance to all applicable national state and local electrical codes in order to provide the necessary motor branch circuit protection for the Drive Unit and motor Incorrect motor branch circuit protection will void the warranty and may create a hazardous condition Proper grounding is vitally important to safe and successful operation Bring your ground wire to the system subplate You must choose the proper conductor size and minimize the resistance to ground by using the shortest possible routing See National Electrical Code Article 250 95 or the applicable local electrical code Before applying power to the controller physically check all the power resistors and other compo nents located in the resistor cabinet and inside the controller Components loosened during ship ment may cause damage For proper operation of the AC Drive Unit in your controller you must make sure that 1 A direct solid ground is provided in the machine room to properly ground the controller and motor Indirect grounds such as the building structure or a water pipe may not provide proper grounding and could act as an antenna to radiate RFI noise thus disturbing sensitive equipment in the building Improper grounding may also render any RFI filter ineffective 2 The incoming power to the controller and the outgoing power wires to the motor are in their respective separate grounded conduits This equipment may contain voltages as high
325. rd PW5 Board Gateway Board PW5 Board CAR 1 CAR 2 ij iB Shielded Twisted Pair shield connected at one end only Alternatively a separate twisted pair may be used for each car iB af iB To Additional Cars 1 25 Tricon General I nformation A exe Figure 1 16 Car Group Communication Alternate Configuration NYCHA DISPATCHER cN LN CTD Gateway Board Gateway Board Gateway Board Car 1 Cc Co Disp Car1 Car2 Car3 Car 1 2 A Car 2 He U Disp Car 1 Car 2 Car 3 Car 3 U PW5 Board Dispatch Board Shielded Twisted Pair shield connected at ne end only PW5 Board N1 N2 SHLD PW5 Board 1 26 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _ MCE Web stway Equipment ET 9000 Installation rmal amp Final Limit Switches wes Hoistway Equipment A Hoistway Equipment This section describes SET 9000 Landing System installation Normal and final limit switch installation Follow instructions in Section 1 for piping and wiring encoder mounting and grounding instructions Follow the wiring diagrams as you complete this section They are always the con trolling document Hoistway Equipment A eE SET 9000 Landing System The SET 9000 landing system uses solid state sensors to detect the presence of magnetic strips placed on a length of 2 inch steel tape that runs the length of the elevator hoistway Magnetic strips
326. re Phase 1 alternate recall floor floor 110 Fire Smoke detectors yes no no yes no When set to Yes smoke detectors set to are reset by lobby recall latch parameter 117 Yes will clear when switch the lobby recall switch is operated 111 Fire Constant pressure yes no yes yes no Closed doors will open with constant pres on DOB to open doors sure on the DOB button If released before doors are fully open they will reclose 112 Fire Constant pressure yes no no yes no Open doors will close as long as the door on DCB to close doors close button is being pressed If it is released before the doors are fully closed they will reopen 113 Fire Allow recall while yes no yes yes no If set to Yes the car will auto recall while in in att or ind operation attendant or independent mode 114 Fire Recall wait time if 0 25 5 25 sec When a car fire recall is activated and the car on att Or ind car is in attendant or independent the car will wait for the time set in this parameter before initiating a recall operation Interacts with Parameter 113 115 Fire Close doors with yes no no yes no Close doors at nudging speed during fire nudging speed during recall fire recall 116 Fire Has remote fire yes no no yes no Set to yes to enable the input for a remote recall switch fire switch 117 Fire Lobby bypass yes no lyes yes no Causes smoke detectors to reset or be switch resets ALL smoke reset and bypassed by the lobby switch
327. re in Step 20 below or refer to the Quick Start Up and Reference Guide which was shipped with the controller 3 4 3 104 Manual 42 02 2T00 Access parameter 3 Enter the motor nameplate rated armature current in amps Press enter to save Access parameter 7 Enter the motor nameplate rated armature voltage in volts Press enter to save Access parameter 9 Enter the nominal AC input voltage to the drive found on termi nals L1 L2 and L3 Press enter to save Access parameter 10 Enter the pulses per revolution PPR of the motor encoder This data can usually be found on the sticker attached to the encoder Press enter to save Access parameter 11 Enter the motor nameplate RPM Press enter to save Access parameter 16 This parameter is the gearless ratio of the encoder If the encoder is mounted to the motor shaft set this value to 1 000 Contents __Index _MCE Web Magnetek DSD 412 DC Drive 9 Access parameter 17 Enter the contract speed of the car in feet per minute FPM Press enter to save 10 Access parameter 49 Enter the running field current in amps If field weakening is not used enter the full field current in amps Press enter to save 11 Access parameter 50 Enter the full field current in amps This may or may not be the value on the motor nameplate the fields may have been re wired If you are unsure check the survey data to see what the field current was with the old controller
328. related parameters need to be adjusted on the controller Limit board and code mandated testing must be completed and approved This section describes e Limit Board Adjustment Final Test 41 Release to Normal Operation Me Limit Board Adjustment Depending upon whether or not the controller must meet A17 1 2000 CSA B44 00 require ments one of two limit boards may be used Please refer to Limit Board Standard on page 4 3 for systems not required to meet A17 1 2000 CSA B44 00 requirements Please refer to 2K Limit Gripper Board on page 4 9 for systems required to meet A17 1 2000 CSA B44 00 requirements Figure 4 1 Limit and 2K Limit Gripper Boards Limit Board Standard 2K Limit Gripper Board 5 Tae ES 34 G 4 2 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index_ _MCE Web Limit Board Adjustment Limit Board Standard The limit board monitors the signal from a DC tachometer or an encoder to control car speed under various operating conditions The board monitors direction speed and status by inter preting hoistway switch input states Please refer to Limit Board Diagram on page 4 4 fora more detailed view of the wiring switches and LEDs described here There are two parallel rows of LEDs on the Limit board Input states are displayed by the left row of LEDs D1 D9 The right row D10 D17 displays board fault codes or status Adjusting the Limit board requires the car be ru
329. rior to reaching the top landing The hoistway switch must be adjusted to open at the same time the normal selec tor slowdown magnet comes on HUSL Up High Speed Slow Down This input is the first up slowdown to open prior to reaching the top landing This slowdown is used only on cars with contract speeds greater than 200FPM DSL Down slow down This input is the last down slowdown prior to reaching the bot tom landing This input should be on when the car is above it and the DN down input is on HDSL Down High Speed Slow Down This slowdown is present on higher speed cars and is further away from the bottom landing than DSL This input should be on when the car is above it and the DN input is on UP This input indicates that the car is to move in the up direction DN This input indicates that the car is to move in the down direction MS This input indicates that the car is to move at medium speed one floor run speed if HS is used or contract speed if contract speed is equal to or less than 200 FPM HS This input indicates that the car is to move at high speed multi floor run speed DZBP Door Zone Bypass This input indicates that the door locks are being bypassed When this input is on car speed should not exceed 100 FPM Diagnostic and Mode LEDs LEDs D10 through D16 have two functions When the Limit board is in learn mode these LEDs provide feedback as learn progress is made In normal mode each LED has a
330. rive please contact MCE for assistance Refer to the Magnetek HPV 600 Elevator Drive Technical Manual for detailed explanation The HPV 600 drive is fully digital with configurable inputs outputs and modes of operation This procedure describes configuring the HPV 600 to operate with the Tricon control Due to the complexity of drive systems it is not possible to cover all potential problems or possibilities If you encounter any difficulties please contact MCE Technical Support Use the Magnetek manual as a reference but follow the start up and adjusting procedures here Before the controller and drive were shipped the entire system was tested at the factory All drive parameters were preset based on the information provided in the controller order form The drive should run on inspection operation with very little effort If not verify that the motor information given to MCE was correct If not contact Engineering for assistance System Overview The control system uses the HPV 600 internal speed curve algorithm Adjustments to the accel rate jerk rates and decel rate are made through the drive HPV 600 Drive Programming Closed Loop The drive has been modified to meet MCE specifications If replacement of the drive is ever required please contact MCE Technical Support MCE will not accept any drive warranty repair without a Return Material Authorization RMA number issued by Technical Support Remov ing boards from the drive withou
331. rols the accelera tion deceleration and various jerk rates of the drive There are four independently selectable speed curves This system uses only the first speed curve The preliminary setting of the speed curve parameters was done in the drive programming sec tion The values that were entered are designed to be somewhat aggressive to ensure that the car does not overshoot the floors but rather comes in slow This will prevent the car from run ning into the pit or the overhead until the final values for the speed curve are entered 1 Place a balanced load in the car 2 Disable the doors and place a car call two floors away from the present position of the car one floor away if the car speed is 200 feet per minute or less Keep the elevator away from the terminal floors at this time 3 While the caris running monitor the car speed with a hand tach It should be running at contract speed 5 If not adjust the CONTRACT MTR SPEED A1 parameter to obtain the correct speed 4 Observe the deceleration of the car as it approaches the floor The car should decelerate rapidly and there should be two noticeable steps of speed prior to stopping at the floor If there are not confirm that the tape reader is properly installed and the slowdown magnets are placed the correct distance from the floor 5 Change the DECEL RATE 0 A2 parameter to 3 5 ft s2 This will yield a slower rate of deceleration and less approach distance to the floor
332. rom the cen ter of the leveling magnet to the bottom edge of the slowdown magnet Down slowdown For Down Slowdowns Measurement is from the center of the leveling magnet to the top edge of the Slowdown slowdown magnet distance minus 6 inches Floor level Slowdown distance minus 6 inches Up slowdown 2 10 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __ Index _MCE Web SET 9000 Landing System No High Speed Operation Front amp Rear Doors When a car has both front and rear doors two additional magnets are required per floor Front door zone magnet For each floor a front door zone magnet is placed in tape row 1 immediately to the left of the floor level magnet Rear door zone magnet For each floor a rear door zone magnet is placed in tape row 3 immediately to the right of the floor level magnet Leveling and Slowdown magnets are NORTH POLE Door Zone magnets are SOUTH POLE Down slowdown Slowdown distance minus 6 inches Front door zone Floor level Slowdown distance minus 6 inches Rear door zone Up slowdown 1 Install a door zone magnet for each door opening in its corresponding location If there are two openings at a floor install both door zone magnets Door zone magnets are SOUTH POLE Contents __Index _MCE Web m Hoistway Equipment A eE High Speed Operation Front Door ONLY High speed operation requires four slowdown magnets per floor one floor up and down magnets
333. rossover Adjusts the bandwidth of the current regulator This value is typically left at the default of 500 Too small a number will cause vibration in the car usually at full speed or going into or out of full speed Too large a number will cause the motor to become sluggish S Curve Pattern Adjustments The Tricon control generates an S shape speed pattern The output provides a step less 0 10VDC bipolar speed reference to the speed reference input of the DSD 412 drive The drive is configured to use this voltage and polarity to run 0 to contract speed in a forward or reverse direction The S curve and speed pots have been set at the factory Only minor adjustment will be required The accel rate has been set to a slow rate full counterclockwise The decel rate has been set to a fast rate full clockwise These settings will help with your first high speed runs The speed board output can be measured at terminals TB1 3 common and TB2 9 Ref When the car is run in the up direction the Ref terminal will be positive with respect to common Speed Pots The speed board has five adjustable speed output voltages These pots have a limited output See the table below Clockwise rotation will increase voltage The pot setting can be measured with the car stopped by measuring each of the speed input terminals TB1 1 TB1 HI to the board common TB1 3 Adjust the corresponding pot for the desired voltage speed The volt age required for
334. rs in the Motor A5 sub menu do not need to be modified from their default values Contents __Index__J _ MCE Web A Startup amp Drive Adjustment A ek Configure CO Menu L gewy Access the User Switches C1 sub menu SPEED COMMAND SRC Set to MULTI STEP RUN COMMAND SRC Set to EXTERNAL TBL SPD REF RELEASE Set to REG RELEASE CONT CONFIRM SRC Set to EXTERNAL TBL The remaining parameters in the User Switches C1 sub menu do not need to be modified from their default values L wp aANnanrFwhn BRE 8 T Access the Logic Inputs C2 sub menu The first parameter is LOG IN 1TB1 16 Set to DRIVE ENABLE LOG IN 2 TB1 17 Set to RUN LOG IN 3 TB1 18 Set to FAULT RESET LOG IN 4 TB1 19 Set to STEP REF BO LOG IN 5 TB1 20 Set to STEP REF B1 LOG IN 6 TB1 21 Set to STEP REF B2 LOG IN 7 TB1 22 Set to STEP REF B3 LOG IN 8 TB1 23 Set to UP DWN LOG IN 9 TB1 24 Set to CONTACT CFIRM Access the Logic Outputs C3 sub menu The first parameter is LOG OUT 1TB1 5 Set to CLOSE CONTACT LOG OUT 2 TB1 7 Set to READY TO RUN LOG OUT 3 TB1 9 Set to SPEED REG RIS LOG OUT 4 TB1 11 Set to SPEED REG RLS RELAY COIL 1 Set to READY TO RUN The HPV900 drive is now correctly configured 3 52 Manual 42 02 2T00 _Contents __ Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 900 AC Vector Drive Running the Car 1 Attempt to run the car up using the inspection up down buttons Hold the up button until the car start
335. rtop box or in the car station Its inputs and outputs are connected to equipment normally located on the top of the car or in the cabinet Table 5 6 Cartop Board CTOP N v6 2 Input Examples A17 1 2000 CarTop Board I nputs Terminals Connectors Name Label AF 1 Al 1 Top of car inspection switch TINS AF 2 Al 2 Top of car up inspection button TIUB AF 3 A1 3 Top of car inspection down button TI DB AF 4 A1 4 Top of car inspection 2 TIN2 AF 5 A1 5 Attendant ATT AF 6 A1 6 Cam dropped contact CDC AF 7 Al 7 Half load switch HLSW AF 8 A1 8 Access Gate Monitor AGM BF 1 B1 1 Open limit DOL BF 2 B1 2 Close limit DCL BF 3 B1 3 Safety edge SE BF 4 B1 4 Electric eye EE BF 5 B1 5 Simplex switch SPLX BF 6 B1 6 Hospital emergency switch HEM BF 7 B1 7 Rear open limit RDOL BF 8 B1 8 Rear close limit RDCL CO 1 C1 1 Leveling up LU CO 2 C1 2 Leveling down LD CO 3 C1 3 Rear inner door zone RIDZ CO 4 C1 4 Inner door zone IDZ CO 5 C1 5 Up step US CO 6 C1 6 Down step DS CO 7 C1 7 Rear safety edge RSE CO 8 C1 8 Rear electric eye REE 5 26 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Main Menus Table 5 7 Cartop Board CTOP N v6 2 Output Examples A17 1 2000 CarTop Board Outputs Terminals Connectors Name Label AF 25 AF26 A3 1 to A3 2 Car lantern up CLU AF 17 AF 18 A2 1
336. s logic inputs SPD COM MAND SRC C1 not set to ANALOG I NPUT Not used Startup amp Drive Adjustment Table 3 6 HPV 900 Drive Faults Me Speed Dev Desired speed differs from actual speed Actual motor speed differs from demanded speed by more than specified by SPD DEV HI LEVEL A1 or SPD DEV LO LEVEL A1 longer than time specified by SPD DEV TIME A1 Stall Test Fault Motor current exceeds value of STAL TEST LVL for more than time period specified by STALL FAULT TI ME Confirm correct settings of STALL TEST LVL A1 and STALL FAULT TIME A1 Check motor machine and brake for possi ble mechanical binds Check for correct setting of motor param eters Check for excessive motor current Tq Lim 2Hi 4cube Torque limits based on programmed motor data exceed drive capacity Verify that the drive is sized correctly Verify that the motor parameters are set correctly Verify that the MTR TORQ LI MIT A1 and REGEN TORQ LIMIT A1 are set correctly Undervolt Fault DC Bus voltage low DC bus voltage dropped below user entered values of INPUT L L Volts A4 and UV FAULT LEVEL A4 Check braking resis tance and connections Verify proper AC input voltage to drive Possible disturbance on AC line Undervolt Alarm DC Bus voltage low dur ing run DC bus voltage dropped below user entered values of INPUT L L Volts A4 and UV ALARMLEVEL A4 Check braking resis
337. s the consecutive faults counter is reset to zero The consecutive faults counter is incremented every time a fault or timeout occurs If too many successive faults occur the counter will reach the value set in parameter 73 consecutive faults count and the car will be disabled 75 Drive Number of drive 0 255 5 each How many times the drive will try to reset reset attempts before before giving up giving up 76 Drive Time to hold 0 25 5 0 sec Time to hold the drive running after the drive run after brake brake output is turned off Applies only to drops insp inspection operation 77 Drive Time to hold 0 25 5 1 sec Time to hold the drive running after brake drive run after brake output is turned off Applies only to auto drops auto matic operation 78 Drive Time to wait 0 25 5 0 sec Car will not attempt to relevel until this time before releveling relev has elapsed This prevents the rapid switch debounce ing of relays if the car bounces 79 Drive Time reset output 0 25 5 3 5 sec Drive reset line On time ON when drive resets 80 Drive Time reset output 0 25 5 4 0 sec Drive reset line Off time OFF when drive reset 81 Brake Time to delay the 0 25 5 O sec Time to delay the brake lift brake lift auto 82 Brake How long brake 0 25 5 3 5 sec Determines how long brake lift voltage will lift voltage is applied be applied It must be long enough to allow the brake to lift fully 83 Brake Time B
338. s parameter to the motor nameplate value 27 MOTOR POLES parameter If the synchronous speed of the motor is 900 RPM set this parameter to 8 poles If the synchronous speed of the motor is 1200 RPM set this parameter to 6 poles If the synchronous speed of the motor is 1800 RPM set this parameter to 4 poles This value must be an even number or a Setup Fault will occur 28 RATED MTR SPEED Speed the motor should be turning when it is excited at its rated frequency and producing rated power Set to the value from the motor nameplate or manufacturer data sheet The final setting can be calculated by performing an adap tive tune This value must be less than 900 RPM on 8 pole motors 1200 RPM on 6 pole motors and 1800 RPM on 4 pole motors or a drive set up fault will occur Reuland motors have the synchro nous speed on the motor nameplate Setting this parameter to synchronous speed will result in a set up fault The correct value is approximately synchronous speed times 0 9833 Contents __ Index _MCE Web 37 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A ek 29 NO LOAD CURR Current required to turn the motor at rated speed with no load This can be determined from the motor manufacturer data sheets on new motors If it is not available temporarily set it to 50 The final setting can be calculated during adaptive tuning Remaining Motor A5 sub menu parameters remain at their default values Configure CO Menu 1 Access the User Swi
339. s ss crirerrerrereererrerio titt En EE ECEE EIEEE 4 16 Normal Operation siterer sr norn EOE EIA ORN PAPECO EDE ETEEN ETEEN EES 4 17 Po ea Sea had has e eee area A bik pe Re eae as 4 18 Reset Limit Section Safety ccc ccc cee cence ne eee errre reren 4 18 Rope Gripper Rese lt 2c 02 440cd0ceedeeeeeare deeb ee eres eben eee bee ee eeereeee ee 4 18 Final TOG 4 dk 644K ARERR KAKA AEDEEERAAHKS CRRA REHER RRR AEREE ORE 4 19 EE N E EEEE AE A ET ET ATA A E TANA T A AS T 4 19 Prepara hc fae Uae RE Seu dees 4G Stes E a ewe G EU 4 19 Contract Speed Buffer Test Cal vcs view ee veeed Cdeen nd arbre eire EE eevee tede 4 20 Contract Speed Buffer Test Counterweight 0 00 cece ccc e nunon 4 21 Governor OMI TOE ecru eer indien Eara 4 22 Propa cose tbcwss Sones caw a E a sedi O EA 4 22 Governor Safety Test Overspeed 1025 Regulator ccc eee cence 4 22 Problems Overspeeding 1025 Regulator 0 ccc cece cece cence nee e nes 4 23 Normal Terminal Stopping NTS Test 66s dane saeveiasosdueseeew ease iaeieasaws 4 23 Top Floor Test A Es 5 4 605 4 6 44 ee ee 4 23 Bottom Floor Tet PI hs ch ba hkS ereki ikra E KSEE DOE 4 23 Poa oor eg 6h ehhh Gd OOS ae het eea AE 4 23 Er PA hn a i E ERA ea 4 24 Magnetek HPY O00 do ook hoo rodres es ndide RENO EN EE REESE H ERS 4 24 Magnetek HPV 900 Drive snk ac 5 odes 65 GREECE HI HO4 Ss Ho De RE KEHOE SE eR wEw RES 4 24 PO AD00 es ceed ein eeesdedea bicags ein Keweed ede Reever ous 4 2
340. s the key to abort change You will be back to the Floor Setup screen To return to the PI Board setup menu use the key Yes No keys If you are using an output group to drive a light duty CE driver board that in turn drives CE digital indicators special characters may be displayed by entering a value larger than 32 Please refer to PI Programming Using CE Light Duty Driver on page 5 60 Contents __Index _MCE Web e The Hand Held Unit Example 1 Single output per floor lamp Me Set up for 9th floor PI Board position indicator and lantern and gong not activated PI Floor setup 9 Jf 11 LU LD RLU RLD N Y N N Ten 10 floor building No hall lanterns and gongs Enables 1 output of group in position B Single output per floor Example 2 Multiple closures used to drive light duty CE board Set up for 4th floor PI Board position indicator and lantern and gong PI Floor setup 4 4 LU LD RLU RLD N Y N Y Four 4 floor building With hall lanterns and gongs for front and rear door Binary outputs If configured Lantern outputs will map themselves in this sequence The first output will start at the bottom floor front door up lantern front door down lantern rear door up lantern rear door down lantern Lanterns will map themselves in the next available output after position indicators and direc tion arrows Direction arr
341. s to move If the motor moves in the down direction stop the car Using the programmer access the Configure CO menu Go to User Switches Cl and change parameter Motor Rotation from Forward to Reverse Again run the motor Confirm that the motor turns in the correct direction to move the car up or down Using the programmer access the Display D1 menu Monitor parameter Speed Ref erence Run the car in the down direction The speed reference displayed on the drive should be negative Using the inspection up button run the car in the up direction The speed reference should be positive In the Display D1 menu monitor the Speed Feedback parameter Run the car in the down direction The speed feedback should be negative If not reverse the A and A sig nals from the encoder to the drive While using the inspection up down buttons to run the car use a hand tach to check car speed It should be moving at approximately the same speed as that displayed on the drive If not using the drive programmer access the Adjust AO menu Access User Switches AL Adjust the Contract Motor Spd parameter until the car is running at exactly the same speed as displayed by Speed Feedback The car is now started and running on inspection Drive Parameter Reference The following table describes drive parameters and provides a recommended setting for each Refer to the previous section for initial programming Please refer to HPV 900 Startup on
342. s variable frequency drives The following wiring practices should be followed when piping and wiring high voltage lines to avoid EMI problems 1 Run all motor leads in a separate conduit All motor lead runs should be as short as pos sible Control cabinet entry should be as close to the final termination point as possible 2 Run main line supply leads in a separate conduit 3 Run all primary isolation transformer wiring in separate conduit from the main line to the transformer 4 Run all secondary isolation transformer wiring in a separate conduit from the trans former to the drive cabinet 5 A single point ground should be established inside the control cabinet and a 8 AWG ground wire run directly from each of the following devices to this single point Earth Ground from running water supply hydro electric supplied ground or a ground supplied via an earthing rod to the single ground stud e Continuous wire from the main line disconnect to the single ground stud e Continuous wire from the motor frame to the single ground stud e Continuous wire from the isolation transformer frame to the single ground stud e Continuous wire from the line filter frame to the single point ground stud Jumper the N stud on the line filter to the line filter frame e Continuous wire from the load reactor frame to the single point ground stud e Continuous wire from the drive frame ground stud to the single point ground stud Proper Grounding Proced
343. se installations an optional Dispatcher board is mounted in the group dispatcher cabinet A two car group example of this board is shown below Figure 1 6 Optional Dispatcher Board Please refer to Car Group Communication Alternate Configuration NYCHA on page 1 26 for an example of how a Dispatcher board is connected inside the dispatcher cabinet 1 10 Manual 42 02 2700 _Contents Index _MCE Web Safety Safety Certain fundamental warnings must be kept in mind at all times to help avoid severe personal injury or equipment damage Personal Safety Tricon Controllers should only be installed by qualified licensed trained elevator person nel familiar with the operation of microprocessor based elevator controls Verify that all safety devices limits governors hoistway locks car gate etc are fully functional before attempting to run the elevator Never operate Tricon controls with any safety device inoperative The user is responsible for complying with the current National Electrical Code with respect to the overall installation of equipment and for proper sizing of electrical conduc tors connected to the controls The user is responsible for understanding and applying all current local state provincial and federal codes that govern practices such as controller placement applicability wiring protection disconnections over current protection and grounding procedures Controller equipment is at li
344. sion 6 and above software The car requires version 6 software for the MPU CTRL 1 or 2 and the CTOP boards The dispatcher requires version 6 software for the MPU Other car and dispatcher system boards may be version 5 software 6 5 Operations A ek Input Mapping When emergency power is enabled the dispatcher will require six inputs for the lobby selection switches and two inputs for emergency power and emergency power off Emergency power operation is enabled by setting dispatcher parameter 20 Emergency Power Recall Timeout time to a value other than zero Assuming you want emergency power operation you should set a minimum of 45 seconds for this parameter This will cause the dispatcher to provide the inputs for emergency power as described above The inputs used for emergency power will be located on the DHALL board B location This is the second group of 8 inputs on this board They were previously used for the first 8 hall calls All hall call wires will have to be shifted to the right by 8 locations The bottom floor up call will not start on the DHALL CLT location This will continue on to the DHALL 2 board You may need an additional I O board or I O board field terminal board to relocate all of the hall calls Following is a list of new inputs that will be created when the emer gency power option is provided All inputs will select the function when turned on Table 6 1 Emergency Power Option I nputs
345. source that signals torque External TB 1 External External TB ramp down stop if used Run logic tb1 Serial Brk Pick Flt Brake pick fault enable Enable Disable Disable Disable Brk Hold Flt Ena Brake hold fault enable Enable Disable Disable Disable Ext Torq Cmd Src When Speed Reg Type External Reg None None None sets source of torque command Serial Dir Confirm Confirms proper analog signal polarity Enabled Disabled Disabled when set to Enable and a logic input is Disabled 3 35 Startup amp Drive Adjustment Me Table 3 3 HPV 600 Drive Parameters Closed Loop 3 36 Manual 42 02 2T00 S Curve Abort Addresses how S Curve Speed Reference Enabled Disabled Disabled Generator handles a reduction in speed Disabled command before S Curve Generator has reached target speed Fast Flux Reduces starting takeoff time by reducing Enabled Enabled Enabled motor fluxing time Disabled Main DIP Ena Enables Mains DIP Speed A1 parameter Enabled Disabled Disabled which reduces speed when a UV alarm Disabled low voltage is declared DB Protection Dynamic braking Protection fault or alarm Fault Fault Fault selection Alarm Encoder Fault Temporarily disables the Encoder Fault Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Stopping Mode Determines stopping mode when Immediate Immediate mmediate Spd Command Src multi step Ramp to stop Motor Ovrid Sel Motor Overlo
346. speed control system that will cause the drive not to initiate a slowdown at any floor Top Floor Test Procedure A Danger If the car has a counterweight safety ensure that the safety will not apply by tying down the safety actuating arm prior to performing this test Failure to prevent the safety from apply ing may result in the safety applying while the buffer is compressed 1 Access the Parking Floor parameter 141 in the Setup Parameters menu 2 Change this parameter to the top floor Step 2 commands the car to run to the top floor When the car reaches the top terminal floor it will not slow down The ETS system will trip stopping the car 3 After completing the test remove the drive jumper and any tiedown that may have been placed on a safety 4 24 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Final Test Bottom Floor Test Procedure A Danger If the car has a counterweight safety ensure that the safety will not apply by tying down the safety actuating arm prior to performing this test Failure to prevent the safety from apply ing may result in the safety applying while the buffer is compressed 1 Access the Parking Floor parameter 141 in the Setup Parameters menu 2 Change this parameter to the bottom floor Step 2 commands the car to run to the bottom floor When the car reaches the bottom terminal floor it will not slow down The ETS system will trip stopping the car 3 After completing th
347. speed is detected from the limit board encoder input The following flags need to be enabled DS17 On Rope gripper enabled DS18 On Rope gripper overspeed from overspeed parameter e Alternately or along with DS18 Flag DS19 Rope gripper overspeed from governor input may also be enabled e Car moves away from a floor out of the door zone with doors and gate open e Relay sequencing test fails Each time the car comes to a halt the board sequentially one at a time tests three relays for the gripper and monitors the result Relays are tested individually to prevent the gripper from applying and opening the safety circuit The gripper output and gripper relay states do not correspond 4 16 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __ Index _MCE Web Limit Board Adjustment Normal Operation After normal learn is complete the limit gripper board enters nor mal operation DS25 is on continuously In normal operation the board checks and responds to the following Car speed at limit switches If excessive the safety will open to prevent the car from going beyond the floor Car speed above contract speed Car direction If the car is commanded to move in one direction and its speed exceeds 62 FPM in the other direction for greater than 1 second the safety circuit will open In this event the board will automatically reset after the car has halted for longer than 2 seconds If a run has begun and speed remains at zero but a s
348. system inertia in terms of time it takes SEC 0 1 9 9 2 0 2 at rated torque to accelerate to contract motor speed In general acts as a gain mul tiplier internal to drive software 42 Stability Determines amount of damping in regulator 0 2 9 9 1 2 for smoother transitions Used to modify response of speed regulator to correct mis match of system inertia Should only be adjusted after INERTIA and RESPONSE are set correctly If quality of ride is reduced by increasing STABILTY from its default value system inertia should be checked again 49 Weak Field AMP Sets motor field current value in weaken AMP 0 2 48 5 0 condition sets motor weaken field ff 50 Full Field AMP Hoist motor nameplate field current sets AMP 0 2 48 6 motor full field o C aaaa E Laa 51 Field L R Motor field time constant SEC 0 1 10 0 80 0 270 52 Rated Field VDC Rated motor field voltage V 50 525 240 Note 3 p J 53 Standing Field Sets standing motor field current motor field 0 2 48 2 5 AMP current when car is not running Jf Joo fo Je 54 Field Response Sets motor field regulator response RAD 1 10 5 5 55 Motor Field VAC Motor field input AC voltage at terminals V 50 525 JO AC1 and AC2 TB4 Must be set to a mea 0 sured value if external boosted voltage is applied to terminals AC1 and AC2 If setto 0 p the drive will select value of parameter 9 input voltage at L1 L2 L3 56 Field Strength Sets speed as
349. t Open motor phase Check motor motor connections motor windings and main con tactor contacts Setup Fault 1 Rated motor speed poles and frequency not set correctly RATED EXCIT FREQ A5 RATED MTR SPEED A5 and MOTOR POLES A4 do not satisfy formula 9 6 lt 120 Excit Freq Motor Poles Motor Speed lt 1222 3 Setup Fault 2 Encoder PPR and motor poles not set correctly Check ENCODER PULSES MOTOR POLES parameters Must sat isfy formula Encoder Pulses Motor Poles gt 64 Setup Fault 3 Motor Poles parameter not set correctly MOTOR POLES A4 must be set to an even number Setup Fault 4 Setup Fault 5 Encoder PPR and Motor Speed parameters not set correctly Rated Motor Power and Rated Motor Voltage not set correctly Check ENCODER PULSES A1 and RATED MTR SPEED A1 Must satisfy formula 300 000 lt Rated Motor Speed Encoder Pulses lt 18 000 000 Check RATED MOTOR PWR A4 and RATED MTR VOLTS A4 Must satisfy formula 07184 Motor Pwr Motor Voltage Drive Current Rating Setup Fault 6 Multi Step speed refer ence exceeds contract speed Check SPEED COMMAND 1 through SPEED COMMAND 16 and CONTRACT CAR SPD parameters Setup Fault 7 Run logic inputs are not correctly defined Check LOG IN 1 TB1 16 through LOG IN 9 TB1 24 for correct setting Setup Fault 8 DIR CONFIRM C1 enabled RUN UP RUN DOWN not assigned a
350. t 8 or down arrow to decrease one increment When satisfied press the key to start clock e Press the key to abort change You will move back to the Clock screen To return to the Dispatcher Setup menu use the key The Hand Held Unit A ek BMS Setup The BMS board provides a modem control interface between the Tricon dispatcher and a remote monitoring system Table 5 31 BMS Screen Parameters eer HHU Display Atala nical Units Help 1 J ob identification name 8 characters 2 Phone number 1 Enter the primary dial out phone number 3 Phone number 2 Enter the secondary dial out phone number 4 Call time 1 start hour 0 24 23 hours Enter the time at which the pri 24 off mary dial out phone should be dialed O midnight 23 11pm 5 Call time 1 end hour 0 24 23 hours Enter the time at which the pri mary dial out phone should be hung up O midnight 23 11pm 6 Call time 2 start hour 0 24 23 hours Enter the time at which the sec 24 off ondary dial out phone should be dialed O midnight 23 11pm 7 Call time 2 end hour 0 24 23 hours Enter the time at which the sec ondary dial out phone should be hung up O midnight 23 11pm 8 Number of cars in group 1 6 2 each Enter the number of cars in this group 9 Number of floors 2 32 2 floor Enter the number of floors served by this group 10 Car 1 has rear doors 1 yes 0 1l yes Set to 1 yes
351. t when the car is on the fully com pressed buffer the stick and any car devices do not come in contact with the tape hold down assembly L Using the clips provided attach the bottom bracket to the back of the guide rail as shown below The bracket should be about 6 inches below the lowest floor level and must be square to the guide rail Figure 2 3 Bottom Tape Bracket I nstallation e wN NO 8 9 Lower tape hanger Double nut _ Tension spring Lower bracket Loosen the nuts on the spring tension bolt until only two threads are showing Remove the tape hanger clamp Slowly run the car down until the buffer is fully compressed Check that there is suffi cient clearance between the car and the lower rail bracket Position the steel tape against the lower tape hanger and reinstall the clamp to hold the tape in position Tighten the clamp bolts ONLY LIGHTLY Cut the steel tape one foot below the clamp bottom Loop the steel tape and insert the end through the clamp so that about 1 inch protrudes from the clamp bottom Tighten the clamp bolts securely Adjust the spring tensioning nut to provide adequate tensioning of the tape in the hoist way Use the second double nut to insure the first nut is unable to loosen During installation the edges of the tape may be gouged After tape installation is com plete go over the tape edges with a fine file to remove any burrs or gouges This will ensure quiet ope
352. t authorization may void the manufacturer warranty Once the controller has been powered up the drive must be programmed to operate correctly with the equipment on the job site MCE has pre programmed the drive based on the informa tion provided in the electrical survey but it is important to confirm ALL parameters before attempting to run the car The drive may fault on initial power up due to incorrectly set parameters This is normal and may be ignored at this time e Verify that the voltage on the motor nameplate matches the voltage input to the drive If not contact MCE Technical Support before proceeding e Confirm that the three leads from the controller to the motor are connected If there are more than three motor leads make sure that the motor is wired in a wye configuration with correct field rotation or follow motor manufacturer recommendations e Locate the test sheets shipped with the controller These sheets list the drive parameters calculated for your installation 3 26 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 600 Drive Parameters Closed Loop The following procedures are used to adjust the HPV 600 drive with optional closed loop soft ware This software allows the drive to operate with encoder feedback If the drive you are work ing on will not be using encoder feedback please refer to the earlier open loop discussion Please refer to HPV 600 AC Drive Start Up Open Loop o
353. t exceeds twice the motor nameplate current try auto tuning again If this fails take the drive out of MFVC mode Parameter 80 and 81 set to 9999 and manually adjust the torque boost Contents Index _MCE Web 3 97 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A eE Mitsubishi A500 Closed Loop Speed Control Closed loop speed control requires an encoder feedback board and a encoder mounted on the motor The encoder is typically 5 volt 1024 count per revolution Closed loop operation has three performance modes selected through the value set in parameter 370 You must start with mode 0 verifying the operation before moving to mode 1 or 2 To access any of the 300 parameters the encoder board must be installed Always remove power from the drive before unplugging or plugging in the encoder board Closed Loop Speed Control 370 Set to a 0 Overview Set all of the parame ters shown in the table for closed loop operation Please refer to A500 Parameters Closed Loop Speed Control on page 3 100 The following parameters are recognized when the encoder board is installed These parameters must be set properly for the drive to work in this mode 144 359 369 367 368 Parameter 370 set to a 0 requires the encoder direction parameter 359 be set properly for speed regulation from the encoder To determine if this parameter is set properly or the encoder is working do the following 1 Run the car at slow inspection speed with an empty
354. t until approximately 60 brake lifting voltage is obtained or the brake holding voltage previously measured If the brake drops at this level stop the car turn the pot clockwise 1 full turn and attempt to run the car again While running the car turn the inspection speed pot counterclockwise until the car runs at approximately 8 10 fpm Jump J 1 3 to J 1 2 releveling input Adjust V1 2 to approximately 80 of brake hold voltage This is the releveling brake voltage which may be adjusted higher or lower for a drag brake The brake shoes should not lift completely off the drum If the shoes lift completely off the drum stop the car Turn the V I 2 pot counterclockwise a couple of turns and repeat step 10 If the brake shoes lift completely on re level there may be insufficient torque in the hoist motor to assure adequate leveling control 3 90 Manual 42 02 2T00 11 12 B Remove jumper J 1 3 and J 1 2 Turn the ACC1 pot fully clockwise This will allow a rapid response of the brake regulator from a lower voltage level to a higher voltage level Turn the DEC1 pot fully clockwise This will allow rapid response of the brake regulator from a higher voltage level to a lower voltage level This will also help prevent excessive arcing on the contacts of the B relay Contents __index _MCE Web Mitsubishi A500 Variable Frequency Drive Mitsubishi A500 Variable Frequency Drive This section describes e A500 Startup and A
355. tained MCE will not be held responsible for circuit modifications made in the field unless they are approved in writing by MCE Circuit boards believed to be defective must be sent to MCE for repair and testing Field repair may leave the board with undetected problems Care should be taken when using test leads and jumpers to avoid shorting high voltage or ground to low voltage microprocessor circuits Contents Index _MCE Web 111 Tricon General I nformation A ek Installation Considerations L Ue WN Dust carbon or metallic particles should not be allowed to accumulate on any part of the control Avoid vibration and shock Avoid rapid temperature change high humidities high ambient temperatures Avoid caustic fumes Prevent electromagnetic interference This may be caused by radio transmitters high voltage inductive spikes from unsuppressed relay coils improper grounding and improper wiring practices The following should be noted The outer door will protect against interference only if closed When the door is open do not run high wattage radios next to the microprocessor Noise from door operator reactors can cause a problem if mounted on the controller Ifthe CRT shows lines spikes or other signs of interference check for electromagnetic interference noise by checking the following e Check for proper grounding e Check that high voltage wiring is not running near the MPU board or monitor Ifthe n
356. tance connected and sized correctly car balanced correctly Brk Pick Fault Brake pick state does not match the com manded state Disabled Bridge Fault The power module is detecting an overcur rent or over tempera ture condition Overcurrent Check sizing and connection of dynamic braking resistor Check for short in motor wiring or windings Over temperature Check drive cooling fan and heatsink Replace drive if fault cannot be corrected with above measures Charge Fault DC Bus has not charged DC Bus has not reached desired stabilized voltage level within 2 seconds Check incoming AC power If OK replace drive Comm Fault Invalid Checksum The programmer received four consecu tive invalid messages Possible noise or bad programmer connector Check connector on Control board and programmer Replace Control board or programmer if fault cannot be corrected Comm Fault No Drive Handshake The programmer lost communications with the drive Control board Possible noise or bad connector for programmer Check con nector on Control board and programmer Replace Control board or programmer if fault cannot be corrected Contactor Fault Contactor state does not match the commanded state The drive has turned on the command to close the main con tactor and the Contactor Confirm signal is not present for the amount of time specified by the Contact Fit Time parameter Cube Data F
357. tance and connections Verify proper AC input voltage to drive Possible disturbance on AC line 3 64 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 900 AC Vector Drive HPV 900 High Speed Adjustment The drive should be running on inspection speed at this point When commanded to run in the up direction the car should run up when commanded to run down the car should run down Use a hand tach to confirm that the speed displayed on the drive programmer at the parameter DISPLAY DO ELEVATOR DATA D1 SPEED REFERENCE exactly matches the speed at which the car is running While observing the hand tach run the car up and down in the middle section of the hoistway Modify the CONTRACT MTR SPEED parameter under the ADJ UST AO MOTOR A5 menu to exactly achieve the speed displayed at SPEED REFERENCE Car Balancing In order for the drive to perform properly the car must be properly balanced Geared cars are typically balanced with 40 50 of the cars rated capacity To confirm this 1 Access the car top Run the car on inspection to the center of the hoistway Stop the car so the crosshead on the counterweight is exactly adjacent to the crosshead on the car 2 Place a chalk mark on the cables in the machine room and mark the hoist motor so that while the car is run from the machine room you will be able to tell when the car passes through the center of the hoistway Move the car to a convenient floor Place 40 of t
358. tation provides both an interface between the controller and car equip ment like leveling systems and door operators and a cartop control station for running the car on Inspection mode from the cartop The illustration to the right shows an exterior view of a typical cartop station The emergency stop inspection normal safety and directional control buttons are visible across the top The illustration below shows the layout of a typi cal cartop station interior Figure 1 3 Typical Cartop Station Layout CTOP board 5V PS M30024 landing system board 1 6 Manual 42 02 2700 _Contents_ Index _MCE Web Tricon Cartop Circuit Boards Like the controller the circuit boards in the cartop station might vary slightly from job to job depending upon customer needs e CTOP board The I O 24 board configured with appropriate Terminal boards to handle the car operating panel interface e 5V PS A five volt power supply to handle low voltage component needs e M30024 Interface board for the SET 9000 cartop landing system Cartop J unction Box Some installations require that components typically mounted in the cartop station be located in the controller cabinet instead In these cases a smaller cartop interconnect box is used supporting only the landing system interface board A typical cartop junction box is shown to the right Car Station The car station is a semi custom addition to a typically user provide
359. tch in IN CAR inspection switch input effectively disabling in car inspection operation 131 Normal Independent 0 3 1 each The independent riser will behave the fol riser mode 1 to 3 lowing ways O off 0 Disabled will not accept calls 1 Normal will work only on SIMPLEX 2 Concurrent will work together with group calls 3 Automatic car will switch to the indepen dent riser and out of group if any calls are made on the independent riser 132 Inspection High inspec yes no no yes no Set both APP and LEV outputs when moving tion speed this allows inspection speed and approach speed to be set separately with certain drives Mitsubishi VVVF 133 Car switch Enable car yes no no yes no Car switch operation switch operation 134 Normal Pulse buzzer yes no no yes no Inspection flag 2 with car call registered 135 Normal Hold car last yes no no yes no The car will never stop at a floor with no direction when stopping direction it will either establish the direction from the hall call or will keep the last direc tion It will always light the proper lantern 5 46 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index _MCE Web Table 5 18 Car Setup Parameters Screen Main Menus 136 Normal Disable doors yes no no yes no When this flag is set doors will not reopen reopening with calls at due to calls at the floor the floor 137 Normal Car has a local yes no
360. tches C1 sub menu 2 SPEED COMMAND SRC Set to MULTISTEP 3 RUN COMMAND SRC Set to EXTERNAL TBL 4 Skip down to SPD REF RELEASE Set to REG RELEASE 5 CONT CONFIRM SRC Set to EXTERNAL TBL Remaining User Switches C1 sub menu parameters remain at their default values 6 Access the Logic Inputs C2 sub menu 7 LOGIN 1TB1 16 Set to DRIVE ENABLE 8 LOGIN 2 TB1 17 Set to CONTACT CFIRM 9 LOGIN 3 TB1 18 Set to FAULT RESET 10 LOG IN 4 TB1 19 Set to STEP REF BO 11 LOG IN 5 TB1 20 Set to STEP REF BL 12 LOGIN 6 TB1 21 Set to STEP REF B2 13 LOGIN 7 TB1 22 Set to STEP REF B3 14 LOG IN 8 TB1 23 Set to RUN DOWN 15 LOG IN 9 TB1 24 Set to RUN UP 16 Access the Logic Outputs C3 sub menu 17 LOG OUT 1TB1 5 Set to CLOSE CONTACT 18 LOG OUT 2 TB1 7 Set to READY TO RUN 19 LOG OUT 3 TB1 9 Set to SPEED REG RLS 20 LOG OUT 4 TB1 11 Set to SPEED REG RLS 21 RELAY COIL 1 Set to READY TO RUN The HPV600 drive is now configured for open loop operation 3 8 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _MCE Web Magnetek HPV 600 Running the Car 1 Attempt to run the car up using the inspection up down buttons Hold the up button 4 until the car starts to move If the motor moves in the down direction stop the car Using the programmer access the Configure CO menu Go to User Switches Cland change parameter Motor Rotation from Forward to Reverse Again run the motor Confirm that the motor turns in the correct dire
361. tentiometer allows the speed reference output to be ramped to 0 when the car enters the dead zone level When the car becomes level the up down signal will be dropped The speed reference will be ramped to zero at a rate determined by the R54 setting With R54 full clockwise the reference will ramp for 10 milliseconds With R54 full counterclockwise the ref erence will ramp for 0 5 seconds Normally the pot should be set full clockwise fastest ramp Final S Curve Adjustments S curve and speed pots have been set at the factory to the speeds shown above Only minor adjustment is required The accel rate has been set to a slow rate full counterclockwise The decel rate has been set to a fast rate full clockwise These setting will help with your first high speed runs preventing overshooting floors Adjust the accel decel and knee pots for a comfort able rate After the multi floor run has been adjusted you can adjust one floor runs Raise or lower one floor run speed to achieve the same finial leveling distance as multi floor runs A dual trace storage oscilloscope should be used to shape the S Curve output Insure the scope has a floating ground ground pin on the scope power cord must not be connected to earth ground The output common TB1 3 is not connected to ground You can monitor the speed reference and car speed at the drive analog outputs 3 110 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Table 3 18 DSD 412 Drive Par
362. ter the primary dial out phone number 3 Phone number 2 Enter the secondary dial out phone number 4 Call time 1 start hour 0 24 23 hours Enter the time at which the pri 24 off mary dial out phone should be dialed O midnight 23 11pm 5 Call time 1 end hour 0 24 23 hours Enter the time at which the pri mary dial out phone should be hung up O midnight 23 11pm 6 Call time 2 start hour 0 24 23 hours Enter the time at which the sec 24 off ondary dial out phone should be dialed O midnight 23 11pm 7 Call time 2 end hour 0 24 23 hours Enter the time at which the sec ondary dial out phone should be hung up O midnight 23 11pm 8 Number of cars in group 1 6 2 each Enter the number of cars in this group 1 9 Number of floors 2 32 2 floor Enter the number of floors served by this car 10 Car 1 has rear doors 1l yes 0 1l yes Set to 1 yes if car has rear O no O no openings 11 Car 2 has rear doors 1l yes 0 1l yes Set to 1 yes if car has rear O no O no openings 12 Car 3 has rear doors l yes 0 1l yes Set to 1 yes if car has rear O no O no openings 13 Car 4 has rear doors l yes 0 1l yes Set to 1 yes if car has rear O no O no openings 14 Car 5 has rear doors l yes 0 1l yes Set to 1 yes if car has rear O no O no openings 15 Car 6 has rear doors l yes 0 1l yes Set to 1 yes if car has rear 0 no 0 no openings 5 66 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents Index _ MCE Web Table 5 28 BMS Screen Parameters Main Menus
363. the car call priority expired 59 Signals Lantern output 0 25 5 1 sec When the lantern executes a double ding on off time interval this parameter sets the time the lantern will stay ON and the time it will stay OFF before the second ding 60 Signals Passing chime 0 25 5 0 4 sec Passing chime ON time ON time interval 61 Signals Buzzer also yes no no yes no The buzzer output is pulsed together with used as passing chime the passing chime output This allows use of only one buzzer for all functions 62 Passing chime will yes no yes yes no The passing chime will always operate in always operate in auto automatic service matic service 63 Drive Run timeout 5 255 20 sec If the car takes longer than this time to run time reset at each floor between two floors it will stop and generate an error 64 Drive Minimum time to 0 25 5 O sec Once the drive has stopped it will not wait before re starting restart until this time has elapsed 65 Drive Slowdown time 5 255 20 sec If the car takes more than this time to slow out time down at a floor an error will be produced and the car will stop 66 Drive Time it takes to 0 25 5 5 sec Time it takes the car to fully stop if running fully stop from maxi at top speed under ANY condition power mum speed loss emergency safety line etc This will prevent the car from re starting before it is fully stopped 67 Time to abort releveling 0 255 15 sec If the car does n
364. this parameter to synchronous speed will result in a set up fault The correct value is approximately synchronous speed times 0 9833 10 NO LOAD CURR Current required to turn the motor at rated speed with no load This can be determined from the motor manufacturer data sheet If it is not available temporarily set it to 50 The final setting can be calculated by the drive during adap tive tuning Remaining Motor A5 sub menu parameters remain at their default values Configure CO Menu 1 Access the User Switches C1 sub menu 2 SPEED COMMAND SRC Set to MULTISTEP 3 RUN COMMAND SRC Set to EXTERNAL TBL 4 Skip down to SPD REF RELEASE Set to REG RELEASE 5 CONT CONFIRM SRC Set to EXTERNAL TBL Remaining User Switches C1 sub menu parameters remain at their default values Re Access the Logic Inputs C2 sub menu LOG IN 1TB1 16 Set to DRIVE ENABLE LOG IN 2 TB1 17 Set to CONTACT CFIRM LOG IN 3 TB1 18 Set to FAULT RESET LOG IN 5 TB1 20 Set to STEP REF BL LOG IN 6 TB1 21 Set to STEP REF B2 LOG IN 7 TB1 22 Set to STEP REF B3 LOG IN 8 TB1 23 Set to RUN DOWN LOG IN 9 TB1 24 Set to RUN UP wp aANnanrwhnr Contents __ Index _MCE Web 3 29 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A ek 10 Access the Logic Outputs C3 sub menu 11 LOG OUT 1TB1 5 Set to CLOSE CONTACT 12 LOG OUT 2 TB1 7 Set to READY TO RUN 13 LOG OUT 3 TB1 9 Set to SPEED REG RLS 14 LOG OUT 4 TB1I 11 Set to SPEED REG RLS 15 RELAY COIL 1 Set
365. ting D1 02 High Must be gt D1 07 0 0 Max Scale 100 0 FPM D1 03 High Level Must be gt D1 05 amp lt D1 07 0 0 30 0 13 0 FPM D1 05 Level Must be lt D1 03 0 0 15 0 2 5 FPM D1 07 Combination Must be gt D1 03 amp lt D1 02 0 0 Max Scale 42 0 FPM Inspection D1 17 Jog Overrides all speeds 0 0 Max Scale 42 0 FPM Intermediate The actual minimum speed available in volts per hertz V f mode open loop will be 1 5Hz of motor speed The minimum speed in FPM will change with changes to scaling The actual minimum setting will automatically change with changes in scaling e Example at the default scaling of 100 FPM the minimum speed in V f mode is 2 5 FPM e Example at 300 FPM the minimum speed in V f mode is 7 5 FPM This only affects minimum speeds in V f mode Zero is the minimum in Flux Vector mode closed loop Contents __index_ _ MCE Web Startup amp Drive Adjustment A eE Inspection Startup V f mode Open Loop Closed Loop e Before applying power to the controller confirm that the incoming three phase AC voltage at the main line matches the value on the power section of the wiring diagrams Confirm that the three leads from the controller to the motor are connected If there are more than three leads coming out of the motor make sure that the motor is wired in a delta configuration with correct field rotation or follow the motor manufacturer recom mendation e Confirm that th
366. tion 3 Lifting Lifting Brake lifting 4 Lifted Lifted Brake is considered lifted after time out of lifting state 5 Drop delay Drop delay Delay after stop on dropping brake 6 Relevel lift delay RelevLiftDel Delay on picking brake after start during relevels 7 Relevel lifted Lifted Relev Brake is considered lifted after time out of lifting state 8 Relevel drop RelevDropDel Delay in dropping brake during releveling delay 9 Dropping Dropping Dropping of brake sequence 10 Lift error LIFT ERROR 11 Drop error DROP ERROR 12 State 12 State 12 22 Field 0 Init 1 Economy Economy Economy field 2 Forcing Forcing Transition from economy to full field 3 Full Field Full Field Full field 4 Acceleration Acceleration Field from start of run until transition to run field 5 Run Run field Running field 6 Wait Wait Time after a stop that the fields remain at full field setting 7 State 7 STATE 7 8 State 8 State 8 5 16 Manual 42 02 2T00 Main Menus Table 5 1 States Table Car V 6 26 and HHU Version 6 26 02 06 23 Pattern 0 init 1 Off Off Pattern is off zero speed 2 Start delay Start delay Delay after run start for pattern start 3 Leveling Leveling Pattern set for leveling speed 4 Approach Approach Pattern set for approach speed 5 Medium speed Medium speed Pattern set for medium speed 6 High speed High speed Patt
367. tor Sel Monitor Selection 6 Output voltage 4 45 6 6 O1 02 Power On Moni Monitor Selection upon Power up 1 1 4 1 1 tor 1 Frequency reference 2 Output Frequency 3 Output Current 4 User monitor 01 03 Display Scaling Digital Operator Display Selection 10100 to 11000 Set to Sets the units of Frequency References D1 01 to 19999 contract D1 17 Frequency Reference Monitors U1 01 100 speed U1 02 U1 05 and Modbus communication fre FPM quency reference Units are fixed at FPM ft Min 7 with a range of 10 0 to 999 9 FPM at max fre quency 10100 to 19999 User units e g 10100 10 0 FPM 19999 999 9 FPM Key Selections 02 01 Local Remote Local Remote Key 0 1 0 0 Key 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 02 02 Oper Stop Key Stop key during external terminal operation 0 1 1 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 02 03 User Defaults User MCE defined default value settings 0 2 0 1 see Note 1 0 No change 1 Set defaults 2 Clear all curva Control Field Adjustable Parameters are shaded P1 01 Jerk Change P1 Frequency reference for S curve 1 selection Hz O 400 4 0 4 0 P1 02 Jerk Change P2 Frequency reference for S curve 2 selection Hz O 400 10 5 10 5 P1 03 Jerk Change P3 Frequency reference for S curve 3 selecting Hz JO 400 48 0 48 0 P1 04 AccelJerkIn1 S Curve 1 at the Start of Acceleration f s3 0 01 30 00 2 5 hi P1 05 Accel Jerk Out 1 S Curve 1 at the End of Acceleration f s3 0 01 30 00 15 00 15 00 P1 06 Decel
368. ts are placed on the left side of the tape e Down slowdown magnets are placed on the right side of the tape One floor only One floor only Selective Three speed Two speed Three speed Front and Rear doors High speed down magnetic strip One floor run down magnetic strip Rear door zone South pole magnet Floor level Floor level magnetic strip magnetic strip Front door zone South pole magnet Distance _ One floorrunup _ determined magnetic strip by tables High speed up magnetic strip Contents __Index_ _MCE Web 2 7 Hoistway Equipment pe Leveling Magnet Installation A row guide and a level guide are provided to help with magnet installation Therowguideis afive inch long by 2 inch wide magnetic block with markings indicating mag net row location on the 2 inch Row ae tape e The level guide is a nine inch long magnetic strip used to position the floor level magnets vertically 1 Bring the car to floor level Place the row guide across the top of the sensor head i 2 Move the elevator down Place the 9 inch level guide strip vertically under the cen ter of the row guide j 2 8 Manual 42 02 2T00 Row 3 Down slowdown or rear door zone Row 1 Up slowdown or front door zone Row 2 Leveling Steel tape 5N SET 9000 Landing System 3 Use the row guide to locate the leve
369. tsubishi A500 Magnetek DSD 412 Aer Startup amp Drive Adjustment In this Section This section provides startup tuning high speed adjustment and running instructions for the Tricon controller as used with various drives e Magnetek HPV 600 e Magnetek HPV 900 e Yaskawa F7 e Mitsubishi A500 e Magnetek DSD 412 Before drive specific information this section provides controller inspection and power up instructions common to all applications Complete instructions in Sections 1 and 2 before beginning procedures described in this sec tion 3 1 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A eE Controller I nspection A Danger Controller inspection warnings e Read Sections 1 and 2 completely before starting this procedure e Read this section completely before starting this procedure Have someone stand by the main line disconnect during the following phases of the start up procedure for added safety First time power is applied to the controller First time an attempt is made to move the car Insure all safety circuits are functional e Insure all hoistway door interlocks are functional e Insure car gate circuitry is functional Prior to Applying Power e Verify all circuits are wired to the controller properly e Check the following items e INSP switch up e STOP switch down e Door Disconnect up e Verify with an ohmmeter that the governor overspeed switch and any other devices that are wired in at this time w
370. tween Main Menu selections The up and down keys move the programmer into the various Sub Menus at each Main Menu selection Pressing the Enter key will move the programmer into the Sub Menu cur rently displayed At the Sub Menu level the up and down arrows display various parameters in the Sub Menu Pressing the Escape key will move the programmer back to the Main Menu level Pressing the Enter key while at the Sub Menu level moves the programmer into the Entry level to modify the displayed parameter At the Entry level the left and right arrows move a cursor to highlight data When a digit is highlighted pressing the up arrow will increase the value and pressing the down arrow will decrease it Pressing the Enter key will save the value displayed on the programmer Pressing the Escape key will move the programmer back to the Sub Menu level Startup amp Drive Adjustment A ek Parameter Settings Check the following to confirm correct settings for your application Note that many parameters are not listed because their default values will not need to be modified or they are not used in this application Adjust AO Menu 1 2 ON AOR 10 Go to the sub menu Drive AL CONTRACT CAR SPD This is the rated contract speed of the car Set to the speed in feet per minute for which the car is rated CONTRACT MTR SPD Set to the motor RPM that will make the car run at contract speed This is not the data from the motor nameplat
371. u Pressing the Escape key will move the programmer back to the Main Menu level Pressing the Enter key while at the Sub Menu level moves the programmer into the Entry level to modify the displayed parameter At the Entry level the left and right arrows move a cursor to highlight data When a digit is highlighted pressing the up arrow will increase the value and pressing the down arrow will decrease it Pressing the Enter key will save the value displayed on the programmer Pressing the Escape key will move the programmer back to the Sub Menu level Contents Index _MCE Web 3 49 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A ek Parameter Settings The following parameters must be checked to confirm that they are set correctly for your appli cation Note that many parameters are not listed because their default values will not need to be modified or they are not used in this application Adjust AO Menu 1 2 3 9 10 Go to the sub menu Drive A1 CONTRACT CAR SPD Rated contract speed of the car Set to the speed in feet per minute for which the car is rated CONTRACT SPD Set to the motor RPM that will make the car run at contract speed This is not the data from the motor nameplate This parameter sets the speed at which the drive will run the motor when the car is commanded to run at contract speed Skip down to ENCODER PULSES Set to the number of pulses per revolution from the encoder nameplate Go to the S Curves A2 sub m
372. ual shipped with the elevator control may be used with the exceptions listed below The exceptions listed below supersede those in the standard manual Hardware Modifications Typically the only hardware modification may be the occasional use of a motor field trans former You received a motor field transformer if it was dictated by the project specification data Drive Programming Once the controller is powered up the drive must be programmed to interface correctly with the equipment on the job site MCE has pre programmed the drive based on the information pro vided in the survey but it is important to confirm settings before attempting to run the car The drive may fault on initial power up due to incorrect parameters This is normal and should be ignored at this time 1 To use the keypad press the up arrow The display should change to a 0 Press the up arrow again and it should change to a 1 Press the DATA FCTN key and the value pro grammed into parameter one will be displayed Parameter 1 Current Limit should be set to 275 If it is not press the up or down arrow until 275 is reached Press enter to save this value Saved values are only held in the drive volatile RAM at this time Powering down the drive or pressing the reset button will cause this data to be lost For the data to become permanent it must be saved to the drive non volatile RAM If you wish to save any value at this time follow the procedu
373. up Unless your elevator is IOOFPM this value will be different in your control 3 ler LOOFPM Table 3 10 Yaskawa F7 Speed Scaling 100 FPM 11000 1 1000 100 0FPM Parameter Display First Digit Next Four Display Result at a motor speed of 60Hz Number of Decimal Speed of Car at Maxi Places mum Motor Speed L50FPM Table 3 11 Yaskawa F7 Speed Scaling 150 FPM 11500 1 1500 150 0FPM Parameter Display First Digit Next Display Result at a Four motor speed of 60Hz Number of Decimal Speed of Car at Maxi Places mum Motor Speed 200FPM Table 3 12 Yaskawa F7 Speed Scaling 200 FPM 12000 1 2000 200 0FPM Parameter Display First Digit Next Display Result at a Four motor speed of 60Hz Number of Decimal Speed of Car at Maxi Places mum Motor Speed Contents __ Index _MCE Web 3 75 Startup amp Drive Adjustment A ek Maximum motor speed E1 04 Default 60Hz Setting Induction motors may be wound in a variety of configurations such as 4 6 or 8 poles Each con figuration will produce different RPM for the same applied frequency Additionally the amount of slip in the motor design will affect the actual maximum speed at 60Hz The maximum speed of the motor is set in hertz Hz Unless you are performing an over speed test or the motor is rated at some other frequency it is advisable to leave the maximum motor speed at the default value of
374. ur CE fixtures are being driven Heavy Duty CE Driver Board Connection to Tricon serial network HHU programming jack d 1325 253 08 ean Light Duty CE Driver Board ANRA Please refer to Position Indicators 4 View amp Edit Screens CTOP CSTA or i HALL Board on page 5 57 if your system uses the CE light duty a3 e Each system is factory configured according to particular job requirements before shipment Typically you will not need to program position indicator outputs but will only need to connect them as shown in the prints for the particular job 5 54 Manual 42 02 2T00 _Contents Index _MCE Web Main Menus When the screen is selected from the menu the first floor is displayed However the first car floor may not be the cars bottom floor since in a group not all cars may go to the bottom floor Figure 5 6 CE Indicator Screen Table 5 23 CE Indicator Set Up Parameters Editable v Explanation Value Floor Number Floor Number See note above 1 32 Indicator Key in what is to be displayed Use key to start Use keypad to enter a name up to five entry characters The characters can be let ters digits or punctuation marks The Hand Held Unit lists floors in groups of three upper right hand corner of display Use the up down arrow keys or 2 or 8 keys to move the cursor to the floor you want to set up To select a floor to view 2 or up arrow
375. ure the location you choose will have adequate clearance from shaft way beams walls counterweights cab and terminal limit cams Make sure the SET 9000 is not placed too close to the governor lift arm so that when the car safeties are activated the sensor assembly might be damaged or the car safeties prevented from working properly Top Bracket and Hanger Installation 1 Run the car up the hoistway on Inspection mode until the counterweight is resting on a fully compressed buffer 2 Using the clips provided attach the top bracket to the back of the elevator guide rail as shown below The bracket should be installed to position the steel tape as close to the car sling as the guide shoe and hoistway equipment clearance will allow Figure 2 2 Top Tape Bracket I nstallation i Guide rail Rail clips Upper rail bracket Upper tape hanger lamp Steel tape w Bolt the upper tape hanger assembly to the bracket at the chosen location 4 Referring to the figure above push the end of the steel tape through the bottom of the tape hanger clamp 5 Loop the tape as shown and again insert the end through the tape hanger clamp allow ing about 1 inch to protrude above the clamp 6 Tighten the clamp bolts 7 Run the car down the hoistway on Inspection Slowly play out the steel tape as you go Hoistway Equipment A ek Bottom Bracket and Tensioner I nstallation The tape should be attached in the pit low enough so tha
376. ures A proper ground is essential to trouble free operation Ground is defined as a direct connection to EARTH GROUND This type of ground is not always available from the electrical supply panel The electrical conduit is not a sufficient ground for the system Electrical ground should be obtained and certified from the electrical contractor If this is not available keep the following in mind when seeking an adequate connection to EARTH GROUND 1 Building steel is not always earth ground In most cases building beams rest on concrete beam pockets and the earth connection is inadequate 2 Sprinkler system water pipe is not adequate because the sprinkler system is in most cases isolated from a free flowing earth water source If either of the two methods above are chosen for ground and a true electrical ground is later introduced to the system a difference in potential can occur between the assumed ground and the actual earth ground This may lead to unsafe operating conditions and the possibility of electrical shock to passengers or personnel 3 A water pipe is an adequate ground only if the water in the pipe is connected to a contin uous city water source 1 14 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Installation Considerations Wiring Connections for Properly Grounded Systems L An uninterrupted ground wire of at least 8 AWG should be run from each car control ler cabinet chassis or backplate to earth grou
377. used activated Extrn Fault 2 External Fault 2 input is Not used activated Extrn Fault 3 External Fault 3 input is Not used activated Extrn Fault 4 External Fault 4 input is Not used Fan Alarm The heatsink cooling fan Check fan and connections clean heatsink is not operating Fuse Fault Drive DC Bus fuse open Check fuse If OK check motor connections Check motor for continuity from windings to ground If OK replace drive Ground Fault Sum of all phase cur rents exceeded 50 of rated drive amperage Disconnect motor from drive Cycle drive power If problem clears possible bad motor or wiring If problem does not clear possible bad grounding of system or bad drive 3 62 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents __Index _MCE Web Table 3 6 HPV 900 Drive Faults Magnetek HPV 900 AC Vector Drive Hit Torque Limit Measured current equal to or greater than torque limit setting Verify car is balanced correctly Verify motor and drive sizing Can be delayed by increasing value of TRQ LIM MSG DLY Al Mtr id Fault Mtr Data Fault Invalid motor parame ters Check all drive parameters Cycle drive power If fault recurs go to Utility menu and select Restore Defaults If fault per sists replace Control board Note Restore Defaults will require all drive parameters be set to their correct values Mtr Overload Motor has exceeded the motor overload curve Verify
378. utput O Set to 0 to assign Speed Reference to Analog V 0 Spd 0 0 TB1 45 output 0 0 to 10V between TB1 44 Ref 1 Trace Bf 96 Analog output 1 Set to 0 to assign Speed Feedback to Analog v 0 Spd 0 0 TB1 46 output 1 0 to 10V between TB1 46 and Fbk TB1 80 1 Trace Bf 97 Test Point 0 Mult Sets multiplier for Analog output 0 TB1 45 V 0 10 7 1 0 98 Test point 1 Mult Sets multiplier for Analog output 1 TB1 46 V 0 10 7 1 0 99 Spd_Err_Hyst Sets amount of time speed command will be sec 0 2 5 0 8 8 allowed to vary from speed feedback before drive trips on a speed error fault 100 Spd_Err_Lim Sets amount speed command will be allowed 10 100 30 0 30 0 to vary from speed feedback before drive trips on a speed error fault 104 1 Serial Gain Sw Determines source of gain Reduce function at ON OFF OFF OFF parameter 108 If set to 0 it is determined by parameter 105 Gain Switch speed 105 Gain Switch Determines point on speed reference curve 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 Speed at which gain is switched to value adjusted by parameter 108 0 Zero speed 1 0 100 of contract speed 107 Tach Rate Gain Fixes rope response problem in a gearless 0 30 0 0 0 0 0 elevator Should not be adjusted from its default 0 0 but if required should be adjusted in increments of 0 1 Higher values will cause jittery ride quality 108 Gain Reduce Multiplier applied to parameter 40 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 Response when in low gain
379. ve Faults Me Charge Fault DC Bus has not charged DC Bus has not reached desired stabilized voltage level within 2 seconds Check incoming AC power If OK replace drive Comm Fault Invalid Check sum The programmer received four consecu tive invalid messages Possible noise or bad connector for programmer Check connec tor on Control board and programmer Replace Control board or programmer if fault cannot be corrected Comm Fault No Drive Handshake The programmer lost communications with the drive Control board Possible noise or bad connector for programmer Check connec tor on Control board and programmer Replace Control board or programmer if fault cannot be corrected Contactor Fault Contactor state does not match the commanded state The drive has turned on the command to close the main contac tor and the Contactor Confirm signal is not present for the amount of time specified by the Contact Fit Time parameter Cube Data Fault The drive parameters are invalid Check all drive parameters Cycle power to drive If fault recurs go to Utility menu and select Restore Defaults If fault per sists replace Control board Note Restore Defaults will require all drive parameters be set to their correct values Cube ID Fault The drive identification is invalid Check all drive parameters Cycle drive power If fault recurs go to Utility menu and select Restore Defaults If
380. wer OFF Remove the jumper from J 1 1 on the driver 7 Turn the main line power ON Run the car on inspection and wait until the LED over the V I 3 pot lights Adjust the V 1 3 hold voltage pot until approximately 60 brake lifting voltage is obtained or the brake holding voltage previously measured If the brake drops at this level stop the car turn the pot clockwise 1 full turn and attempt to run the car again 8 Whilerunning the car turn the inspection speed pot counterclockwise until the car runs at approximately 8 10 fpm 9 JumpJ13 to 1 2 releveling input 10 Adjust V1 2 to approximately 80 of brake hold voltage This is the releveling brake voltage which may be adjusted higher or lower for a drag brake The brake shoes should not lift completely off the drum If the shoes lift completely off the drum stop the car Turn the V I 2 pot counterclockwise a couple of turns and repeat step 10 If the brake shoes lift completely on re level there may be insufficient torque in the hoist motor to assure adequate leveling control 11 Remove jumper J 1 3 and J 1 2 12 Turn the ACC1 pot fully clockwise This will allow a rapid response of the brake regulator from a lower voltage level to a higher voltage level 13 Turn the DEC1 pot fully clockwise This will allow rapid response of the brake regulator from a higher voltage level to a lower voltage level This will also help prevent excessive arcing on the contacts of the B relay
381. will go off and DS25 will light steadily The inspection learn process is complete 4 14 Manual 42 02 2T00 Contents _ Index _MCE Web Limit Board Adjustment Normal Learn The normal learn procedure varies slightly depending upon the revision of software installed on MPU 2 of the Limit Gripper board Please refer to 2K Limit Gripper Board on page 4 12 for processor location Check the revision level of the software on MPU 2 It will be either V2 xx or V3 xx Perform the learn procedure accordingly Before a normal learn can be performed all proper inputs for direction speed and slowdowns must be connected to the limit gripper board Hoistway limits must be set to open at the same distance from the terminal landing as the selector magnet slowdowns come on The board will sense a normal learn mode when the limit gripper board is in learn mode the UP input goes on and either the HS or MS input is on If the UP input is on but HS or MS are not on the board will default to Inspection learn mode 1 Press and hold switch S3 for 5 seconds to enter learn mode The board will enter learn mode LED DS25 will blink rapidly 8 times per second Diagnostic LEDs DS17 18 and 22 will light steadily 2 Start the learn process at the bottom floor Run the car at high speed to the top floor If the car has V3 xx MPU 2 software or is low speed Parameter 107 set to No and has only one up slowdown USL the DS17 LED will turn off
382. x independent riser Yes No Front D Front Down Hall Call Local hall calls per floor simplex independent Yes No riser Front CB Front Code Blue Simplex IR Yes No Rear CC Rear Car Call For local amp group Yes No Rear U Rear Up Hall Call Local hall calls per floor simplex independent riser Yes No Rear D Rear Down Hall Call Local hall calls per floor simplex independent Yes No riser Rear CB Rear Code Blue Simplex IR Yes No To view all the floors use the 2 or up arrow key to move backwards one 1 floor e 8 or down arrow key to move forward one 1 floor 5 50 Manual 42 02 2T00 Main Menus To edit a floor Press the key when you are on the desired floor You will see a blinking cursor Keep pressing the key until you reach the desired field Press the right or left arrow keys to move between characters in a multi character field Enter the value using the numbers on the keypad or the Yes No keys Press the key to accept You will move to the next field If you are on the last field you will move back to a view screen Press the key to abort change and move back to a view screen To return to the Floor Table menu must be at a view screen use the key The car will reject up calls at the top floor and down calls at the bottom floor Therefore if you are adding floors add the top and the bottom floor first Then add all the intermediate floors

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

mastascanelite - Mast Group Ltd    Celestron FIRSTSCOPE 21052 User's Manual  SERVICE MANUAL MODEL ER-A750  814 Procofer Expert Satinado Mix  Manual do Usuário  PROGRAMMABLE AC POWER SOURCE 61705 User's Manual  livret Assistants Education - Snetap-FSU  Instruments de mesure de la vitesse de l` air Airflow modele  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file